iM
-i.^y \/\..
I
PRINTED AT THE UMFERSITY PRESS, CAMBRIDGE.
I
TTTT IVARON vox TfAMMER AND PURGSTALL,
\VH08R
PROPOUND LEARNING AND VARIED TALENTS
UAVB BEEN
HO LONO AND ST) EARNESTLY DEVOTED TO THE SERVICE
ORIKNTAL LITKRATURE.
THIS ATTHMn
FACILITATE THBiSTUDY OP THE ARABIC LANOUAOB IN ENGLAND,
I» WITH GREAT RPJiPECT
DKDICATKD
THE AUTHOR.
■;'>;!5«!:ft»v:;MSt;
ir
/
)i /-^
PRACTICAL
ARABIC GRAMMAR.
BY
DUNCAN STEWART, Esq.
LONDON: JOHN W. PARKER, WEST STRAND.
M.DCCC.XLI.
PRINTED AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS, CAMBRIDGE.
TO
THE BARON VON HAMMER AND PURGSTALL,
PROFOUND LEARNING AND VARIED TALENTS
HAVE BEEN
SO LONG AND SO EARNESTLY DEVOTED TO THE SERVICE
ORIENTAL LITERATURE.
THIS ATTEMPT
TO FACILITATE THE (STUDY OF THE ARABIC LANGUAGE IN ENGLAND,
IS WITH GREAT RESPECT
DEDICATED
THE AUTHOR.
PREFACE.
In composing the following Grammar, my intention has been, to supply the English student with a work calculated for the use of those, who not making the study of languages the chief pursuit of life, learn Arabic, less for the purpose of reading the many valuable books which it contains, than for its importance as the language of the Religion and Law of the Muhammadan world, and of absolute necessity to every one, who wishes to become a complete and accurate master of either Persian or Turkish.
In seeking to attain this end, I hope however the work will be found not unworthy the notice of those, desirous of obtaining a deeper and more minute know- ledge of one of the finest of languages.
No Grammar that has yet appeared, combines, I think, these advantages ; those compiled by the early Italian orientalists, IMartellotto, Guadagnoli, and others, are abstruse and difficult, and, besides, are of such rare occurrence as to be almost confined to public libraries.
The Grammar of Erpenius is indeed an excellent performance, and comprises the rudiments of the lan- guage, arranged with great skill ; yet how much it leaves to be supplied, may be readily supposed, when it is
VI PREFACE.
known, that the Syntax occupies but nine small quarto pages of large print.
JNIr Richardson's Grammar, chiefly taken from that of Erpenius, is the work of an acute and intelligent mind ; but it is very brief, and the erroneous system upon which it is written, and by which the vowel points, and rules of permutation, are considered to be of little or no consequence, wholly disqualify it for the use of those who wish to become accurate Arabic scholars.
The Grammaire Arahe of M. de Sacy, on the con- trary, may be considered as wholly unfit for the use of the beginner ; it fills two volumes of six hundred large octavo pages each, closely printed ; nor does the mark of the paragraphs, distinguishing those adapted for the use of the young student, from those which are only fit for the perusal of the advanced scholar, completely an- swer, it is conceived, the design of the learned author. The eye becomes confused in looking over the pages, and tlie attention is distracted by separating one para- graph from another. It may even be doubted whether tlie selection is always judicious : of the merits of this great work, however, it is wholly unnecessary to speak here, or to enlarge upon the services rendered to Arabic literature by that amiable and learned man ; no eulo- gium of mine can equal the beautiful tribute paid to his memory, by his friend M. Freytag, a gentleman to whom oriental learning already owes such immense benefits.
PREFACE. VII
The mantle of his prophet-master has indeed fallen upon him*.
The Grammatica Critica of M. Ewald, is unques- tionably a work of great merit and research : but the plan of the author was to consider the Arabic, as in con- nection with its sister dialects of the Semitic family, and to investigate the causes of the language ; and thus , its execution qualifies it more for the study of the pro- j fessed philologist, than for that of him who is engaged ; in active life.
I do not speak of the Arabic Grammar of Mr Lums- den, or of the very ingenious and learned, though some- what whimsical work of Major A. Lockett. They will be found of great value to those who are already profi- cient in the language ; but the first is incomplete, and the second contains only the translation of a treatise upon one part of Arabic Grammar ; neither of them were intended to answer the purpose for which the present Grammar has been compiled.
* Viri illius de litteris Orientalibus merita plures verbis descri- bere conati sunt; sed ut nemo vicem eius explere potest, sic nemo satis digno modo laudare eum mihi posse videtur. Quantis ego ei obstrictus eram beneficiis, tantas ei gratias persolvere nunquam valui. Eheu ! praeceptore privatus sum, cuius sciendi fons nunquam ex- hauriebatur, fautore et amico in beneficiis apud me collocandis non fatigando, qui usque ad extremum vitae halitum benevolentiam mihi suam semper conservavit. Terra ei sit super ossa levis ! Arabum Proverbia, Praef. iv.
viii PREFACE.
By the exertions of eminent and accomplished scholars, during the last twenty years, many valuable Arabic works, which had hitherto been confined to four or five of the national libraries of Europe, have been printed, and are accessible to every student. To M. de Sacy we are in- debted for the Kalilah wa Dimnah^ and the Makamdt of Hariri^ with an excellent commentary.
M. Freytag has just published a beautiful and cor- rect edition of all the proverbs of MaidctJii; the same gentleman had before edited the Fdkihat ul Khulafd, and that precious collection of ancient Arabian poetry, the Hcimdsa. His Lexicon Arabictan would have quite superseded that of Golius, had it appeared in one folio volume ; four quartos are less adapted however for fre- quent use, although the inconvenience is in some degree remedied by the smaller Dictionary which M. Freytag has published in one volume. In India, Mr W. H. JNIacuaghten is publishing a correct edition of the 1001 Nights, in the original Arabic ; and the liberal patron- age of the Asiatic Society has enabled M. Fliigel to give us in Arabic and Latin a fine edition of the great bibliographical work of Hajji Khalfa.
To our countrymen in India we are indebted for many works of the Arabian Grammarians, and for an edition of the Kamus ; the orientalists of the continent have also printed several pieces of Arabic Grammar, including the Ajrumia, by M. Vaucelle, and the Aljii/ya,
PREFACE. IX
by M. de Sacy, whose Anthologie Grammaticale Arabe would alone have entitled him to our gratitude.
This very slight view of the progress that has been lately made in publishing Arabic works, may suffice to shew that the scholar has now ample materials for study, and will be no longer deterred from devoting his time to this noble language, by reflecting, that when he has made himself a master of its Grammar, there is but little to reward him for his toil.
How far the present Grammar may assist the be- ginner it becomes not me to say ; my endeavour has been, as I before observed, to avoid the extremes of bre- vity or prolixity. If the Syntax of Erpenius in nine pages be too short, the beginner will find that of M. de Sacy, which occupies five hundred pages, as much too long. Syntax, it seems to me, is that part of Grammar upon which the greatest labor is bestowed with the least fruit. I repeat, that to the advanced scholar, M. de Sacy's Grammar is of incalculable value, and will be found an excellent introduction to the study of the Arabian Grammarians and Commentators, but to him who has no intention of examining those authors, or who is beginning the study of Arabic, I consider it as less useful than even the old work of Erpenius; de- fective as that book may be, it has hitherto been the only one well adapted for the use of a beginner desirous of acquiring a correct knowledge of the language. Im-
PREFACE.
perfect as my own experience may be considered, I may presume to speak of it, having in early youth been guided by the advice of Sir W. Jones, who, in his discourse upon the Arabs, recommends the student, after having made himself a master of the Grammar of Erpenius, to proceed with the assistance of the Lexicon of Golius, to read through that author's edition of the History of Thmir, by Ibnu Arabshah. This course of study I rigorously followed, substituting only the more portable Lexicon of Willmet, to the accuracy of which I can bear full witness; and taking occasionally the assistance of the edition of Arabshah by Manger. That I often erred, and that much more grammatical knowledge than Erpenius affords, is desirable, and even requisite, for him who wishes to properly understand and appreciate the life of Timur, is unquestionable : but the advice of Sir W. Jones is not to be treated lightly, or his autho- rity to be considered of little weight, because in the course of his vast and varied reading he may sometimes err.
The student is however now provided, as I have ob- served before, with every assistance he can require ; and I should recommend him first to read the Fdkihat id Khulafd of Arabshah, published by M. Freytag. I do not recommend the Koran, the enigmatical and abrupt style of which renders it unfit for the learner, whom it will, besides, supply with a very small stock of words.
PREFACE. XI
I have not thought it necessary to expatiate upon minute orthographical points, belonging almost wholly to manuscripts of the Koran, or to enter into long details upon the divisions and subdivisions ad infinitum, of the Arabian Grammarians. However ingenious the writings of those authors, it is much to be regretted that their attention was so extensively directed to such learned trifles ; there can, I think, be no doubt that their waste of time and talent upon the metaphysical subtleties of Grammar, had a most unhappy effect in diverting them from the more important and useful pursuits of science, in the cultivation of which, although they did much, we should have owed still more to them, had they not forgotten that Grammar is to be considered as a means, and not as an end.
It will be observed, that in the Paradigmata of the verbs, I have given, conformably with the plan of Erpe- nius, the verbal adjective as a participle, and the noun of action in the accusative, as an infinitive. There has, I presume to think, been much needless discussion upon this subject; Erpenius, though exhibiting tliem as par- ticiples and infinitives, in consequence of their verbal origin, confesses they must be regarded, strictly speak- ing, as the verbal adjective and noun of action ; and M. Ewald, very properly, I think, considers that M. de Sacy has gone too far in separating them entirely from the verb, although they do not wholly answer to the
Xll PREFACE.
ideas attached to the words participle and infinitive in the Latin Grammar. I have more particularly enlarged upon their nature and qualities under the heads of verhal adjective, and noun of action.
I have not, however, employed myself in discussing subjects of this, as it seems to me, unprofitable nature. I am wholly of INIajor Lockett's opinion, " Theoretical disquisitions are good in their proper place, but they are not in their proper place in an elementary treatise, which should aim rather at the illustration of specific rules, than the discovery or examination of abstract principles." The Mint Amil, by A. Lockett.
CONTENTS.
Page
Alphabetical Table 18
Observations on the Alphabet 20
On the different Classes of Letters 27
Of Vowels 29
Of Syllables and Orthographical Signs 31
Of the Pause 37
Rules of Permutation of the Letters '• Jj lJ 40
Special Rules. Alif 41
Waw 45
Ya 49
Rules common to * and i^ 51
General Observations 55
Verb.
Of the Verb in general ; 56
Derivatives 57
Quadriliterals —
Conjugation of the first form lJ"*J of regular Triliteral Verbs 63
Of Tenses 64
Numbers —
Genders and Persons 65
On the Tenses ok the regular Triliteral Verbs.
The Preterite 65
The Indefinite 71
Passive Voice 83
Paradigm of the Quadriliteral Verbs 84
Derivatives of the First Class of regular Triliteral Verbs 85
Of Quadriliterals, and Derivatives of the First Class 86
Derivatives of the Second Class of regular Triliteral Verbs 87
XIV CONTENTS.
Paqk
Derivatives of the Third Class of regular Triliteral Verbs 88
Of the other Derivatives gy
The SiRD Verb 90
Of the Irregular Verbs.
Of the Surd Verb 91
Derivative Verbs bearing contraction f 93
Of Verbs ha\4ng Hamzah for one of their Radicals 94
Verb Primitive 95
Derivatives
Of Imperfect Verbs in general 98
Of Imperfect Verbs, of which the First Radical is j or i_? 99
Of Imperfect Verbs of which the Second Radical is j or i^ , called Con-
cave Verbs 101
The Concavej 102
The Concave tJ 104
Verbs derived from Concave Roots IO7
Of Imperfect Verbs, which are at the same time Concave and Hamzated ... 110
Of Imperfect Verbs, whose last Radical is j or c^^ and which are called
Defective Verbs Ill
The Defective J 112
The Defective u5 113
Defective * preceded by Kasrah 117
Defective Derivatives 121
Of Verbs, being at the same time Defective and Hamzated 122
Of Verbs doubly Imperfect 124
Of Verbs doubly Imperfect and Hamzated 126
Of the Negative Verb —
Verbs of Praise and Blame 127
Of Verbs of Admiration 128
Of Nouns 129
Name of the Agent and Patient 130
Name of Place and Time 131
Name of Instrument or Vessel 134
Noun of Action 136
Nouns of Action of the Primitive Triliteral Verb 138
of Derivatives —
formed from Surd Verbs 139
CONTENTS. XV
Pags
Nouns of Aetion of Hamzated Verbs 139
of similar Verbs 140
derived from Concave Verbs 141
of Defective Verbs —
of Verbs doubly Imperfect 143
Noun of Unity —
Possessive Nouns 145
Diminutive Nouns 146
Of Adjectives —
Of Genders 147
The manner of forming the Feminine Gender 148
Of Numbers 150
Table, shewing to what forms of the singular those of the plural usually
belong 166
Of Declension 168
Of Comparison 176
The Article 178
Of Numerals 180
The Ordinal Number 184
Of the Pronoun 187
Of Particles 196
Of separate Particles 202
Adverbs 205
List of the most common Adverbs and Adverbial Names 206
Conjunctions 212
Interjections 213
Syntax 215
Syntax of the Noun —
Ordinal Numbers 226
Syntax of the Verb 229
Particles 243
Proverbs 257
Extracts 269
CORRIGENDA AND ADDENDA.
Page 23, note, line 2, fur final read initial, and add — M. de Sacy probably spe- cifies only the initial and medial letters, because the final c-J and Jj are often written without any point whatever.
ige :5(), |
line |
18 for |
read |
||
62 |
9, 11 |
U |
■dS- |
||
73 |
7 ... |
J^ |
J' |
||
75 |
10 ... |
||||
96 |
10 ... |
'S~^' |
|||
111 |
3 ... |
Hamzah's |
Hamzahs |
||
133 |
19 ... |
graize |
graze |
||
145 |
16 ... |
||||
1G4, |
last |
line after " |
servile letters" — add sometimes |
||
175, |
line |
6 for |
read |
o ^ o |
|
170 |
3 ... |
J --O.J |
|||
188 |
13 ... |
5 |
ji |
||
208 |
20 ... |
here |
there |
||
218 |
7 ... |
^iw |
f^*^. |
||
224 |
IC ... |
Si' |
^ilj, and |
226 14 ... Wednesday ... Tuesday
STEWARTS ARABIC GRAMMAR.
CORRIGENDA AND ADDENDA.
Page Line
21 23 for ddaiii read Zasj .
23 note 2 for final, read initial ; and add M. de Sacy, probably, only specifies the initial and medial letters, because the final (_J and j are often v^Titten without any point whatever.
30 18 for 4,\mj\ read a\u^\ .
31 2 for ^^\ read ^Uj .
31 6 for y'JCj read ^JCi .
32 8 for rH^5 read juJ -
32 8 for ^J^ ^ read ^U ^ .
33 19 after Wasla, add and called Alif of Union.
35 9 ybr i_5jij' — t^rl.j^ ^^^ i^j^ — Mt'.y*-' •
40 last line for d?^ read c:j>J^ . 49 3 after second, add radical.
for fci^ ^ read ^J>^ ^ •
/or <3j^ read ^J^ .
for uj^ read ijj^ •
50 |
21 |
54 |
12 |
58 |
20 |
2 CORRIGENDA AND ADDENDA.
Page Line
59 16 after we write or, add to.
62 9 and 11 for Ikj^ read Ikj^ .
66 9 for \jjj \ read \^J3 \ .
67 12 for ji read ji .
68 11 for ^j read ^j .
71 1 for \^^ \ read \^jj^ \ .
Jtts ; «j s-
73 7 for ^\ read ^ \ .
74 1 for "iS read i\ .
o
74 4 /or J^ljj reac? J^b' .
74 17 /or (jr^. and j^r-^ rg«<^ U/^. ^'^^ UT^
74 18 /or (jlyaJJ rmc? (jl3^^,>dJu .
76 10 /or ^Ji^ read ^JJUJJ .
76 4 /)r (jy^. ^^'^^ i^r^. •
76 5 /?r u >«iaJJ rgac^ ur^ •
76 2 /or \Juj r^ac? \Juj .
77 10 for ^js? read fjsri. .
78 22 for others, read other times.
83 7 for ^ read ul^ .
85 11 for u-^"^ r^ac? t— J«^ .
85 12 for ^^:^\ read ^^^\ .
CORRIGENDA AND ADDENDA. 3
Page Line
86 10 for f P"'^ ^'^^^ fj^'^'
86 14 for commences with Alif servile, read has an
initial Alif. 89 8 for it, read Fathah.
89 11 for juSj . jjjJJj . iXcljJ . JaiUJu . read
In the first column on the right, for 3rd Pers. Masc. read 2d Pers. Masc.
for i y^ read iy^ .
for Hamzah's read Hamzahs.
for ^,J^- ^^^j ^^^^ hj^- '^^J • In the Passive, for ij^^j^. read i^^A ■ In the Active, for i<^j>, read i^A • for J[) read ^b .
for ^ji^ji^ read ^l>^_ .
/''• uV.y. ^''^^^ t:;:*.^: • /or ^^;:A:>^^ read ^JOr^t .
for Jxsl r^ac? Jwl .
/b>' *'>i^ . A^ read *liu • *»iU . for graize read graze.
for iXsr' read Iksr .
96 |
10 |
97 |
9 |
110 |
12 |
111 |
3 |
120 |
3 |
121 |
5 |
121 |
9 |
122 |
7 |
123 |
8 |
128 |
8 |
125 |
3 |
128 |
6 |
133 |
10 |
133 |
19 |
136 |
2 |
4 CORRIGKNDA AND ADDENDA.
Page Line
ir o - s ~> -
138 In No. 26", for J^ read ^}f.s .
140 List line but one, for ^^^ read ^jlj •
145 16 for ^\ J\ read ^"^ \ .
153 10 for ,iy*s. read iiy^ .
157 1 for ls>~^ . As.-.^ read 6.»~^ ■ <L>-j\ .
s s. s t
159 2 /b;- ^1 read ^^ .
159 8 for w-i^ij reac? '^y^j ■
159 19 /or concave rmc? surd.
163 13 for JjjUi read J^^u^Uj .
164 16 for ^\j^ read i^lJ^ .
164 last line after servile letters, add sometimes. 166 4 for lAs- read Lie .
166 last line but one, for Ja^ read Ja^ .
1 67 4 for Jj Ui read Jj \xi .
1 68 last line for J^j \ read J^j \ .
175 6 /or Lc-elc /'gac? aLUili .
176 3 /or Jju\ reac? JjcM .
177 5 a/V«r superiority, add in such cases as those just
mentioned.
179 3 for Jj}\ read Jji) 1 .
185 16 for JUi read JUi .
CORRIGENDA AND ADDENDA.
Page Line
185 last line, for tJuOJS \ read ti-Jal \ ■
186 |
12 |
for |
^>1 read Uj! . |
187 |
7 |
for |
These rmc? They. |
188 |
13 |
for |
|
188 |
17 |
for |
Ji^\ read JFl . |
193 |
1 |
194 |
4 |
194 |
8 |
196 |
18 |
198 |
3 |
188 18 for ^\ read ^\ .
for k\13 read nVij .
for ^U*- read ^U^- .
after here ac?c? with a verb,
after certainly add j , and.
/or *0 ^ read ^XJi \ .
200 last line (/^^^ passive.
202 17 for ^lia^ rmc? dU< .
204 17 for U ^-i read U^ .
208 last line but one, for here read there.
213 13 for if read is.
217 last line, for Tuesday read Thursday.
218 7 /or -*A^. rg«c? .fs^A^. • 218 7 /or >^ read *j.t .
224 1 6 /or c^-*- and ij^Jj read c><-- Jmd ijilj ^
226 J 4 for Wednesday readj Tuesday.
6 CORRIGENDA AND ADDENDA.
Page Line
231 9 for ^j\ read J^f\-
233 17&18 for sub-ject read object. 233 23 for '^\ read sM .
237 16 for W read W.
240 5 for \xii read ^/Qi^.
241 11 for his read the.
241 13 for ^j*>.ly read JJk^ly.
244 16 for i^::.,.^ and <S^ read c:,-ws and t^.
for ^<J^ rmo? j_«^ .
/or expected rm^^ excepted.
/or 1j»Jot-j reac/ I^XJvx-j .
(/g?^ or only ; and read upon either or neither of them.
/or ijj J rmfi? ^%j .
/or c_^it_i31 rm^ <-r^»^ ^ •
/or .j*:^Aj r^ac? i^^.. ■
for Jjb r<^o!f/ Jij .
/or ^^t>(.J^' rga<^ /j^*^ •
/or ».-7'>^^ ^^«<^ i._.-^.s?1 .
/or ^1 A'. >'^«fl? hj^ '
for t_ivj rgo!(/ u-i^^*^ ■
244 |
21 |
248 |
19 |
250 |
20 |
253 |
4 |
264 |
1 |
264 |
|
265 |
12 |
266 |
9 |
266 |
18 |
267 |
16 |
269 |
7 |
270 |
3 |
CORRIGENDA AND ADDENDA.
Page Line
270 |
13 |
for |
Ua-uuJl read Vi^JW . |
270 |
15 |
for |
J.^aju*j read J^^Jjio' . |
271 |
5 |
for |
X<% read <uK . |
271 |
9 |
for |
^1^ read ^^ . |
274 |
2 |
for |
^^.♦l*u^b read ^^^J^aL |
276 |
3 |
for |
j_Jlftjli read jUj'U . |
279 |
3 |
for |
uL-v»-flJLcl read c:„.^,♦-tf |
281 |
16 |
lefore c-^i-* insert |
|
284 |
8 |
for |
L^^U read u^^^U |
285 |
13 |
for |
Khalib read Khatib. |
294 |
4 |
for |
her read his. |
LONDON:
JOHN W. PARKER, PUBLISHER, WEST STRAND.
A PRACTICAL GRAMMAR
ARABIC LANGUAGE.
The Arabic Alphabet consists of twenty-eight letters, differ- ently shaped, according to their position at the beginning, middle, or end of words ; the names and powers, the order and figure of which may be seen in the following Table.
ALPHABETICAL
Final. |
Medial. |
Numerical |
||||||||
Connec. |
Uncon. |
Connec. |
Initial. |
value. |
Hebrew. |
Syriae. |
||||
1 |
A |
1I\ |
Alif |
I |
^ |
I |
1 |
1 |
K |
1 |
2 |
B |
~^ |
Ba |
C_> |
Jk |
J |
2 |
1 |
»Ci |
|
3 |
T |
"4j |
Ta |
i>JL^ |
c:-? |
I |
J |
400 |
T\- |
Z |
4 |
Th |
'X' |
Tha |
jt^ |
Cj |
J^ |
J |
500 |
h |
I |
5 |
J |
rj |
Jim |
t |
^ |
JS. |
5»- |
3 |
- \ |
\ |
6 |
H |
?u |
Hha |
t |
r |
S. |
s>- |
8 |
n: ' |
wKt |
7 |
Kh |
fu |
Kha |
t |
t |
^ |
>■ |
.600 |
i S^ |
>^^ ^^ |
8 |
D |
5 — |
Dal |
J* |
J |
S |
J |
4 |
1 |
J |
9 |
Dz |
J'^ |
Dzal |
Js, |
J |
S |
j |
700 |
1 |
> |
10 |
R |
5t |
USL |
J |
J |
J |
J |
200 |
-I ' |
5 |
11 |
Z |
•I; |
Za |
J |
J |
) |
J |
7 |
r |
1 |
12 |
S |
c^ |
Sin |
L^ |
U^ |
<UA |
m) |
60 |
D ■ |
JD |
13 |
Sh |
> |
Shin |
lA |
f. |
A xu |
A |
300 |
tt; ■ |
^ |
14 |
s |
jU |
Sad |
(^ |
J" |
m2 |
ta |
90 |
\^ ■ |
s |
15 |
D |
iu |
Dad |
c-^ |
J> |
t^ |
^ |
800 |
X ^ |
s |
16 |
T |
?i |
Ta |
la |
L |
L |
1. |
9 |
JD^ |
^ |
17 |
D |
h |
Da |
li |
]o |
li |
li |
900 |
iD |
w |
18 |
A |
S o- |
Ain |
t |
t |
X |
£• |
70 |
v |
VX |
19 |
Gh |
So' |
Ghain |
t |
i |
X |
i. |
1000 |
3 |
vi^ |
20 |
F |
ni |
Fa |
i_a |
U_J |
i |
i |
80 |
«n 2 |
w£) |
$^
TABLE.
Final. |
Medial. Connec. |
Initial. |
Numerical value. |
Hebrew. |
||||||
Coimec. |
Uncon. |
|||||||||
21 |
K |
li\i |
Kaf |
(S |
0 |
& |
"i |
100 |
P |
*o |
22 |
K |
Li^ |
Kef |
^ |
^ |
i |
20 |
1 3 |
^ID ^O |
|
23 |
L |
>' |
Lam |
J |
J |
i |
\ |
30 |
V |
V^ |
24 |
M |
r^ |
Mim |
r |
r |
/«. |
y* |
40 |
D !:: |
^ |
25 |
N |
uy |
Nun |
cr |
c; |
> |
J |
50 |
1 3- |
r^ |
26 |
W |
'.^. |
Waw |
J |
J |
^ |
3 |
6 |
1 |
0 |
27 |
H |
*la» |
Heh |
a. |
Jb |
5 |
n |
01 |
||
28 |
Y La |
Ya |
I |
J^ |
" |
10 |
> ■ |
Short Vowels a ^ i -:^ u -^ Long Vowels a, \^- i (ee) 4_f
1234567890
1840
o ' So'
These figures, which are called ^sJJt ^j or Indian ciphers, are used in preference to the inconvenient mode of the letters of the Alphabet. They are written from left to right, as may be seen by the date 1840. This is a sufficient indication of their foreign origin.
2—2
OBSERVATIONS ON THE ALPHABET.
The Arabic Alphabet, like those of the other Semitic nations, is composed of consonants alone. The letters \, », and ^, often indeed appear to perform the part of vowels ; but that term is really correct, only when applied to the three points, which will be described hereafter.
The character here used, is that which is named Naskhi
g>-MjJ
, the only one employed in printed Arabic, and of which
all others are but variations, chiefly made for the purpose of ornament.
Among these the ShuM, ^j»^^ , is peculiar to Inscriptions,
the titles of books, &c., and is distinguished by the greater size and thickness of the letters, and by the elegance of its flourishes.
The Taalik ^jAxj , is the beautiful flowing character used
in Persian poetr}', and the Shakastah ^LLuCi or broken, is a careless scrawl, also used in Persian, and in which the diacritical points distinguishing the various letters, are almost wholly neg- lected. These two last are employed in ^Titing Persian only. The Arabs being great admirers of Calligraphy, have however other variations, but as these are confined to manuscripts, and easily to be distinguished, as formed from the Naskhi it is not deemed necessary to dwell upon them here.
ON THE ALPHABET. 21
The order in whicli the letters are placed in this Alphabet, is not that which has always prevailed ; a more ancient one is known by the technical terra Ahvj'ad, which is the first of
the following eight unmeaning and imaginary words, \^ s=>^j\
jJi-tf i^sLi ^.^j^Jaji j^^flix-; -*!> L5^' According to this ar- rangement it is that the letters are used as numerals.
The African Arabs have an Abujad somewhat different from that which belongs to Asia, but it may be here observed that by the term of Arabs of Africa, not those of Egypt, but of Western Africa (Maghrib) are always to be understood. The Ldm-Alif is added to the Alphabet, merely to shew the peculiar mode in which the Alif is included in, or added to the Lam.
The various columns in which the Alphabet appears, shew, J st, their order ; 2nd, their names ; Srd, 4th, 5th and 6th the different forms which each letter assumes, as being 1st, wholly isolated ; 2nd, joined to the preceding letter ; ,Srd, joined to the preceding and following ; 4th, joined only to the following one. Some letters, it will be seen, are never joined to their succeeding one, though when J J j j and ^ are followed by s at the end of a word they may be joined together.
Several letters are distinguished from others of the same shape by the addition of one or more points ; these, which the
Arabians denominate adaiLs noktah., we call diacritical, or dis- tinctive. As these points are frequently omitted by the care- lessness of transcribers, proper names are often minutely described by Arabian authors ; every letter being carefully enumerated, and the vowel points ascertained ; in such cases, as an addi- tional precaution, those letters which resemble others in form
22 UN THE ALPHABET.
are distinguished by the epithets ^L*^;, without points, (dia-
-5 ' ' t- -* critical,) and cUj>-x^ pointed*.
To avoid the mistakes which may arise from the similarity
of different letters, other means are also used ; the letters
V V V
(^ 1 J are marked thus (j^ . J ; and ? ^ u^ r ^.re re- peated in smaller characters underneath. This sometimes dis- tinguishes {jM also, or three points are written below it (jw ;
these precautions are however only to be found in the most accu- rate manuscripts, but it is not to be supposed that the want of them, leaves any great difficulty to be surmounted; he who is well acquainted with but a few of the many books now printed, will find little difficulty in reading manuscripts, which are, after all, seldom so badly WTitten as to offer much obstacle to the Student.
The African character differs little from that of Asia, but in the former, the letter uJ initial or medial, has the diacritical point below i s.\ j in the same places has only one point above i if. The Africans sometimes use the three letters ^ j and
* Thus in the History of Timur,
o -^ <> ' ^ -' -^
His name was Timiir, with Td having Kasrah, and two points above ; and Yd quiescent, with two points below ; and Wdw quiescent, between Mim bearing Dammah, and Rd without any points.
+ I give this upon the authority of M. de Sacy, not having had myself the opportunity of examining African manuscripts. Erpenius
ON THE ALPHABET. 23
u-J with three points above, or beneath ; they then have the pronunciation of our g in get^ or guard ; by the addition of these points below they also give to the letter it, the sound of our cli in chip, charm, &c. ^.i
The Arabic, like the Hebrew, and many other Eastern languages, is written from right to left.
No combination of letters, or directions for using the organs of speech, can convey all the sounds of the Arabic Alphabet correctly ; nor, were it possible, would it be easy to decide what standard of pronunciation was to be preferred to all others. The Arabic language is that of the religion and law of Mu- hammadan states, from the Ganges to the Straits of Gibraltar and the banks of the Danube ; from Cape Comorin to Chinese Tartary ; it is not only pronounced in various ways by these various people, but even near its native deserts, great differences exist in the sounds given to many of its letters. In the towns the pronunciation is far from being as correct as among the Bedouins. Baghdad discriminates Jj J^ ^ and ]a , while Aleppo makes Jj 1? and j nearly the same, but ^jo like J. Egypt sounds -. hard, like g in go, and cJ in some parts of Syria is pronounced like t^, MarJcab, or Marshah.
These variations however are of no great consequence ; he who uses the mode prevailing at Delhi, will find no difficulty whatever in conversing with a native of Fez or Morocco*.
makes no such distinction as to this taking place, only in medial,
or final i J and Jj ; both he and M. Ewald give it as a general rule,
whether those letters be initial, medial, or final.
* Mr Lumsden notices the difficulty which a native of India has to understand an Arab ; it is within my own knowledge, however.
/ ■
24 ON THE ALPHABET.
The most harmonious pronunciation indeed is that of the learned of Turkey and Persia, who soften down those hard and gut- tural letters, to which they find it so diJB&cult to give the genuine Arabic sounds.
Alif^ when attended by Hamzah * (see p. 32), is the soft breathing of the Greeks, or English h not aspirated, and is a species of consonant always accompanying the vowels which are preceded by no other consonant. When unaccompanied by Hamzah, Alif is employed to lengthen the vowel Fathah, or A^ which goes before it.
i > and ti-J are precisely our b and t.
CL> this letter, though said to have the power of our th in thing ^ is, among the Arabs themselves, almost always pro- nounced like lU ; some even consider the first sound as vicious. The Turks and Persians pronounce it like S.
_, answers to our j in jest^ &c. In Egypt, as has been be- fore said, it is pronounced like hard g in get^ give, &c. This prevails also at Maskat, and some other places.
_ is our h strongly aspirated or slightly guttural. /-/ - this is the German ch, as in the words Nacht, Biich. Among the Turks and Persians, it is however much softened
and reduced to almost the simple h. \::^ is by them pronounced \i»~ ; we express it by the letters kh, as in dJo^ Khalif.
that the native Professor at Haileybury, some years back, conversed fluently with a merchant of Algiers, and the latter being asked if they understood each other easilj', replied with great signs of asto- nishment, "Understand each other! pourquoi non?"
ON THE ALPHABET. 25
^i is our d.
j this generally corresponds, like the preceding, with our d; some, however, as the Arabs of Maskat, give it the sound of our z, which is also done by the Turks and Persians,
. is exactly our r, and j our 2.
(jM is our s and ^ sh.
^jS is the letter s, with a stronger articulation than (jw :, which however it so much resembles, as to be often confounded with it.
^ answers among the Arabs to our d, uttered with a kind of emphasis ; the Turks and Persians use it as another z.
1? is a strong t.
i? differs nothing from ^, for which it is often ^^Titten. In EgA-pt, as always among the Turks, it becomes z.
c the articulation of this letter is given up by all our gram- marians, as impossible to be conveyed to European ears ; it is a stronger kind of Hamzah or guttural a ; by the operation of the vowel points it often takes the sound of ?', 0, or u.
4 this is best represented by the letters gh, though in some countries rather taking the sound of rh. uJ is our f.
J is nearly our k, receiving, however, among many of the Arabs, a guttural emphasis, which it would be as difficult as it is useless to attempt to imitate. Those of Maskat, Morocco, and other places, confound it with c .
eJ is our k ; many of the Arabs soften it into the French q, in queue^ qui ; and this is the practice among the Turks, who insert, as it were, a short i after it when it comes before Wr • :
26 ON THE ALPHABET.
as *Xcl^ Kidghit, paper; Jjl^jL* MuluJcidnah, royal; at Maskat, it becomes a hard g, so as to be by those Arabs confounded with _ and , v.
( !>;
^ before * f f f r ^5 sounds like the English n, which is its natural articulation, or what the Arabian grammarians
i call j\^\ or manifestation. When followed by c_^ it becomes
m, 'and when it precedes any of the letters forming the technical
word jJ^j! it takes the sound of the following letter, ( as ci^-Jo ^
mim baitin ; c_^ ^^ w{r rabbin ; Ja! -« «227 lailin ; ^^j^^^aj^
mummahisun ; (•Jkiijo jj^ ayyatakaddama ; J1»jui mauwalun. Be- fore all the other letters it sounds like ng in the word hring ;
as ^~xc ^^ wir;z(/ tinin.
J is among the Arabs pronounced like our w ; with the Turks and Persians it is «; when quiescent, and following Dammah, it becomes a long u.
a is A with a very slight aspiration ; when at the end of words and surmounted by two points, it generally marks the feminine gender, and is pronounced like i^, t; being generally changed to that letter by the Persians and Turks, when they borrow such words from the Arabic.
^ is our y, as in yelp., yonder. When quiescent and fol- lowing Kasrah it coalesces with that vowel, and is pronounced like ee.
On the Different Classes of Letters.
The Alphabet may be divided under the heads of pro- nunciation, strength, affinity, office, and society.
1st. Six letters are called Gutturals ^ i c ^ _ \ ; four, -' /
Labials ^ (• i J < > '- four, Palatials ,« >— ^ ij TT ' ©^e^^^? Dentals ^
jjJlsbJJ Cl: CLi ', and six, Linguals ^j^ j j ^ ^ \J>*- ^
The Dentals and Linguals are called solar letters, the rest lunar. 1
2nd. Strength. The three letters o j ^ are called infirm letters^ <iUll <— J; r=- being considered as having no sound but ^ '
what they receive from the vowel points, either attending them- selves, or the preceding letters. All the others are stiled robust.
3rd. Affinity. Some letters are permutable, bemg such in general as are formed by the same organs, as ^ with {j^, J with CJj but particularly u? j 1 »' which are often substituted one for another.
4th. Office. Some are denominated Radical, others ser- /^
? T V - i- - i" 'J < n ,^^,
vile ; the Radicals are sixteen, j i c i^^i^ij^/pjj J t^ L - — Cj, and are so called, because they are never found excepting in the roots of Arabic words. The rest are
rrv nwD called serviles, being employed in forming the derivatives, and "'^■^'' " other inflexions from the roots. The servile letters, however,
^ 3. / g^pg often Radicals, particularly in the imperfect verbs, but the Radicals are never serviles, excepting 1? and J , which are some- times substituted for CLi.
5th. Society/. Some are compatible, which may follow one ' '^ another in the same word ; the others cannot, and are there- fore called incompatible. These consist of the Gutturals s c c.
28 ON THE DIFP^ERENT CLASSES OF LETTERS.
^ ^ (though 3 is sometimes subjoined to c) together with the followinor :
< — > with u_i and *.
<JL? *-^ O^ ^ ^ 1? and is .
- c J and lJ-
C
Is jj and lJ •
i |
^ ^ Is and ]s |
J |
J- |
J |
^ ^ and Is. |
(^ |
u^ and ^. |
L/i |
J>- |
U^ |
^ \s and is . |
c/' |
1? and Ij . |
i. |
\s and eJ. |
^ |
^ and J . |
t |
J and uJ. |
J |
^. |
l;
except J ^y wo means.
I and ^ //e manifested. The servile letters in the above list, are only included as incompatibles when they constitute part of the root of any word ; for when acting as serviles, they may be joined with any letter,
as Laki in silver : i,_<3Ji^ as you say. These observations may be
of some use in manuscripts, where the diacritical points are either neglected, or irregularly placed ; as also in fixing ambi- guous meanings and distinguishing the pure from the corrupted Arabic.
Of Voivels. The Arabians have only three characters for vowels, which they call Fathah -^vjli or ^ Jo , Kasrah ju^ or i\*u^ , and Dam-
mah >J or Ia^ . The first represented by a small oblique line over the letter, the second by a similar stroke under the letter, and the third by a small curve^like a comma.
Fathah " sounding as a <__> . Kasrah ^ i i^ ■
Dammah -. w l->. «-
These are sometimes doubled in the final letters, which is called .fjy^' Tanwin, or nunnation, because pronounced as if
terminated by ^\ as Jr^ Rajulun, a man, Jj>-^ Rajulin, of a
man, i^^ Rajulan, a man ; the first marks the nominative case of substantives, adjectives, or participles; the second the geni- tive, and the third the accusative, as also infinitives and nouns placed adverbially.
Although it be impossible to fix precisely the circumstances in which the Arabian vowels represent a soimd more or less open, it may be observed in general that Fathah is pronounced somewhat like a in the word all, and Dammah like 00 in moon : when these two vowels are placed over a guttural or hard con- sonant, or immediately precede such an one, the letters which produce this effect are the following :l?^_^^tfi-jcci?. In other places Fathah frequently takes a sound resembling e in scene or at in ^aiti ; and Dammah is pronounced like u in but, 0 in above, or ou in rough. These distinctions however
30 OF VOWELS.
are seldom observed; Fathak usually receives the sound of our English short a in rap or hat, and Dammah is pronounced almost always like u in hut.
Kasrah has the short sound of i in thin, but never that of the English i in thine.
When those vowels are placed over any letter preceding ^ . \ quiescent, that is, without vowels, they coalesce with them,
their respective sounds being lengthened ; as j\i Mr ; j J hoor ;
_xj heer.
^ » \ are said to possess their homogeneous or natural vowels when Fathah is placed over or precedes \ ', Kasrah ^j ; and Dammah j ; if otherwise, they are called heterogeneous or dissimilar ; when the dissimilar vowels precede those letters qui-
4^j escent, they either form diphthongs with them, as Jjs! night;
jbjs- a jewel ; or remain silent, as ^JU when ; but when they
have vowels placed over them, they assume, like other conso-
^. nants, the sound of such superscribed vowels, whether natural
or dissimilar ; as aXu^3\ Ittisamun, the assuming a badge, or
marHng one''s self; j^\ Unsur, assist thou ; Ajj^ Wuzara, Vazirs ; J. Wabara, he delayed ; ^J^. Yamin, the right hand ; (-rir^. Yadrubu, he strikes.
It must be observed that j and i_$, preceded by Fathah,
often take the place of long AUf, as iJA** prayer ; ij^j he threw
him ; for 'iLa and il«. . In such cases these letters do not bear Jazmah, a mark which will be spoken of in the next article. The long AUf is sometimes omitted in the middle of words,
OF VOWELS. 31
such omission being indicated by the Fathah being placed per-
pendicularly, as \^Ji>, ^\, for IjU^, ^^l-^j- These three letters of prolongation perform that office, and are then called
>^^\ i—i»ji>- letters of extension, chiefly in the beginning and middle of words ; when belonging to the last syllable, as in
JO' o'
[s.J, jjsj, j^Jkij their effect is not very perceptible. They however, m all cases, compose long syllables in poetry.
Of Syllables and Orthographical Signs.
Syllables are divided into pure and mixed, the pure con- sisting of only one consonant and one vowel, as < ? t_-? *_; ; the
mixed of two consonants, joined by one vowel, as J Ian ; ^ 171171 ; *ji> huTn ; no syllable in this language either begin- ning with a vowel, or consisting of one simply. Over the second letter of every mixed syllable is placed the following character ( <- ) called
5 o-
Jazmah *j»~ or a7nputation, so named, because it sepa- rates the artificial syllable at the end of which it is found,
from the syllable following; it is also called i^s^ sukun or
rest. The second letter of the mixed syllable is not expressed
when followed by another of the same kind, but is represented
by a character named
Tashdid Jo JglJ" ( - ) signifying corrohoratio7i^ which doubles the letter over which it is placed, as Jj, where the two j
32 OF SYLLABLES
coalesce, instead of being written Jj Lj . This character may be put over any letter but \, and is used, first, in the coalition of two similar letters as above. Secondly, when CJ follows J ;
in order to avoid a harshness of sound, as C-JJo-^ Wajattu. Thirdly, when any of the solar letters follow the article JU as ^jJiXll Addinu, the faith ; fj^^tJ^W Ashshamsu, the sun ; and fourthly, when . Jazmated or the nunnation points, precede
any of the letters in the technical word j^^, as ^J^ ^
millisani, &c. In all which cases the preceding letter loses its own, and takes the sound of that over which Tashdid is placed.
Hanizah ijuji ( * ) is only another name and form for \ , and is made subservient to it in a variety of respects ; it always
o o
accompanies the vowel which attends \, as {j^\, i ^^\-
When J and ^_J take the place of Alif moveable, Hamzak
o o
S S- ^ ' s-
is placed above those letters; as, ^^y<, (.:>oo- . In such cases it is more regular to suppress the points of the ^ thus JjU and
not JjIj-
It often occurs that instead of writing either \ or the j or ^ with Hamzah substituted for it, as has been just said, the Hamzah only is written, and the letter which should ac- company it is suppressed.
This happens, (1) often in the middle, and always at the end of words, after a letter of prolongation, or a letter jazmated,
AND ORTHOGRAPHICAL SIGNS. 3S
(2) In the middle of words, after an Alif of prolonga- tion, every time that Hamzah has Fathak for its vowel, as
(3) In the middle, and at the end of words, when two j or two 1^ meet, of which the second would be quiescent if the letter bearing Hamzah were not suppressed
(jw«j for {j*i^^j , IjJ^ for IjjJo , fj^^ for ijrSH^ •
(4) In the middle of words, when Hamzah has Fathah for its vowel, and is immediately preceded by a letter bearing Jazmah, to which the vowel of the Hamzah is carried, the articulation of Hamzah being quite suppressed
Juuuu^ for ^LuL^, ity^ for 'ii\^. The suppression of j and ^ in the cases noticed under (3) is not constantly observed, and such words are often written
U^'iiJ^ &c.
Wasla (-o) J-jjj, implies conjunction, and is only inscribed over AUf at the beginning of a word, to mark an union with
the preceding one, ^4/*/ being then silent, as JUll c:^. Alif
is superscribed with Wasla, first in the imperative of the first conjugation. Secondly, in the preterite active, imperative, and infinitive, of the derivative conjugations of the second and third
classes. Thirdly, in the following ten nouns : L<\ a man ; iJL<t
So S-o S'o -o
a woman ; ^\ a son ; ijj\ a dauqhtei- ; jJJ\ a son ; ^Ji)^\ two,
''O So So
(masc), ^JX)3\ two, (fern.) ^\ a nmm ; ci^w.-^ the buttocks ; 3
S-i OF SYLLABLES
-<«j3 an oath ; and lastly in the ai'ticlo J^ ; in all which cases, unless beginning a sentence, or following the article, the initial \, is not pronounced, the subsequent letter being always jazmated and united in pronunciation to the vowel with which the pre-
ceding word ends, as 'i\j<\ Jo the hand of a woman, \ being
sometimes even altogether omitted, as ^Uj5 j Cijj^ \ C-jJo- • ffarith, the son of Hammdm, related. It is also dropped when
the subsequent letter has a vowel ; as \^ for s^\ , extend thou. If any word, whose final letter is naturally jazmated, precedes Alif of union, that Alif does not, in pronunciation, take the vowel which belongs to it, but the jazmated letter preceding it takes either Fathah, Kasrah, or Dammah ; but the choice is not arbitrary.
Fathah is used, first after ^^ , ^ , _« followed by the article
Jl or the word ^aS\ .
2nd. After the affixes of the first person ^J, or i^ when
they are followed by the article J^^, as ]s\j^\ ^s:t>\.
Kasrah is employed, first after ^, w*, ^^ followed by any
other Alif oi union, than that of the article J! or the word ^^J . 2nd. After any other monosyllable ending in a jazmated
letter, as ^^^ , Jj , Jj , Jj& , &c. excepting j*^ ; and also after
the word ^ .
3rd. After the third person singular feminine, of the pre- terite, and in the future or indefinite tense bearing apocope, after the third person masculine and feminine of the singular;
AND ORTHOGRAPHICAL SIGNS. 35
the second person masculine of the same nmnber ; and the first
person common both of singular and plural, (._,-%lG, t_^JkC',
{.^^J^ , <_J^1, i^^^JSj — and after the second person singular
masculine of the imperative i..,^] .
4th. After genitives of duals in construction, as
5th. After the second person feminine of the indefinite tense bearing apocope, and of the imperative of defective verbs whose
final t^ is preceded by FatTiah^ as ^yCi by apocope for ^^ J&j' i ^_j-y by apocope for ^^J^" 5 and ^^^\ by contraction for ^^j>^J\ •
Damtnah is employed, first after the pronoun Jvj^ and the
afiixed pronouns S and >Ji>.
2nd. After the second person plural masculine of the pre-
terite pj^ ■
3rd. After Jc< .
4th. In those persons of the plural of defective verbs, where, in consequence of a contraction, the » , characteristic of the plural,
instead of being quiescent after Dammah, as in \^>^ , ^^J^. »
Ijjo^l is preceded by FatTiah, as |;^> \jJLi\, ^^-^^. • In these cases, if an Alif of union follows, Dammah is added, and such
words are written thus, ^.^ , ^^X!^ » Uj^.-*. •
The affixed pronoun ^, changing its Dammah in certain
cases into Kasrah, the f, takes, according to some, for its casual
3—2
36 OF SVLLABLES
vowel, Kasrak ; and according to others Dammah^ J^i! 1 *^J^ l^» or J*iiU /*^Ac ^_^. When the word preceding the ^?2y of union ends in a nunnation, Kasrah is supplied though not written, as
^-;yo <U--!l Jj<-^» Basidun-i-Smuhu Musa.
Sometimes the Alif of union is wholly suppressed ; this takes
place first in the formula ^^)\ mT^^J^ ''^^^ ^. where the
AUf of the word *^1 is dropped.
2nd. In the word ^\ when between two correlative proper
names, as j,^ ^ Oo j Zazc?, sow of Amru ; but not when it
is not between two proper names, as ^^^s. j\ jjj Zaid, son of my uncle ; or when these two names form two different parts
^o-^ -So-
of the proposition, as in Saj^^ ^\ SjJ Zaid (is) the son of Muhammad.
3rd. In the article J1 preceded by the prefix J, or the
adverb of affirmation J, iJ^J^ and ^J:^ for ij^j^ and ^J^'i.
4th. In verbs and nouns when it is preceded by the inter- rogative adverb \, as (_Joul and ^^ala^^ for (_i^ H and ^iL-eU.
5th. In the article Jl preceded by the interrogative adverb \,
as >U.n for "U! M ; in this case however the Alif of union may also be preserved.
Madda (^-) Jc«, or extension. When the Alif of pro- longation is immediately followed by 1 moved, either by a simple vowel or a nunnation, in place of the last of these two Alifs,
AND ORTHOGRAPHICAL SIGNS. S7
the Hamzah with its proper vowel is wi'itten only, and Madda
is put over the Alif of prolongation, as ?U-j heaven. This sign is particularly used when the Hamzah., which follows the Alif of prolongation, terminates a word.
The Madda is also placed over Alif at the commencement of a word or syllable, when that Alif is radical, moved by
Fathah, and ought to be followed either by Alif-hamzah with
'^ — ^^
Jazmah, or by an Alif of prolongation, as lx<^ for lju:\^ , and (^^1 for (j^n. In general the Madda points out the absence
of Alif and when the Madda is used, the Hamzah^ if it be an Alif- Hamzah., is usually suppressed, as well as the vowel, which is always Fathah.
It is also inscribed over arithmetical signs, and likewise over abbreviations. A single word is represented by the first letter,
as ^ for ^.J^ just ; if there are two words, the initial letter of the first, and the final of the second are used, ^ £■ for JLuJl (Uic peace he upon him! if three, the initial of the first, a medial of the second, and the final of the third, are generally
taken, as * J 1 for As.\ dl\ \j\ I am the most wise God. But when there are many words, their initials are most com- monly made use of.
Of the Pause.
The pause u-cij? which takes place after a word, being the last of a period, of a phrase, or even of a proposition, makes in the manner of reading or pronouncing that word, some alterations necessary to be noticed.
3S OF THE PAUSE.
In general, when a pause occurs, the vowel or nunnation of the last letter is suppressed ; thus, instead of saying Joj ^^,j^
Zaid has struck me, and Jus/«>^1 Axe ^Ji\s^ Aid td If amid has come to me, pronouncing in the first example the nunnation of S^j, and in the second the final Kasrah of iXx«^M, we say only JoJ Zaid, and kXx*^^ al Hamid.
If however the nunnation is -^— as in this example Ijc^^s:' J) J we have not seen Muhammad, the ^ of the nunnation is only dropped, and the Fathah followed by \ is preserved, thus
Analagous to this, in those forms of the indefinite and imperative, which, under the influence of certain particles, as will be shewn hereafter, terminate in ^ jazmated, the ^^ is withdrawn in pronunciation, and the word is pronounced as if the vowel immediately preceding the ^ were followed by its homogeneous
letter of prolongation, thus UI^ for jjJu^, , i«^^ fo^ i^y^^ ?
l^jJ^^ for ^^^Jo^. 5 \^\ for ^j^\ , IjJo^^ for ^jiJ^\ , (cJ^t for o -» oi
It is the same with the word ^j3\ , which in a case of pause is pronounced \t}\ .
The general rule applies equally to the inflections of verbs, when they end in a simple vowel, thus t-jys for c_^, i,::^/^ for ei^y^ } i^L^j^ } c:^y<' • The s at the end of nouns femi-
OF THE PAUSE. 39
nine and others, loses, in case of u-aijj, its vowel or nunnation, and changes into Sf quiescent, as aJctJc* for Ijos^, ajuJc<,
The affi'xed pronouns ^ $ 4_J s and a, lose their vowels in
cases of pause, and become quiescent, t-5ou1 for i,_Cli\ t,_Gjl .
V \ - h
Nouns, which according to the rules of permutation, which will be hereafter explained, having for third radical j or j_> } lose that third radical by contraction, and throw the ^ of the nun- nation on the vowel preceding, as ^Ji\i for ^\i , and ^Ijj ,
in cases of pause lose the final vowel, as j^U ; final ^ may
however be used ^^ .
The cutting off of the vowels or nunnation, in cases of pause, is applicable also to words terminating verses, or the
periods of rhymed prose, ^-s^* In this case, the nunnation may be taken away entirely, or only the ^^ which it contains
be dropped, and the vowel preserved. Thus i ^a~j for c^nX-j
and t— >..u^ ; or else c^>owi for c^,u-.- and c^ju- for c^ju*5.
RULES OF PERMUTATION OF THE LETTERS
1 . The letters \ j i^, are often used for each other ; these permutations being considered as an imperfection, the
Arabian Grammarians denominate them infirm letters uJjj^ ^\ . In the beginning of a word, however, they usually re- main, except when, by the influence of some prefixed inseparable particles, they cease to be initial.
2. When, being themselves without vowels, and following those which are dissimilar, they become analogous to them. Alif is considered as analogous to Fathah. Waio to Dammah, and Ya to KasraJi. Thus
s s- ^ |
for |
Z^ |
a trench. |
S i- |
SS- |
||
JO |
^; |
a well. |
|
S " |
5o- |
||
> |
jy |
fire. |
jUj^ jUyo the said place or time.
j\ii jj a house.
^jSyo ij^-^ certifying.
J and t^ sometimes remain after Fathah; in this case, if bearing Jazmah, they form a diphthong with the preceding
Fathah ; as in >^ JjJ ; or not having Jazmah, they are pro- nounced as a long Alif as <tx«; like »U), CL^^ like ^L?.
RULES OF PERMUTATION. 41
3. The letters \ ^ ^j when quiescent, and followed by Jazmah are omitted, as i^as:'. for (.JW., Jb for (♦jJijj j-uu for
4. The ^?«y of union is not subjected to this rule, as
SPECIAL RULES.
Alif.
1. AUf-hamzah^ in the middle of a word, when moved by Dammah is changed into j, when by Kasrah into 4_5, whether preceded by a vowel or letter jazmated ;
i—i^j for tJlj
■5^*i S -i s.
2. Alif-hamzah, in the middle of a word, when moved by
Fathah^ after Dammah is changed into j, after Kasrah into
t^, as
5 :£ -. fff..
t— JjO for c_>!t>
st si
3. Hamzah or Alif-hamzah^ quiescent in the middle of a word, is changeable into ^ j or i_? quiescent ; agreeably to the
42 SPECIAL RULES. ALIF.
vowel preceding; the articulation of the Hanizah being wholly suppressed, as
o
i^\j for t^j
s ~> |
|
u^y. |
u^y. |
s |
|
i_^oJ |
t^oJ |
4. Hamzak, preceded by j or ^ quiescent, acting as servile letters, is changeable after ^ into j , and into ^ after i^, uniting with the preceding letter by Tashdid^ and losing all articulation of the Hamzah. Thus
^jyU for i^-*jyu
- ^ s. ^
5. In the middle of a word, Hamzah^ being preceded by a quiescent letter, other than j or ^, the Hamzah may be sup- pressed, and the vowel belonging to it transferred to the preceding letter, as
S S'l o -
dLuc^ for aJjujw.^
6. Alif-hamzah, at the end of a word, is changed, after
Dammah into j, after Kasrah into t_^; :t -. ^ i ^^
yj for IjO
SPECIAL RULES. ALIF. 43
7. Alif-hamzah, at the end of a word after 'Fathah^ when moved by Dammah, is changed into j, when by Kasrah into t^, as
kjuj for Uij
> ^ ^ ^^
^A«» VX-J.
S-yt^^
But it is equally correct to write UaJ or :jIIaJ, and it is
thus that grammarians usually write i^JoxU^ or 5=lAja^n.
8. AUf-hamzah, at the end of a word, and preceded by Jazmah^ is written as Hamzah only, but the vowel may be transferred to the jazmated letter, and Hamzah then becomes \ ^ or ^_$, according to the vowel preceding. Thus
^y^\ for ij;^^
9. Should two Alif-hamzahs meet together in the same word, and the first be moved by a vowel, and the second be jazmated, the latter loses its Hamzah^ and becomes merely long, changed, if need be, into ^ or (_^ ;
^ ^ S- -- ^^~ ^^ ^S-
^\\ or 1^1 for ^\\
s ^ s ^s. ^ i -*i
^UjI for (jUjj and ^^ for ^j^.
^ ^ y ^
10. 7lZ^/, quiescent, preceded by another J^?«/* moved by Fathah^ is dropped; this is pointed out by the position of the Fathah^ which is written perpendicularly, or by Maddah ;
44} SPECIAL RULES. ALIF.
j^ or jj\ for j^
Srt Si M
JU J U JIL.
This suppression takes place in some words of very frequent recurrence, when quiescent Alif is not preceded by another \, as in
cr*^J for ^U>.^
11. When two -4/«/s meet in the middle of a word, the first being Hamzah moved by Fathah, and the second quiescent, the first is often changed into ^ without Hamzah, as
U^xily for 1^^^" or Ij/e^*
>1jl /AW
12. The inseparable particles '-r' t— i J J and j which
are used at the beginning of words, alter nothing in the nature of Alif, which is still considered to be the first letter of the
word, though those particles may be prefixed, as c-j^ aI^, and not *— -^ ^^^
Some compound words must be excepted, in which custom has established the change, as iU5 for H, and ^ for ^.
SPECIAL RULES. ALIF. 45
i
13. When the interrogative particle \ is followed by Alif- hamzah^ if the second be moved by Fathah^ one of them, with its vowel, is dropped, or an Hamzah is placed first, and then an Alif with Maddah. Thus
" o^ |
^ O'V— |
" O^J. |
||
c^l |
or |
e^U |
for |
e^ll |
-. - o ^ o;£ |
o-.-o^< |
o -• ^ o^o^ i |
||
Jbj" ijul |
■»j&j' jjoU |
*JfeJjJo11 |
||
-/>^o^ |
-z^^O'*^ |
--^^oi i! |
||
u^' |
u^^^ |
u^^^ |
||
-»i |
-•»<_ |
-•tt |
||
jJl |
jJU |
M. |
14. If the second Hamzah have Dammah for its vowel, the -4 ?ey becomes J, or the second \ is suppressed and its Hamzah only retained ;
o-»>-^ii o-»i~''i o-»:c-'-ii
jX^AJjl or jX>oo:5l for *^lAJu!i.
15. If the second Hamzah have Kasrah, the ^/«y' is changed into i_^;
^J for Jl
1. Waw in the beginning of a word, when followed by another moved by a vowel, is changed into Alif-hamzah, to avoid the meeting of two y,
^\^ for J-»^jj pi. of ^1j
^ -t ^ — s - -
-i -- s- -
46 SPECIAL RULES. WAW.
2. If there bo two j at the beginning of a word and the first be moved by Dammah, it may be changed into Hamzah;
^Ji\ for ^j^^y
8. When in the middle of a word there are two j, the first moved by Dammah, and the second quiescent, if the letter preceding the first is neither jazmated nor quiescent, and the first is not doubled by Tashdid, the first j is often changed into Hamzah^ preserving the figure of j- Thus
^jjft- for ^»if>-
In this case one of the two j is sometimes dropped ; this occurs particularly when the first j is preceded by long Alif;
si ^ s -i ^
t.>jb for Jjjb
5 i ^ s i ^
If they meet only in consequence of a contraction, this rule is not observed;
4. * in the middle of a word, moved by Fathah^ and pre- ceded by Kasrah^ is often changed into ^\
(_^Ijo for c_j^^-
This however does not always take place,
iiy, j\^^ j\^ ^^ ^}\^ jy^.
SPECIAL RULES. WAW. 47
5. Sometimes in the middle of a word, after a letter bearing Jazmak, j moved by Dammali assumes Hamzah or is changed into AUf-hamzah, as
siL,i sii^s s^cs
j\S\ or j»i2\ for j»j\ .
6. In words derived from roots having j for second radical, it often happens when the second radical is doubled, that j is changed into ^;
*jj aUj /»»jo from j*ljj for ^y
This occurs even when the second radical is jazmated and not doubled, as Joi' c^^j &c.
7. Final •, when immediately preceded by Fathah^ admits of no vowel, but becomes quiescent, and is changed into \ , if the word have but three letters, or into ^ if it have more than three ;
\\s. for .ji he assaulted.
i^'aj tjxj he is assaulted.
The same takes place when after j there is i final ;
S — o
s\sj^ for ^^j^ •
If the final ^ bear a nunnated vowel, the nunnation is thrown back on the preceding Fatkah ;
48 SPECIAL RULES. MAW.
^ ' s - - --#--
Lie for yOS. yOLS. \ya£. « Staff.
<>
^Jajto »k)t<i »Ljt< lJL)t<i given.
8. In defective verbs, final • when immediately preceded by Dammah., and subject to be moved by Dammah., loses that vowel, as
J(>:1 for jj*)..
9. In nouns derived from defective roots, when the final j is immediately preceded by Dammah, it changes itself into 4_^, and converts into Kasrah the Dammah preceding. Should, in this case, the t_j have Fathah for its vowel, it remains ; if it be Kasrah or Dammah it is dropped, and ^ remains quiescent. If there be a nunnated vowel, the ^^ disappears, unless the vowel be Fathah.
Thus Lac Jj jr>-j of which the plurals would otherwise be
yoA ^d\ »j»-\ , make j_/ic1 J Jl j^\ .
Thus in the Nom. and Gen. it is Jjl for ^Ci\ and ^S\\ ^ ^ -^ -^
and in the Accus. UJj^ for \^S\.
When there is no nunnation, it is ^JjI for ^jl and ^\^\ and
Jji for /jI.
10. AVhen, at the end of a word, two j meet, of which the first is quiescent after Bammah, they unite by Tashdid. Thus
s #
%S£. for t^S£ , \y>M£. for ^j v*^ .
This is equally the case with i" at the end iJyi.
SPECIAL RULES. WAW. 4&
11. In plurals however of the form J**i, and in nouns
of action of the forms J^ and JjJti, the two j are often changed into j^, and the Dammah of the second into Kasrah ;
iJ J for j^j ij''^ ^^^ ay^'^ '
12. When j quiescent after Dammah is followed by tj- final, the Dammah becomes Kasrah, and the j is changed into <^, which coalesces with the (^ final by Tashdid,
^ for ^yti .
13. In nouns of the form Jj^O, the last letter being j, it is changed into <_j', and the two ^j- unite by TasMid,
s s
-x^ for ^->Ju5 , ^^j for ^j^ .
14. Final j, immediately preceded by Kasrah, is changed into ^jy
^j for ^ .
15. Servile ^ at the end of a word always has after it an Alif mute,
1. In the middle of a word ^_f moved by Fathah and immediately preceded by Dammah, is sometimes changed into j ;
i>^ for <UJw) .
This is however of rare occurrence. 4
50 SPECIAL RULES. YA.
2. When two ^ meet in the middle of a word, the first moved by Kasrak, and the second quiescent, the second is often dropped ; this is only when the first is in the place of Alif- hamzah,
St-- 5 t -
In every other case, the two <_j coalesce by Tashdid;
cod? (..^.Oui? .
3. Final <_j immediately preceded by Fathah^ bears no vowel, but becomes quiescent, throwing the nunnation, if there be one, on the Fathah preceding;
J^\ for J^U J.\ and J^\ This takes place also when i follows (^t
S ' i^~> S ' - L, -•
iftc^ for <U^-< .
4. If the final ^j is preceded by another <_^, the last is changed into a short Alif^
IjliXft) for , pljjfe .
Except the two proper names, |<J^. and ^^j-
5. Final i_$ preceded immediately by Kasrak, bears neither Dammah nor Kasrah^ but losing them becomes quiescent,
^lil for ^\A\ and ^Ull.
If in this case there be a nunnation in the nominative, or genitive, it is thrown back on the preceding vowel, and ^ is dropped ;
m\j for ^\j and ^\j .
SPECIAL RULES. VA. 51
6. Final o preceded by Dammah changes it to Kasrah^ remaining itself unchanged, but following the preceding Rule, becoming quiescent when moved by Darmnah or Kasrah, and being dropped when it bears a nunnation in the nominative or genitive ;
^^m3 for ij-^^ and ^j-^^
If in these eases final <_^ has Fathah for its vowel with or without nunnation, it remains and preserves its vowel, ^ W. i ,
7. t^ in the middle of a word bearing Jazmah^ and fol- lowing Dammah^ often changes that Dammah into Kasrdh^ instead of being itself changed into j, (2nd gen.) becoming
quiescent, ^^^ for ^j^ , i/'^ ^or (Xx»^ > and i^J^ for
8. When two ^ meet at the end of a word, the first being quiescent after Kasrah, they unite by TasMid;
- - s -
Rules common to j and ^j.
1. J and ^J preceded by, and also bearing vowels, are dropped when immediately followed by j or ^J quiescent, their vowels in this case are also lost, if Fathah goes before ; the J or ^ quiescent forming a diphthong with that Fathah.
4 — 2
52 RULES COMMON TO j AND ^ •
O — ^ ' -
]yoj for ^^J^
2. If in this case the vowel preceding be Dammah or Kasrah, it is suppressed, and replaced by the vowel belonging to the J or i^ which has been dropped ;
^j£\ for ^'if-\, (jjyli for ^jijli.
3. When j and ^ meet, so that the first bears Jazmak^ J is changed into j_^, and the two ^j unite by Tashdid ;
aU for Ai,\^\
4. At the end of a word, after Alif quiescent, j and ^j are changed into Hamzah ;
^^J; for t^lj;
5. ^ and ^^ bearing vowels, and immediately following Fathah^ are often changed into \ quiescent ;
j»\]j for ^y
J
U-9^«
RULES C0M310N TO j AND lS - 53
6. If after this Alif quiescent, a letter bearing Jazmah follow, the Alif is dropped, and Dammah or Kasrah substi- tuted for the Fathdh preceding. Dammah^ when the j whose place is taken by Alif would bear Dammah or Fathah^ as
e:,Jil7 for ci^^j of which the regular form would be dJi?, and so i,.::,^ for c:^.^l5 , regularly c:,,-v«43 .
When the Alif quiescent is in the place of ^^ or of •, moved by Kasrah, Kasrah is used instead of Dammah, iJLij^ for ci^U, reg. cji^jw, c:,^»i:i- for c:^^> reg. c:^*!>-»
7. When J and ^^ in the middle of a word are moved by Kasrah, and preceded by Alif quiescent, they are replaced by ^ with Hamzah ;
Jjli for Jjl5, JjU for JjU.
8. When j and ^_s in the middle of a word bearing vowels, and being preceded by Jazmah, are followed by a letter bearing a vowel also, they often transfer their own vowel to the letter having Jazmah, and become quiescent. In this case, if the vowel is Fatlmh, the j or (_^ changes into \ ; if Kasrah, the J changes into ^^ according to the second general Rule;
Jjk> for JjL^
JUuJ ji^.
^ ^ ^ ^ -• C "
54
RULES COMMON |
TO J AND ^ |
S - o- |
S o -' (^ J |
*jJLXm*^ |
AkAJUu^ |
s- |
^^J^*uu< |
s |
«r — t,-' |
Jlil |
5- -o- |
s |
■5 o ' |
9. This change does not however take place in nouns of
i» - o S — o
the forms JjtLo and ^Ul< , nor in those where the j or the ^^ is followed by Alif quiescent, as in the forms Jlxio and 5Ui<, nor finally in adjectives of the form J«l . Thus
t>»iUi from jU for Jy
^^J> |
^b |
Jjj |
SjL |
Jl^ |
J^ |
jL |
ijw |
|
iU> |
10. If by this change the quiescent letter falls before a letter bearing Jazmak, the former one is wholly suppressed;
for c^^v^li'U
11. When J and j_5^ are moved by Kasrak, and preceded by Dammah, the Kasrah generally takes the place of the Dammah^ which itself disappears ; » then changes into ^ qui- escent.
GENERAL OBSERVATIONS. 55
General Observations.
1. When the letters \ j ^ are said to be preceded by a vowel, it must be understood that they are so preceded im- mediately, and without the interposition of Jazmah, or a quiescent letter. It must not be forgotten that there is a latent Jazmah
in Tashdid. Thus, in Jc< the Fatlmh which is over the J is not immediately preceded by the Dammah of the /♦, because
Jt< is the same as if it were written JJk^.
2. Alif final ceases to be so considered, and is regarded as being in the middle of a word, when an affixed pronoun is
added to the end of that word. Thus, in :^.U Alif-hamzah is changed into j, as being in the middle of a word, though this is not always strictly observed.
3. On the contrary, j and ^ terminating a word, are not affected by such an affix, and are still looked upon as final
letters, as in ii\j£. and aX^j , where the addition of s does not
prevent the j of ^Ji, and the i^ of ^^j, from becoming qui- escent, as if at the end of a word. The only change made by the affixed pronoun is that of ^^ into 1 ; the i_5 may here however be preserved, provided that Jazmah is not used, as
VERB.
Of the Verb in General. 1. The original or primitive verb, is by the Arabians deno- minated ^jS^ (naked), because composed of only those letters
which constitute the root. The root J-^l, is always the third person singular masculine of the preterite tense, and active voice.
The letters constituting the root are called iuL?^, or radicals.
The seven letters of the word l^JuyuJu {they fatten) are called
JuljJ augments, or serviles.
The primitive verb contains either three letters ^j (tri-
literal) or four ,<cbj (quadriliteral).
In triliterals, the first letter is called ?\i fa, the second ~J^si
dain, and the third *^ lam, because the verb ,J^ (he made) is usually taken as the paradigm of the regular triliteral verb.
In the quadriliteral roots, the paradigm being Jl«, the first ^!'^3 letter is named fa, the second dain, the third lam the first, and the fourth lam the second.
From the primitive triliteral verb are derived twelve other forms, making altogether thirteen conjugations or forms of one root. Quadriliterals have but four forms.
Derivative verbs (of triliterals) are divided into three classes. The first contains those formed by the addition of one letter, the second those made by adding two letters, and the third comprehends those receiving an addition of three letters.
OF THE VERB IN GENERAL,
57
Derivatives.
Primitive. |
First Class. |
Second Class. |
Third Class. |
|||
L ■ |
5 JjtAi' |
10 |
— O' o > |
|||
1 |
J-i |
2 3 4 |
6 jIlS o 7 J*iJ^ c 9 J«l |
11 12 13 |
— O'O |
|
Quaclriliterals. |
||||||
Derivatives. |
||||||
1 |
S^ |
2 |
JiL- |
— o 'o 3 J)lw^ |
4 |
From the root Jxi the Arabian grammarians make the tech- nical words, which become the names of all the various gram- matical forms. The fifth form, for instance, of a triliteral verb,
' -51 — o —
is called Jjtaj ; the second of a quadriliteral is called JLtiJ , and so with all others. It is thus with every inflection of a verb, with the nouns and adjectives derived from it, and even with the rules of prosody, and the various feet employed in verse.
Of these thirteen forms of the triliteral verb, the twelfth and thirteenth are of very rare occurrence. Some grammarians
give a fourteenth and a fifteenth form ; thus, 1 4 (.JXaIc^ he
had clustering hair; 15 ^Jolcl Jie was corpulent and strong, (a camel), but the few verbs which exist of these forms may
58 OF THE VKRR IN GENERAL.
be considered as? in the third form of the quadriliteral verb,
- — o
It is to be observed that in the eighth form JjtJviU the place of CLi is sometimes supplied by \s or J.
When the first letter of the root is one of these, ^js, ^j^,
— o 1? or 1?, the c-5 is changed into L, as j-^ia^l it was dt/ed, for
^xLA; ^-J^\ it was printed, for wuLl ; J\s] he was unjustlif
treated, for jJ-J^' , in which instance the ]s is also changed into ^ , and is joined to the first by Tashdid.
When the first letter of the root is J J or j, in the
eighth fonn, lU is changed into J , thus for l/'t^^ he was re-
i-
pelled, is written \ji^\ ; for Jj3\ if was recorded ^S\, where the
radical J is changed into j, or^Jl, where the J becomes J,
or ^JjI , where both remain.
When the first radical is Ci;, j or ^, in the eighth con- jugation, it is changed into C->, and the two d? unite by
Tashdid, as o--J^i for (^::^oajt , _s^! for yp^nU rAuJ'i for -wJLtU
Tn the first form or conjugation, the original and simple signification is to be found, whether that be a transitive or
intransitive one, as k_^j^ he wrote, ^'j>- he was sorrowful.
The second and fourth conjugations form transitive verbs
from intransitives, as from Jiz he was great, Jic, and 2r,cS he rendered great, he honored. From verbs transitive in the
OF THE VERB IN GENERAL. 59
first form, the second and fourth make others, which may be called double transitives, as from t»_,^ he wrote^ *-r^ ^"^
i^^J^\ he made another person write.
Verbs in the second form are frequently however mere synonyms of the first, or only distinguished by being understood
as a species of intensitives, y*^ and yS he hroke^ ^j^ and
^i he separated or dispersed, &c.
The third form has usually the signification of the first, with this difference^ however, that the indirect complement of the verb, which in the first form demanded the intervention of a preposition, becomes here a direct complement, and meets
the verb immediately. Thus ^«^^J^^ and ^j have in the first
form the preposition ^\ before the indirect complement of the
preceding verb, dlU) cJ^5^ ^j^ c:^.ouk<' / wrote a letter to
the king; i_<1jJ1 IjU-l ULs; we sent our brother to you. If
the third form is used, the person to whom we write or whom we send, becomes the direct complement, and meets the verb
without the preposition \\. Thus t_jl^^ c:.^'^ and cuJ-cK J j»5 \ I wrote to the Mng — / sent to the Vazir. So with intran- sitive verbs also, ijAs^ he sat dovm^ in the third form signifies, to sit down with or near one, ,^IILJ \ [j^^ he sat down near the
Sultan. In the first form this would be (jULJ \ iXac ^/-if- •
This form indicates also a reciprocal or mutual acting. Thus Jj'ljj he sought to kill another, {that other seeking to kill him).
60 OF THE VERB IN GENERAL.
The fifth form ahnost ahvays has a passive signification, derived from the second. Thus from Ac to know., come the
second form Ac to teach, and the fifth JjO' to he taught.
The sixth form is derived immediately from the third, and signifies the co-operation and mutual action of two or more per- sons, as c-^Uii' the one beat the other; ^J\a^ t__-sxUj" the boys played together.
The seventh and eighth forms have usually a passive meaning, derived mostly from the first, but sometimes from the second,
as from ^Jai to cut, comes the seventh jjasjl to be cut, from
i=
yoj to help, the eighth jj2m\ to be helped.
The ninth and eleventh forms designate colors; the eleventh, with more intensity, XA to be yellow ; j\aJ\ to be very yellow. These conjugations are also verbs, expressing deformity, as *js^1
and aU:^^ to have the face or mouth distorted; ^^\ to he
crooked.
The tenth form expresses the desire of, or petition for, the
— o' o
action indicated by the first, as jks:. to pardon, Jij6^\ to beg
' o ' o
pardon, ^Ji-s to water, ^_yuul<s\ to beg for water, to put up prayers for rain.
The twelfth and thirteenth forms are of very rare occur- rence, and generally add intensity or energy to the primitive
signification; thus from ^JlJ^ to he harsh, is derived ^^y^t
to be very harsh or rude, from laU to adhere, comes \syts\ to adhere firmly.
OF THE VERB IN GENERAL. 61
Upon the various significations of the different forms or conjugations of the verb, much more might be said, and some grammarians enter into long details ; but, although well worth the notice of the curious investigator, these inquiries are wholly undeserving the attention of the student. The brief remarks here made will not be found without use, but it is only by reading and consulting the dictionary, that a knowledge can be gained of the significations of the various forms. However minute might be the observations made upon the different mean- ings of the verb, we should still find many exceptions ; these can only be learned by use, and the same must be said as to the forms in which any given verb is to be found. Some roots are only met with in one conjugation, most are in several, none in all.
Quadriliteral verbs, it will be seen, have but four forms ; the first answers to the first of triliterals, the second to the fifth, the third to the seventh, and the fourth to the ninth.
Every variation of which the verb is susceptible, whether in forming the derivatives from the primitive, or in the voices, tenses, persons, numbers and genders, or in verbal nouns, is by
the Arabians comprised under the term *— cJ;-a) exchange^ pecu- liarly applied to grammatical inflection, and almost equivalent to conjugation.
The regular verb is termed JLs sound or perfect^ and follows
in all its inflections the common rule, or paradigm Jxi. The
irregular verb, JL j^s. wnsound or imperfect, has among its
radicals one or more of the feeble letters U j> t.?> or has its second and third radicals alike.
62 OF THE VERB IN GENERAL.
In the Arabic language there are a few verbs which may be regarded as primitives of five or six letters, or as derivatives belonging to forms not included among those we have enumerated.
Such are .^xaxJLc^ ^-axJ jJJj^ ^ but these examples are rare,
and it is to be observed that ^ , always, or almost always, enters into the formation of these derivatives of forms not used, and that by subtracting it, it is easy to reduce them to a quadri- literal root.
There are two voices, the active, denominated Jx.U!l iajw>
the form of the agents or simply JjiU agent^ and the passive
^^^tk^^\ dJu^, the form of the thing done^ or merely J»*a^,
the object on which the action falls, the patient.
Neuter verbs, of whatever form they may be, by their very nature, are destitute of a passive voice, whether these verbs
simply express a mode of being, as ^^j^ to he ill, or an energy not passing out of the energizer, and which we more particu- larly call intransitive verbs, as ,Ji*^ to walk, ^Ij to sleep ; the Arabian grammarians consider them as active, and their sub- ject is always called Jj:U , or agent.
In Arabic verbs there are but three principal modifications,
s - - sCs.
of which two are of time, j^Uj , and the third of command, yc\ ■
CONJUGATION OF THE FIRST FORM J« OF REGULAR TRILITERAL VERBS.
Active Voice.
Preterite^
Plu. Dual.
Fem. Com. Alas. Fern. Com. Mas.
Indef.
Sing. Fem. Com. Mi
c>o^
J JO' |
|||||
' O J o' |
ui^" |
||||
( |
7.- |
Imper. |
o JO.S |
||
Participle. |
|||||
Llifl^ |
^>-:>^ |
Infimtitie. |
IIjk |
cIjI^ |
OF TENSES.
Of these there are in the Arabic verb only two ; the first ^lo or the past^ we denominate the preterite ; the second cjLi*
or resemhling*, being susceptible of both present and future, may be called the indefinite tense.
The compound tenses are formed by the addition of the
verb substantive ^^l^. The preterite of this verb being joined to that of any other, gives to the latter the signification of the
pluperfect, *_^J^ ^l^ he had written. Joined to the indefinite tense of another verb, it gives it the force of the imperfect,
S"*^. o^ ^^ ^^^ writing.
The indefinite tense of ^\^ which is ^j^^i joined to another
verb in the preterite, forms the future subjunctive, ^^^A^ (j^, he will have written.
These compound tenses are not given in the paradigm of the verb, the Arabian grammarians not considering this union of two verbs, for the determination of the circumstances of time, as forming compound tenses of one verb.
Numbers,
In the Arabic language there are three numbers, ja^:, pi.
Ci\ss^ . The singular J^ \ or j^ \ . The dual ^Jyj^ \ or
* So called, because in many of its accidents it resembles the noun.
NUMBERS. 65
iiuuLxl 1 , and the pHral f-^ ^ or ^,j^ 1 . These distinctions
take place in the verb as well as in nouns, adjectjves and pronouns.
Genders and Persons. In Arabic there are three genders, i^j**-)^ , pi- jjaiU*-^ ?
the masculine ^Sa^ \ , the feminine C^y*^ \ , and the common <^»Ju*^ 1 . These are also used in the verb.
The first person is called JjuUl \ he who speaks, the second
i^^ls^ 1 ^ who is spoken to, and the third e^Ul \ he who
is absent. The first person plural is named ^-o *K-U! 1 ^^^^yij
-jkji! 1 Ae t^Ao speaks conjointly with others.
ON THE TENSES OF THE REGULAR TRILITERAL VERBS.
The Preterite. (^
The persons of the preterite are formed by adding one or more letters after the radicals. According to the system of the Arabian grammarians, there is no person of the verb without a pronoun expressed or understood, that pronoun being the agent or subject ; several of the letters added to the root in oi-der to form the persons, are, therefore, considered by them as pronouns. The middle radical of the preterite of some verbs takes
Kasrah in place of Fathah, as transitively ^ he knew ; but
5
66 UN THE TENSES.
this is more peculiarly the characteristic of intransitive or neuter
verbs, as -i he was fjlad^ ^\s-~ he was sorrowful ; sometimes
the middle radical of the preterite take;? Dammah ; but this only
in a neuter sense, as „^xyj he was ugly^ i^f^*^ ^^ '^^^^ hand- some. The vowels of the two first radicals do not vary in the other persons, but the last is changed to Dammah in the third person masc. plu., and is jazmated in most of the other persons.
The preterite usually corresponds v.ith the English prete-
rite perfect, as |*GLaJ ^\ ^ /X>J^ c:^'***^'^ tc-^ ^ \<'^*^ li/'^^
-jk/*JU] \ ^Ic- Remeynher the benefits that I have conferred tipon you^
and {remember) that I have rendered you superior to other men.
When the preterite is preceded by the particle si , it always signifies a past time, which is also the case when it follows the
adverb U , when.
The preterite is often employed to express the present, as
\i L,-mC JO^
^ ^ #- -- *
The violence of afiidion makes grey the hairs, and fortime
toith mankind changes.
Although she stoops to day to a man, yet on the morrow she
will overwhelm him.
The particle ^ if, conveying a supposition, and connecting
two correlative propositions, gives to the preterite the signifi-
THE PRETERITE. 67
cation of the pluperfect. Suppositive propositions are distin- guished from conditional, as implying that the case supposed is never realised, while in the conditional there is a simple enun- ciation of one proposition depending on another.
In the suppositive proposition, the first preterite is to be rendered by the pluperfect of the indicative, and the second,
to which is prefixed the particle J, by the preterite of the potential mood, as (_5^jLs"^ ^*XS> c^^^lt j) ^/' / had known this,
I icould have admonished thee. If the second member be nega- te live, the indefinite tense is used with the particle J, which,
as will he hereafter explained, gives to the indefinite the power of the preterite, as -&-1 "^i^-'V. (^ lxila> i,^:^^ »! if you had besn here., my brother would not ha/ce died.
If, after jJ the verb of the first proposition is in the inde- finite tense, and the second in the preterite, they take a future sense, and the first may be translated by an imperfect sub- junctive, and the second by a conditional future, as ^j-*^. ^
J^jJJI J Joo 4«*ij ^j:,^-^ ^jr^- ^b Jr*^ ^ '^ ^^^^ miser touched the palm of Yahya, his soul would become generous in bestowing gifts.
The negative 3 gives to the preterite the meaning of the future ; this is particularly observable in the taking of an oath.
^^^Usb J^[k\\ . ^ytw*.*:' ^^jj
68 THE PRETERITE.
/ have sicorn (I swear) t/iat zmne shall not disturb me, while my soul is in my body, and my coords in my power of speaking. In the Koran and in the Poets, examples are found of the
preterite preserving its own meaning after ^ . ^ j jJw? li Jj , u_>i\^ ,j3 * ^L? he has not believed and he has not prayed ; but he has denied the truth and has been perverse.
The preterite is used in Arabic to express the optative. Thus in speaking of God, after his name, is added ^Xxi may
he be exalted ! After the name of Muhammad, ajlc <dS \ ^la
— s ^
*L-j • may God be propitious to him, and give him peace!
Such are these forms also, <Uc <s^ \ ^j may God be pleased with him ! iS^ *^ J may his reign be long ! ^jJ^L JUt)
may you remain in good health I <dl 1 <U«1 ?»ay G^06? curse him ! After !j\ when, an adverbial particle of time especially
applied to the future, as U ichen is to the past, the preterite takes a future sense, as i__>Jk,*o-^ i,_53j ^;>oul^ ^j\ ?/''A^»i #A(W sAa?^ Aat'g written that, I will praise thee.
When this adverb is put at the head of two correlative propositions, of which the verbs are in the preterite, they both
assume this future meaning, Uj^ ^ Uuo- 'ij>-'i\ <S£.j s\»^ \j\
when the promise of the future life shall have come, we will bring you together.
But this influence of !jl ceases when the preterite of ^\^
precedes it, and the two verbs may then be rendered the first
THE PRETERITE. 69
by the pluperfect, the second by the imperfect, iJjU ^ ^\^ j
Ujwilu^ Jo-lj Jjj IJl >;^^ J^l ^ ^ &j\ *^ ^ ^.^♦:^'
<Juuu3 . <Um-j ^ lii^*- J <iju*/Ju^ a«flJ i< ?t'as a custom, of Timu)\ and
of his forethought^ that in the beginning of his command, when he had alighted at the divelling of any one and requested hospitality, he enquired into his family and remembered Ms name and his pedigree.
To have this effect, it is not even necessary that the pre- terite of the verb ^^l^ should be expressed ; it is sufficient that before 1l>^ there be a verb in the preterite, upon which the conjunctive proposition depends, Uli j Li^ ivr:'.'^^^ V^^ ^
to IjjJui \^^ ^ ,_^ lylS" ^ \J>^^ ^ V>r^ ^'^^ ^^^
Ijljuj to J ^yU be not like those who have been incredulous,
and who have said of their brothers, when travelling in the country, or on a military expedition, if they had remained with us, they would not have died, and would not have been killed.
It is the verb Ulij which here deprives \S\ of its usual effect.
To occasion the cessation of this influence of ! jl , it suffices
that what precedes it should contain necessarily the idea of the past.
Whenever the two particles ,«J^ , «w order that, until, <^c., and \Ci\ when, are united at the head of two conjunctive pro-
positions ; the temporal power of the verbs of those two pro- positions depends upon the antecedents, and accordingly as
70 THE PRETERITE.
they express a past, or future sense, the verbs of the conjunctive propositions, although put in the preterite, must be translated
by the past or future. ,^^a^ U-y "LcS J^ ^ .jtLsi /•jJ j
on the day when toe shall assemble from every nation^ a crowd of those who have treated our revelations as falsehoods^ they shall he driven^ until when they shall have come, he will say, have you then treated my revelation as falsehood ?
The preterites )j U- and JU have a future sense, on account of the indefinite As£, by which \S\ ^J^^- is preceded.
What has been said of the tenses of verbs coming after \ii\ , is equally applicable to to \i^\ .
After the conditional particle i^\ if the preterite acquires
the force of the subjunctive future : *^J>r.-l -is- \S\ SS^ c-^Jo
Juwj] 1 ^ Jo- u-iy ;.i^ CJ^ \ • /^ is written to you, when
death shall come to one of you, if he (should or shall) leave property {let there be) a will.
If the verb ^l^ come between ^ and a verb in the pre-
9
terite, the latter expresses a past sense, as .1 ci^-^^t c:^>j lo^
ei-OsJ^^i- . If I have committed a crime or been guilty of a fault.
When after ^ , a present is to be expressed, the preterite
of ^\^, and the indefinite tense of the verb required is employed.
THE PRETERITE. 71
Thus, (ojJJutj al)t Juk^ 1^1 ^! ^;/^^ ' ^^"^ thanks to God, if it be him you serve.
o
When the conjunction ^t comes before two correlative pro-
positions, of which the first is conditional and the second de- pendent on the first, the verbs in the preterite may be rendered, the first by the subjunctive or hypothetical present, and the
second by the future, ^U (.j:^'txJ u-i3j (..I^i ^ , if I do
that, I shall lose my property.
The preterite of the verb ^ is often employed without conveying any idea of time, and merely connecting a subject
and an attribute, as ^^J^^ ^^ U)jlJ-»\j ^ j^ ^J^ U l-^j1 >
Those {people), it is not for them to enter, unless with fear. Examples without number may be met with, where the
preterite of ^ , is thus used without any indication of time
past, and merely as the opposite of the negative verb ^j^ , which has no tense but the preterite, with the power of the indefinite present.
The Indejiiiite.
The indefinite, (or future of Erpenius) is formed by prefixing
to the different persons, one of the four letters comprised in the
t technical word ^^\ , and by adding one or two of those con- tained in the other technical word b^ . The prefixed serviles have constantly Fathah, ' excepting in the second, third and fourth of the triliterals, and the first of the quadriliterals, where they take Dammah; they jazniate the first radical. If the second
72 THE INDKFINITE.
radical of the preterite has Dammah^ it remains also Dammah in the indefinite, but if Kasrah, it is changed in the indefinite
to Fatkah, excepting **j it was pleasant ; c_-vucs- he thought ;
jj*jL> he despaired ; jj^-Ju it dried up ; J^ he excelled ; Uaj he
despaired; i^j^ he met^ which may be pronounced both with Fathah and Kasrah, and even sometimes with Dammah ; as
*xJu , **Ju , *xx; , (J*^. J J*^. ^ J*^. ' ^^1^ ^f t^^^ second radical takes Fathah in the preterite, in the indefinite it is
changed to Dammah ; as v„-J^ he wrote, t ^I^; ; or to Ka^rah,
as c-.?^ Ag struck^ ^j^, i unless the second or third radical is a guttural letter, in which case it sometimes remains Fathah, as JjLij he laboured, Jj«Aj ; -aJc* ^ presented ; fJ^, ', and in the same manner i^ without a guttural, he reclined ^y,,t and A he refused jL . The last radical has Dammah, but when
followed by the serviles b»j it is sometimes dropped, sometimes changed, as is seen in the paradigm.
The indefinite, however, when preceded by certain particles, admits of several variations in the termination which are classed un- der the grammatical heads of Apocope, Antithesis, and Paragoge.
Apocope not only converts the Dammah of the last radical into Jazmah, but cuts off the final j^ every where, excepting in the feminine plural. The particles which occasion the Apocope are
c^ •6'- '
J not ; UJ not yet ; t no, not ; and .J when prefixed to the
future in an imperative sense. i*^. J he did not assist, may answer as a general example.
Plural.
THE INDEFINITE.
Dual.
73
Singular.
>-^" r^ r^t (*J
4_5/«SXl J
^^- ^J
r5
O -» O ^ J'
To the above particles may be added the following : ^\ if;
^^ and ^^ whoever ; U whatever, and its compounds UJ^ a/^
^^#, and UK g»gry time that; UaJssi- , ^;^ and ^\ every where;
Uijs^ and i^-fiJ^ however ; Wrc as o/V^% as ,• UjI , ^JU and
^I'j when, whenever, and in poetry \j\ when ; provided, how- ever, another verb in the retributive sense (as whatever you will do, I will do) is subjoined in the same sentence. If both verbs are in the indefinite, they conform to this rule ; if only the first, that does the same ; but if the last alone is indefinite,
it follows either this, or the general rule ; as «Jt^l jJuiJ U whatever you will do, I will do; \,^:^^xj^ -^-j^ U> whatever you
will do, I did; «--u«l i^:^x^^ to, or ^-^^\ i,::^.jtxa L* whatever you did, I will do.
This rule takes place likewise, when an imperative precedes,
to which the indefinite is responsive; as 4_i^! vs'f^^ assist me, I will assist you.
Antithesis, by the influence of another set of particles, cuts off the final ^ in the same manner, and changes the Dammah
of the third radical to Fathah ; these are J by no means^
cj. C' ci O'-' 'O-^ 'O^
not at all; J , ^, ^ , ^ , <3 , Jj^ , IjXI that, in order
74 THE ini)];fimte.
■it's- ^'s. t,i 4 ^
to, became ; ^\ , LJ lest not. so as not ; ,\ or ; ^^^L>. until. Also 4_i, prefixed to :in indefinite, referring to a preceding word, as t_5^ li i<^/^^ «ss?s^ Wig and I will assist you; likewise ^ when it implies and at the same time ; as Jkil 1 l^Jlj % c_^-^^ J^^ ^ fl^o ?ioi eat fish and at the same time drink milk ; and also ^jl , or 1 j1 ir^?^ .' do so I come on ! Sj-c. .^ ^ he irill by no means assist, is here put for a general example.
Duiil. Singular.
- -. O -' c---
Plural.
J^ J
.-^ J
Paragoge adds to the future ^^ or j^ ; but this last only in the singular, and in the plural masculine and common, when it denotes commanding, wishing, intreating, or asking about
futurity, in the manner following: ^f^\ J^ ^^ill he assist?
Plural.
c>^j^: J^ c-r^- ^
' ^ O ' o ■
Singular. ^^.1 Jib
Dual.
■ J O^ o ■
o - J c-
THE INDEFINITE. 75
^-AAJ c:^ would to God he would assist f
Plural. Singular.
Com. Mas. Fem. Com. .Mas.
■fii ^ .» O'- 0-' .» O.'
After this mode may be inflected ^^-^lajJ and ^jsJJ^ let him «SS2.«^ ,• ,0/^2-^ ^ a-nd ^i;.«^:j^ ^ do not assist ; or when preceded by an oath, as ^j^^ ^\ j ^?/ 6^o(/ he will assist ; or ^\y JJuj^! ^i^^^- by God we will kill.
The indefinite tense may be translated by the future of
the indicative. 1 . When preceded by the particle ( j^ , or
one oi its abridged forms y^ i_i-j ^JM . 2. When preceded by
the negative i! , provided, however, that neither of the other
negative particles U , J , or U.1 have occurred in the phrase before. 3. When, as is often the case, there is a plain indica- tion of a future sense.
When these rules do not operate, or when the indefinite is
preceded by U , it becomes a present tense, t_^ J Jjei.; ^
IjU <uLa3 uJy«*i l*iij J IjljJ^ ^e who shall do that maliciously and tmjustly, we will punish him by fire.
76 THE INDEllMTK.
>U(,J>^. i|j ^^ ^ f*^. '^ ^ ' «^r«7y they who hide t/ie book ichich
God has sent down {from heaven)^ and buy with it a thing of small price, those eat nothing hut fire, and God on the day of judgment will not speak to them 7ior approve them.
In this passage are seen examples of the indefinite with a future signification after 1 , and with that of the present after U .
The particle ^ restricts it to the future, 4__» j-4l iJ ^ *^*^^ not strike.
The particles ^ and ^ that, in order that, with their com- pounds ; also ^yo- until, and J give to the indefinite a future meaning.
iUjsi \ ^^U-jJ j^l JLuu*- ^^ do you think you will enter Paradise?
\j^ ^J^ J— ^( ^^yb jl\ ^c \^Jj J J*^l
G'i'Cg wg a^i assistant out of my own family, my brother Hdrun, in order that we may praise thee much.
It will be often found, that a verb in the indefinite tense, depends upon a verb immediately preceding, without the inter- position of any particle ; in this case, the verb in the indefinite must be translated by the subjunctive, preceded by, i?i order that;
THE INDEFINITE. 77
O'C-O ^ -^ (^^
by the infinitive, or by the participle present. t_^l ' '-^^^. ^j'^ iiuUjIi he departed, leading my heart by the bridle.
'ci o-^ -it S-
j\jot^! ^1 <iui; iSiJ UujJj ^r^ continued to watch Aw return, like tfie watching far the festival new moons.
1> ^U^J^ ^,j ^\ ,
■if-
He seeks you above all other men, in order that he may solicit hospitality, and an abode.
When preceded by J not, UJ not yet, the indefinite assumes •a preterite sense ; ^j^, J Ae Aas not struck, ^ rsr' UJ Ag has not yet gone out.
This rule is liable to some exceptions ; and it is remark- able, that in the example given by M. de Sacy, the verb
following J , must really be translated by the present. J \ ^^Jl^ J i>:Li\yA^\ lJ3w< ^ ^1 ^ *Uj' do you not know that to God belongs the empire of heaven and earth ?
That the indefinite, preceded by J , may sometimes be trans- lated by the present, was observed by Mr Richardson, who gives the following instance :
O J ^ o^ o^
78 Tin: INDEFIMTK.
(/' there is noth'mp in these tvords, but ichat makes you doubtful • 9f your hereditary beliefs emn that is sufficient for your pood ; for he who doubts not, considers not ; and he who considers not, understands not ; and he who understands not, remains in blind- ness and perplexity.
When J is prefixed, the indefinite tense expresses command,
when "j comes before, it has a deprecative or prohibitive signifi-
cation ; tU-^jjdi j^^^W JJ^ xJ^ ^^ and he among you
I —o- - who shall see the month, let him fast {during) it. ifjji bJD' ^
i'-js^M approach not you {two) this tree.
The preterite of the substantive verb ^^l^ , as has been before said, when put before the indefinite tense, gives it the sense of tlie imperfect indicative. Should the proposition be negative
and the adverb J be employed, the indefinite ^^ put before,
gives to the following indefinite the same meaning. When however one or more verbs in the preterite have gone before, they communicate that sense to the following indefinite, without
the intervention of ^ .
,cujyc L^^ ^ j^'j J afar rode to the chase ; and sometimes drank
and amused himself at others ; and presents and gifts came to him from Rashid ; and BaJchtishua the physician was vnth him, and Abu Zakkar the blind sa/ng to him.
THE INDEFIMTi:. 79
It often, however, will be found, that the indefinite carries
this meaning without being preceded by the preterite ^^l^, or any other verb in that tense ; the attending circumstances fixing the sense in which it must be taken.
Say (to them) ichy did you kill the prophets of God, before (no2c).
Beside the pluperfect and imperfect, which the Arabians
express by adding the preterite of the verb ^^l^ to the preterite and indefinite of another verb, they form a past or retrospective
future by prefixing the indefinite of ^^ to a preterite, some- times inserting the particle Jo between the two verbs.
, ^ c
^^Ls*-**^ U j_^^' S) ( ii^j they say, when will this menace
(take effect) if you he trustworthy ? Say peradventure somewhat of that which you wish to hasten, will have (^already) mounted behind you.
Bush upon their camels, take them, and then we shall have taken reparation for what has been done to us.
The use which is thus made of the verb ^J^ to modify the preterite and indefinite tenses, must not be considered as constituting it an auxiliary verb, in the sense in which that term is used by European grammarians. The use of the preterite
or indefinite of the verb ^^^ has for its object only the expression
80 THE INDEFINITE.
of that double relation of time belonging to the preterite anterior or pluperfect, the limited preterite or imperfect, and the retro- spective future ; effecting this by the union of two verbs, either
in the same tense, as t-,-J^ ^\^ he had written ; or in different
tenses, as c— -^J^_ jo^ he did write, or teas writing ; and i--^ ^^»^ he will have written.
The imperative, as well as the future, sometimes takes the
paragogical ^, as ^r^^ oi" cJ/^^ assist thou. This mood is formed by prefixing \ , which, when beginning a sentence,
always has Kasrah ; as As-\ know thou ; <— ^\ strike thou ;
unless the vowel of the penult, radical, which is always the same with that of the future, be Dammah ; when \ also takes
Dammah ; as cJI^l write thou, the first and last radicals take Jazmah. In the formation of the genders and numbers, the
final serviles Ij^ are employed, as in the future. The impe- rative is only used in the second person ; the others being supplied by the future ; J with Kasrah being then prefixed,
as -AAji let him assist; -noJu) let us assist; which is also some-
times the case witli the second, as j^ai/o^i assist thou ; but J drops Kasrah, and takes Jazmah, when (_J or j are prefixed, a^ j-^sj^ then let him assist.
The office of the imperative of triliteral verbs is sometimes performed by an indeclineable word, of the form JUi or JUi .
Thus, from Ajj to alight, is formed JUi or jUj alight thou.
THE INDEFINITE. 81
The participle of the primitive triliteral verb in the active voice is of the form ^Js.\i ', and in the passive of the form (Jy«i^ . There are however many other forms ; and particu- larly Jjoti and J»*i , which ai-e both active and passive.
It has been objected that these participles are merely verbal adjectives, conveying no idea of time ; but I have pre- ferred the authoi'ity of Erpenius. It would seem they are rather of all times, and as in the following instance, often ap-
pear to be true participles, ^^^^^, ^ r^*~' '^ ^ J ^^^ **" seeing {^sees) what they do.
The Infinitive differs greatly from those of other languages, being merely a verbal noun substantive in the accusative case ; corresponding, in some measure, to the Latin gerund in do. It is often used adverbially, and by a peculiar idiom is joined sometimes to its own verb, to give a greater energy to the meaning.
Although it is not considered that the nature of the par- ticiple, partaking both of verb and adjective, should exclude it from a place in the paradigm ; or that the infinitive should be rejected, because, in truth, it is a verbal noun ; which all infinitives really are ; a more minute account of each will be given hereafter under the heads of " Name of Agent and Patient," and " Noun of Action."
The account here given of the use of the tenses, may seem to be somewhat difficult and complicated, yet it will be found that the times of Arabic verbs are subject of very little doubt, unless it be in the Koran, the elliptical, figurative, and somewhat incoherent style of which, leads to different interpretations.
82 THE INDEFINITE.
The following principles may be regarded as general. 1 . That the two tenses of Arabic vei'bs, have each its determined value, the one of the past, the other of the present and future. 2. It is often unimportant whether this second tense be translated by the present or future, and when that distinction is really neces- sary, the sense is never dubious. 3. In an infinite number of cases, the time of a proposition is fixed, not by the forms of the verbs, but by the conjunctions, or adverbial conjunctions of time, by the negative adverbs, or other particles to the influence of which the propositions are subjected ; or finally, by the relation which the propositions bear to each other.
PASSIVE VOICE.
Preterite.
Plural. |
Dual. |
Singular. |
,- |
||
Fem. Com. |
Mas. |
Fem. Com. |
Mas. |
Fem. Cora. Mas, |
I |
- C J |
\^ |
uli |
10^ |
o ^ -» - "• |
3 |
uili |
'c J ^ o -> |
2 |
|||
J O J . |
I |
Indefinite.
cJ^'
t— Jl^
Cl^byL:
u,>*^. |
||
Participle. |
||
^ J J o^ |
hyL^ |
i^J^i
^jIC)
The passive preterite only differs from the active by the first
radical always having Dammdh for its vowel, and the second
Kasrah.
t In the indefinite tense, the incremental letters ^^1, always
have Bamtnah for their vowel, and that of the second radical is always FathaJi.
The want of the imperative is supplied by the indefinite
tense with J prefixed, as ^-aJuJ let Mm be assisted.
6—2
84
PARADIGM OF THE QUADRILITERAL VERBS.
Active Voice.
Infin. |
Part. |
Imper. |
Indef. |
Prefer. |
|
^ ^ o |
S o ^ -' |
Ja^, |
JhA>3 |
1 |
|
\JaAAi |
ixiJlX^ |
Ji2AjG |
2 |
||
S L, ■' 1^ ~> |
3 |
||||
>u1 |
4 |
Passive Voice.
Part. |
Indef. |
Preter. |
|
^^k«Jto |
1 |
||
■ix4AXo |
ia^iiuu |
2 |
|
5 -^ f^ ^ o-» |
-»x O- Oj |
3 |
|
>^1 |
4 |
85
DERIVATIVES OF THE FIRST CLASS OF REGULAR TRILITERAL VERBS.
Active Voice.
Infin. |
Part. |
Imper. |
Indef. |
Preter. |
|
k_.'J^ |
^...-JkX) |
2 |
|||
C_^'lCc |
clo-l^ |
c-lji£ |
3 |
||
S o ^ |
4 |
Passive Voice.
Part. |
Indef. |
Preter. |
|
S"^^. |
c^i^^ |
2 |
|
L_-^'IC< |
u-lo"i£J |
**r^^ |
.3 |
iU\ |
4 |
||
1 |
86
Of Quadriliterals, and Derivatives of the First Class.
Quadriliterals and derivatives of the first class, are conju- gated in nearly the same manner, and only differ from the preceding in the following particulars.
1. The radical penultima in the preterite active alv^ays has
Faihali^ and in the indefinite Kasrah^ except in the second
t quadriliteral, where it retains Fathah. S:\ in the indefinite
active as well as passive bears Dammah^ as -r^'^ j rrj^'^, >
jj^ , 7**^. 5 'TJ^'^' 'T^r*"^.' J*^ ' j^..' ^"* *^^ second, third, and fourth quadriliterals active keep Fathah.
2. The imperative is formed from the future by dropping _)J1 and the vowel of the last radical, as r^js-'i, j^' If the
preterite commences with Alif servile, that letter takes the place of the incremental letters of the indefinite.
3. In the fourth form Jju^ Alif \% dropped whenever a servile precedes the radical letters, thus ^.ax> and not -oj U .
Initial Alif., forming the derivative verbs, is dropped with its vowel whenever the serviles ^jJ! come before ; whence in the imperative, where those serviles are lost, ^^*/"and its vowel return,
as y-3Jl, where it is not to be regarded as being Alif of union forming the imperative.
87
DERIVATIVES OF THE SECOND CLASS OF REGULAR TRILITERAL VERBS.
Active Voice.
Infin. |
Part. |
Imper. |
Indef. |
Preter, |
|
CiL" |
c_..JsXJc« |
0£i |
5 |
||
c^jICU |
clo-ic |
'-r^^l |
<-JiL- |
6 |
|
Cuci |
J ^ t, ^ |
cliLi |
7 |
||
' > |
' |
- * |
' |
> |
|
C\sz\ |
4— JLJiCo |
..1^! |
8 |
||
- > |
' |
- * |
- |
> |
|
\^^\ |
ZJL |
4 ' o .»^1 |
9 |
||
- » |
- > |
> |
|
Passive Voice.
Part. |
Indef. |
Preter. |
|
c-^JiCu |
^ •>.>.> ^.j;^- |
5 |
|
t---JKjl« |
•"r-^^^. |
c-.-oyj |
6 |
i_.Jk^UC« |
^ -c^ c^i |
7 |
|
8 |
88
DERIVATIVES OF THE THIRD CLASS OF REGULAR TRILITERAL VERBS.
Active Voice.
Infin. |
Part. |
Imper. |
Indef. |
Preter. |
|
^ '- t, o |
Ll.i£^ |
l«^Jk^wLs\ |
10 |
||
- i> |
- |
» |
- |
* |
|
C(i^\ |
cLi£^ |
cl^uL^ |
(l;l2^ |
11 |
|
- * |
- * |
* |
|||
- > |
O CO |
' -co |
12 |
||
13 |
Passive Voice.
Part. |
Indef. |
Preter. |
10 |
C^AXXw^ |
«._^JkXXuuJ |
^ o~. oi |
|
J ^o^ o -» |
^ ^c^o.. |
■^ ■jL.'i |
12 |
5 -Ji^o-. |
1.3 |
DERIVATIVES. 80
Of the other Derivatives.
In the remaining derivative conjugations, the penultima of
the preterite active always has Fathak.
i The indefinite is formed from the preterite, by prefixing ^jo1
vidth Fathah; the initial Alif^ if there be one, being dropped, according to the rule just given, and the last Fathah regularly changed into Dammah, the penultima receiving Kasrah^ except
in the fifth and sixth forms, which retain it, as «_/*Jki>-1 , «_,*jLsrl ,
"i — ~« -jj ' '- J-
j^jSj , j*^^^. J >^*^' > '^^^. > ^ut those two forms beginning
t with CJ, sometimes drop that letter, when yjLi of -j01 is pre-
fixed, as j*^ for yjJJJ , JccIjJ for J^r-UJu , which the vowels will easily prevent being taken for the future of the second and
third conjugations, their future actives being Jjuj and J^Ujj
and the passive Jjtij and J^Ut-
•'* The imperative is formed, as in the quadriliterals, ■*u.Gy
jjjj^ , the Alif which had been dropt returning with Kasrah,
in those forms to which it appertains, as J,4jtJwj JaxjLjV
'" - »
The ninth and eleventh have no passives, the others form the passive preterite from the active, the first two vowels being changed into Dammah^ and the penultima into Kasrah^ as
J^' Jjtij" ; the indefinite is also formed from the indefinite active, the Fathah of the letters ^\ being converted into Dammah^ and the penultimate Kasrah into Fathah, as JjtaJL.*.^ JxaJuu.
THE SURD VERB.
Active Voice.
Preterite.
Plural. |
Dual. |
Singular. |
||
Fern. Com. |
Mas. |
Kern. Com. |
Mas. |
Fem. Com. Mas. |
' o — |
.. |
-«- |
«- |
o tS- tS' |
cU/ |
V |
by |
y |
c^y y |
« ..c-- |
Ov* o-^^ |
^..o — |
o — ' o" |
|
ijjj |
rjy |
UJjy |
C^^y Cl^jy |
|
-(^- |
■^ o*^— |
|||
V |
^jy |
Indefinite.
^j/^.. ujyv.
ciir*^" UJ!/^"
uJr
y^
^ W)
t^!/'"
M
y^"
Ur-vT^"
yv.
/^
Imperative.
'A
Participle.
iSj\5
uv^
U^J^
■a - .1^
Infinitive.
u
'-v>':
M
j^
IRREGULAR VERBS, 91
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS.
1. Of the Surd Verb, The tifiliteral verbs, of which the third radical is the same
as the second, are called surd verbs, ^ 1 , as Jc< for J^x* he extended. All the irregularity of surd verbs is reduced to the following rule. In all the inflections where, according to the conjugation of the regular verb, the last radical bears a vowel, the penultimate radical is inserted in the last by Tashdid, the vowel of the penultimate radical is then suppressed, unless the letter preceding it has Jazmah, for then the vowel of the penul- timate radical is given to the latter, which would otherwise have Jazmah. In all the inflections where, on the contrary, the last radical has Jazmah^ these verbs are conjugated regularly. Thus in the third person of the preterite singular and masculine,
c_,.jL3- becomes v— -o- • The second person of the singular of
- o ' '
the same tense is regularly („:>jlls^ •
In the third person of the singular masculine of the inde- finite tense, t.--^J^- is contracted into t_^. , the Dammah of the second radical passing to the first, in place of its Jazmah. If the indefinite follows a particle producing Jazmah^ or an
apocope, it becomes regularly ^-.-ois:!, because the last radical having Jazmah, no contraction takes place. Under the influence of these particles, FatUah or Kasrah may be given to the last radical in lieu of Jazmah ; in this case the contraction return-
92 IRREGULAR VERBS.
ing jSj^ , ^ for j^ . In verbs of which the second radical in the indefinite tense bears Dammah^ the same vowel may also be given to the last. Thus, instead of tiJv^. we may write with
the contraction Saj , J^ , or even Jk/«j .
The imperative preserves its regular form. According to
the rule of the surd verb we should write j_5y^ , \Js\ and \%ji^i
but the reason why the rule is not here followed, is, that the AUf of union is always followed by a letter bearing Jazmah.
But beside the regular form, the imperative has another, in . which the insertion of the second radical in the third does take place, except in the plural feminine. Alif of the im- perative is omitted here, according to the rule, by which it is never prefixed to a letter bearing a vowel.
Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem.
■it - - <i «• ^oo
S. y or y u^' D. 1^ P. Ijy ^jj\
Surd verbs follow in the passive voice the same rules as in the active, thus ^ is for j^ , Kasrah being dropt, because the preceding letter already bears a vowel ; in the indefinite
tense it is Jo for jjo, Fathah being given to the preceding letter which before had Jazmah ; but in the third person plural
feminine without contraction ■ojA'. • The derivative verbs follow the same rule of contraction in those forms which admit it. The contraction in these derivative verbs takes place or not, following the same rules as the primitive.
IRREGULAR VERBS. 9S
Derivative Verhfi hearing contraction.
Preter. |
Indef. |
Imp. |
||
ii ^ |
^^ - |
o -» |
||
3 |
> |
for jjli |
A. |
^> |
<>'i |
"cX |
«J |
o o5 |
|
4 |
y' |
jj^^ |
>• |
-<>' |
■ji ^- |
^^ ^^ |
c — |
||
6 |
> |
jpj |
;Ui: |
JJ^" |
■Si-'O |
^^^o |
--0- |
o 'o |
|
7 |
>1 |
>l |
/v. |
->l |
•Si^o |
--0 |
<,^ |
o -o |
|
8 |
^1 |
^^! |
- # |
|
■it- - (^ |
— o- c |
•^ |
O O ' o |
|
10 |
^^iJuuj |
j/L>\^ |
||
■51 —o |
O 'C |
- ^O" |
O CO |
|
12 |
-4 |
JV:*. |
w^ |
In these derivative forms, as in the primitive, the contraction may be preserved in the indefinite tense, and in the imperative, whenever the third radical ought (in the indefinite tense by the influence of a particle preceding,) to bear Jazmah^ by giving
to that third radical a vowel i^S\ for d^J\, and As\ for ^liU
The derivative forms to which Tashdid naturally belongs are not susceptible of contraction.
94 IRREGULAR VERBS.
Forms. |
Pret. |
Indef. |
Imp. |
""i*" |
-._-^ |
o-- |
|
2 |
J? |
j>:: |
^^ |
5 |
^4 |
o-ii — |
|
«-o |
^ --0' |
o 'o |
|
9 |
^A |
V:-. |
4^1 |
•6 'o |
- 'O^ |
O 'O |
|
11 |
-!>l |
Jy:-.- |
|
- -5) -o |
j-,-0 ' |
o-^o |
|
13 |
,,4^ |
)^,^ |
n^^ |
Verbs ending in c:.? or ^ double these letters by TasMid in those persons, whose final characteristic serviles are dJ or
^ , as Ujj 2^^ adorned^ for IJuu j *, and (^::,X-j tliou wert silent,
for c:^~aL-j ; but neither these, nor the verbs beginning with Cl^ or ^, when they coalesce with the initial characteristics of the fifth, seventh, and other conjugations, are considered as irre- gulars, t Jij\ it was dug through^ for i— ^iiJu^ and ^\ it was
— 'o
negotiated, for ^s^^ being in every respect perfect verbs.
2. Of Verbs hamng Hamzah for one of their Radicals. Verbs which have Hamzah or Alif moveable for one of their
5 J c- ^
radicals, are called jy*^ or hamzated.
The conjugation of hamzated verbs is almost the same as that of regular verbs ; it is only necessary to observe the rules
of permutation, in virtue of which ^ or ^j are substituted for the radical Hamzah.
IRREGULAR VERBS. 95
As Hamzali may be either the first, second or third radical, there are three sorts of hamzated verbs.
Kerb Primitive.
Active Voice.
— Part.
i'
Infin
Pret. y\ — Indef. Jb — Imper. J>J\ — Part. y\ for j\\ —
If the imperative has Dammah for its vowel, the radical
C..S-5
Alif is changed into j , as Jv«j1 from the root J^l . The three verbs 's»^ , j^ and J^l , make in the imperative 3o- , jo and
o o
J^; sometimes however J^^^ and j^^\ are written regularly.
"S-
When the imperative of the verb j<\ is preceded by the con-
o o
jimctions ^ or (_>, it is also written _«lj;, -oli-
Passive Voice.
Pret. y1 Indef. y^ for yb Part. ^yU
Derivatives.
2nd form Act. Pret. J] Indef. yjj Imp, yl P. y^.<
Pass. J)\ y^ yj^
3rd Act. Ji\ or yl* yljj yl* Ji\yo
Pass. j^ jV yV*
96 IRRKGl'LAR VERr.S.
4th form Act. |
J^^ |
y^. |
/^ |
jr |
'U |
' -.-i- |
|||
Pass. |
;.^ |
h |
A- |
Inf. 2nd \Ji\i .Srd 'iii\^ 1th U\I)\
It is only necessary to apply the same rules to all the other forms of derivative verbs, in order to find their root,
when Hamzah is changed into j or o- Thus J-tfjJL:1 is the
passive voice of J^^-U-j^ . In the sixth form it must be observed that the Hamzah^ preceded by Fathak^ followed by Alif quiescent, may be changed into j ; thus from the primitive verb, J^l may be written in the sixth form J^l J or J^ \j .
In order to conjugate the verbs where Hamzah is the second or last radical, it is only necessary to equally apply the rules of permutation common to the three letters 1 j j ? c5 j or those which are peculiar to Al\f-Hamzah.
For example, if Hamzah be the second radical, it is pre-
served or changed into j or j_^, according to the vowel belonging to it, or immediately preceding it ; thus, in the preterite is written
JLj, ;wjJ for ^j^b , ( -Oc-tf for ^-'*U^, in the indefinite Jl«*j ,
jjiw«JJ 5 '-r'W ''^ ^^^^ passive voice it is Jjw , and in the forms derived from the primitive J.
IRREGULAR VERBS. 97
3rd form Pret. ^^"i Indef. wi> Imp. w^ P- *j1*
-S-i^i- j*o^ 0*0 i Jto -»
4th (*^1 j»4> jj) (^
8th j^Ul^ j,ja]j ^\ j»JuL
'^O'O j-f-O^O' O^O'O i'-f^CO^
10th JULil l*-^^^*^. AjliLit |»JkiJuy^
Inf. 3rd l<tl^ 4th U ^ t 8th UUXll 10th U K-.1
If the Hamzak is the last radical, care must equally be
taken to preserve or change it into j or ^y according to the rules of permutation ;
3rd Pers. |
3fas. |
Fem. |
.Mrd Pers. 3Ias. |
t" |
0 - — |
- 0 — |
|
W |
dj*!^ |
cj*!^ |
|
t" |
G ' - - |
- 0 - - |
|
\Jub |
ci^^Uii |
t2j*Ua> |
|
5^-' |
0 :t j- |
0 |
|
yj |
c:jyj |
ClJjJJ |
|
^ - |
0 5^ - |
0 - t - |
|
^> |
e^> |
c^> |
|
i^c- |
:? 0- :J- 0 - |
S-o- :?-o |
|
Indef. |
^.-^' |
, fj^.> *3Jl> |
l^-*. or ,^ |
*-»o:i i o t^o:J
Impera. j^l ^Jufc^ yjl Li-1 .
- i
The case is the same in the passive voice, and derivative forms.
Pret. Indef.
2nd form livr^ |
■i - - -. |
.5th K.x.'e |
|
0th tjci^! |
98 IRREGULAR VERBS.
S-'S-- ^-i-
The quadriliteral verbs, such as U-U- IjLs present no new difficulty ; the rules are ahvays the same : thus from ^^^ comes
in the fourth form, the preterite jjUi?1 , in the indefinite ^^^J^'*^. >
in the impera. ^^yU!?! , and by contraction ^^jxJ?! • - > -- h
Verbs having Hamzah for their second radical are some- times conjugated like concave verbs, of which we shall soon speak : and in which Alif is quiescent, coming from j or ^
radical, this is particularly observable in the verb JLj to ash
- - -. — o'- o^
which is often written JLj, Indef. JLu or Jw , Imp. J-j for JL:^ ; where both the Alifs drop, radical Hamzah by the
third general rule, and the servile Alif by the following letter having a vowel. Verbs, of which the last radical is Hamzah^ are often confounded also with verbs properly called defective, that is, having their last radical j or ^J-
Of Imperfect Verbs in General.
These have among their radicals one or more of the letters j and ^J , and are divided into different classes ; the first compre- hends those which have ^ or ^ for their first radical, the second class those in which either of the same letters is the second radical, and the third those having ^ or 4_^ as last radical, whether the root be triliteral or quadriliteral. The fourth class, and the following two, are verbs in which two of the letters j and ^^ are contained. The fourth class contains verbs in which these letters are the second and third radicals. In the fifth class they are the first and third radical. The sixth class is of verbs
IRREGULAR VERBS. 99
where the three radicals are all j or ^; but not more than one or two examples of these can be found.
Of Imperfect Verhs, of which the first Radical is
3 or e^.
These verbs are called by the Arabians Jll< or similar
verbs, because their conjugation in the preterite is conformable to the regular verb : amongst these verbs, those having j for their first radical are subject to more irregularity, than those whose first radical is ^ .
The principal irregularity of the verbs having j for their first radical, consists in their sometimes losing that letter in the indefinite and imperative ; this most frequently occurs in those verbs, of which the second radical in the indefinite bears Kasrah ; it is to be observed, however, that several verbs of this class, of which the second radical bears Kasrah in the preterite, and should consequently take Fathah in the inde- finite, nevertheless preserve Kasrah, and therefore lose j.
t\£j djo for J»£V
"^Ji ^y. ^J^.
J^J d^:. Lh3:.
It is the same with the imperative.
o o o t< o c
Jlc for cXcjl ^j^ for ^•■ojl
7—2
100 IRREGULAR VERBS.
When the second radical in the indefinite does not bear
Kasrah that tense is regularly formed, as J>s^^. from J^j , and
-J- -it'
Ojj from J. . When the indefinite is regular, the imperative
is so likewise, as &^^\ , Jjp'.^ , JJo^ • In the two last examples,
the ^ is substituted for ^ radical, according to the rules of
permutation ; thus ddJ\ imperative of J. , is for JJ^^ .
Several verbs lose • in the indefinite though their second
radical in that tense bears Fathah ; these verbs are, ^i?^ to
t - ' ' —
tread under foot, which is for l!bi ; «_-.-j to be large ; «_ij to fall;
cjj to leave; c_^vib^ to give; j_J. to place; which make in the indefinite Ux; , f-*^'. , ■j-a^' j ? Jo ^ S"^. ' 7-^. '
The verb jJu is only used in the indefinite and imperative,
J Jo and jj .
The in'egularity of all these verbs exists only in the active voice of the first form. In the passive voice of that form, and in all the derivative forms, they present no in-egularity except indeed in the eighth form, as will be observed immediately.
Verbs having ^ for first radical, are not, properly speaking,
irregular ; thus ^_^-jj , j^/-JOo ; j-u*j , j*^ ; ^^^j , -m*-vj • It
must only be observed that the radical ^ is changed into j when
it is quiescent after Dammah ; thus -w*j makes in the indefinite
of the third form ^^ , instead of ^^xujo ; the rule of permutation is merely to be observed.
IRREGULAR VKRBS. 101
It has been already said that verbs having for their first radical j or ^^ usually change it in the eighth conjugation into LU y which unites by Tashdid with the ci^ characteristic
of that conjugation ; Jcti! and -uJl are written therefore for 4X*Jjl and j-uajo! . Sometimes however the regular form is pre-
served, the ^ , when quiescent after Kasrah, being changed into t/, and the ^J, when quiescent after Dammah^ being similarly changed into ^\ and both changing into Alif, when quiescent after Fathah.
There are some similar verbs which at the same time have
Hamzah j\^, \ii^, ^Jsj ' Indef. -u., cjj^.j Haj? but this presents no new difficulty.
Of Imperfect Verbs, of which the Second Radical is ^ or ^ , called Concave Verbs.
Verbs having their second radical j or tj'j are called by the Arabians 4— J^^ j that is to say, concave, and <G)U1 \ ji or
verbs of three letters, because one of their characteristics is, to have only three letters in the first person singular of the preterite, where the regular and defective verbs have four, as
may be seen by comparing i,^:^ concave verb, with <^:_^SJ^ I
hate written ; tJUOwi* / have passed hj ; '-^•j^ / hat'e made war. These verbs, and those of the next class, are they which depart most widely from the regular forms ; tiieir number is very great, and it is therefore essential to be well acquainted with their conjugation.
102
IRREGULAR VERBS,
THE CONCAVE ..
Active Voice. Preterite.
Plural. |
Dual. |
Singular. |
||
Fem. Com. |
Mas. |
Fem. Com. |
Mas. |
Fem. Com. Mas. |
^ |
yii |
Uli |
fli |
l^\i jii' |
uS |
c:^ c:.Jj |
|||
^o^ uu |
Indefinite.
J^ J^.
J^
c;i^
y
^^
Imperative. Participle.
aLU
J5
Jali
IRREGULAR VERBS.
103
Passive Voice of the Concave
Preterite.
Plural. |
Dual. |
Singular. |
||
Fern. Com. |
Mas. |
Fem. Com. |
Mas. |
Fem. Com. Mas. |
c^. |
lA^ |
uLi |
i^^ |
|
•Si-»0 |
||||
J o |
Indefinite.
U^^^. J^
Jlii
.^Uj
cPJ^*.
M^Jlii^-
JUu-
Jlsi
Participle.
c^^yU ^^jSyu ^jUljiu ^^y^
Aiyu Jjiu
104
IRREGULAR VERBS.
THE CONCAVE ^
Active Voice.
Preterite.
Plural. |
Dual. |
Singular. |
1 |
||||
fern. |
t'onv |
Ma*. |
Fein. |
Com. |
Mas. |
Fem. Com. |
Mas. |
' o |
^ |
^y ^ |
^ ^ |
O -' ^ |
^ _ |
||
uy- |
IjJl |
li;;L |
1> |
ci.>^L |
> |
||
«-o |
o-»t- |
^ JO |
(^ |
' c |
|||
^^: |
r^ |
UJm.) |
Cl>^ |
Indefinite. |
||
Jlr^ Jj^.. |
jJwmJ j:^**^'. |
|
Jj^ |
ttf'j^ -^ |
|
J>*l*j |
Imperative. |
^' |
Ir^' |
Participle.
c^V
l^U
ujy
L
^liyL
JyL
iyLs jjL*
InJinitiTe.
ljjw>
IRREGULAR VERBS. 105
Verbs having j or ^^ for their second radical are irregular only in the first, fourth, seventh, eighth, and tenth forms.
In these verbs, the second radical letter always loses its vowel, and sometimes disappears altogether. When it is qui- escent it undergoes various changes. All the rules indicating the anomalies of these verbs will be foimd among the rules of permutation common to ^ and ^^ .
It is in conformity with those rules, that in the third per- son singular masculine of the preterite, Jljj is written instead of Jy , and ( jU- for i-Jj=- , that in the second and first per-
son of the same tense, j.::^ , ,,j:^ and c:,.,^ are written for
oJjJJ J o-Sy and c^NJys- . and that in the indefinite J^j , i_jU:*.
are written for Jyij , uJjir'. , or under the influence of a particle
producing apocope, Jjb (_is.-'. ; it is so with all the other irre- gularities. Thus, in the feminine plural, j and ^ drop, on ac- count of the subsequent Jazmah. These radicals are also dropped
in the singular masculine, and plural feminine of the imperative,
«j ^ ^ but they return when the paragogical ^ is added, as ^J say
thou ; i^j^ go thou ; ^Ji^ fear thou.
Verbs having j for their second radical, take Darmnah in
the indefinite, when the preterite is either of the form Jjw or
Jjw ; as Jyb the indefinite of ^^\s, which is for Jy ; and
J^ indefinite of J\L, which is for J^ ; but if the second radical have Kasrah for its vowel in the preterite, the inde-
106 IRREGULAR VERBS.
finite takes Fathah, as uJIsl-I for uJjis'., indefinite of uJU- which is for i_ij^ •
Verbs having ^_$ for their second radical, generally take Kasrah in the indefinite, because they are of the form Jjti, indefinite JjtAj, as ^;jsw indefinite of jL, which is for -x-:. There are some however of the form Jxi, indefinite JjtfiJ, these take
Fathah in the indefinite, as c- >l£ for v— ^^J^., indefinite of c-jU,
which is for 4— Ov>-
The imperative has no Alif of union, because the first radical
bears a vowel, as in Ji and ^, and J.^e/ of union can only
come before a letter bearing Jazniah.
The radical Alif in the participle, following the character- istical quiescent Alif ought to have a vowel, as two quiescent letters cannot meet, but Hamzah or moveable Alif is substi-
tuted for it; which by the first canon, Alif is changed to i.
Jj\5 being for J^lS, and that for Jj\jj, jLj for jlL, and that
again for JL: .
There is no difference in the preterite and indefinite of the passive voice, between verbs whose second radical is j , or those having ^j •
In the participle of the passive voice however, the Dammah of the second radical being removed to the first, the letter j is thrown out, to prevent the concurrence of two quiescent
letters after one vowel, Jyu being for ^}^f^', but in concave, ij Dammah is also changed to Kasrah, as r>«*ur« for j^Jf*u^ •
IRREGULAR VERBS. 107
In approved authors however, particularly among the Poets,
S o» o "
many of these participles are regularly formed, as ^ty^^^ guarded ;
but especially those of concave ^ , as i^jJ^sr* sewed together ,•
J^j^ measured.
It is well to observe that in concave verbs whose last radical is trj , this o is incorporated by Tashdid, with the uu forming the second person of the preterite, and first person singular of
the same tense ; thus from cul* comes in the first person singular
I , and in the second persons c:,^v< , c:^-^ , UjU •
In concave verbs whose last radical is ^, the same occurs whenever this ^, being jazmated, is followed by ^ forming the
person. Thus from ^^L? is made in the third person plural feminine of the preterite, and in the second person plural femi- nine of the imperative -^ ; in the first person plural of the preterite Uuj; and in the third person plural feminine of the
indefinite -oji .
These observations equally apply to the derivative verbs, and are of importance in finding the root when reading Arabic written without vowels, or orthographical signs.
Verbs derived from Concave Roots.
As has been before observed, in forms derived from concave verbs, the fourth, seventh, eighth, and tenth only are irregular, in these derivative forms, no difference exists between those whose second radical is j and those where it is ^J . It will be sufficient to give a paradigm of these forms, presenting the first word of each tense.
108
IRREGULAR VERBS.
Active Voice.
Infinitive. |
Participle. |
Imperative. |
Indefinite. |
Preterite. |
|
Jr^ |
JU-f| |
||||
b-.U |
.Jsjuuuc |
^Jw*J |
>f_ |
k 4 |
|
jlii^ |
^ 7 |
||||
J ^ O v> |
o ^ o |
> - |
|||
\(^\ ' * |
juil |
8 |
|||
jUw^ |
^lii: |
> ■ |
|||
- » |
- * o - o |
' — o |
r ^^ |
Passive Voice.
Participle. |
Indefinite. |
Preterite. |
Participle. |
Indefinite. |
Preterite. |
4 |
lUyw« |
jUyJ |
Jlil |
J^! |
^ |
||
^LuX« |
;a: |
juic' |
J^^ |
JjsA3t |
7 |
|
iVA**fc-c |
jlw) |
jiii |
J^^ |
8 |
||
i? -- -' o -. |
iUjuXi*J |
J ^ - C V. |
JliLw) |
JjJiJLt 10 |
IRREGULAR VERBS. 109
III forming the different persons of each tense of these de- rivative forms, it is only necessary to apply the same rules as in the primitive verb. Thus, in the third person singular femi-
nine, of the preterite of the fourth form, <,^:^,^\ for \,::„~<^^\ , and
in the second person singular masculine of the same tense, c:„^t
for l::^~«jj1 .
The other derivatives are regular ; it is to be observed how- ever, that in the passive voices of the third form J^li , and the
sixth form Jj::UJ of concave verbs, whose second radical is j, that the Alif characteristic of these forms, and which is changed into ^ on account of the Dammah preceding, does not unite by
Tashdid with the radical ^ that follows it, thus ^jy and not Ajjj . If the second radical is ^^, the ^ and the ^^ must be kept distinct ; thus «-jb makes in the passive voice j-J «J •
There are a few concave verbs conjugated regularly, as .y:
to he one-eyed., and Jo-s to hunt. Some other concave verbs, though irregular in the first form, may be conjugated either
regularly or irregularly in the fourth, such are -\j to do any
thing at night ; aXs. to he cloudy ; which in the fourth form
are -.jj! or J\j\, j^\ or a{z\ . It is the same with the tenth
form of verbs, whose second radical is j , as c-^lsH^l and <_->»jsr^l
he answered; and c_jL2jLj1 or c->^*aLj1 he approved. The irre- gular conjugation is however most in use.
110 IRREGULAR VERIJS.
Of Imperfect Verbs, which are at the same time Concave and Ham%ated.
Of these there are two sorts, the first class comprehends
those which have \ for first, and j for second radical, such are
-^ ->^ "i "t -'s-
t_-;U and JU for i^^ and JjU they are conjugated like y!
and Jlii ; thus in the preterite c->U, ooli, yJL^\, o<:'U like
Jl«, eJlJ*, e^ij, c:^.
In the indefinite <-r'j^; like Jyb, observing the change of
o
Alif-hamzah into j in the imperative t-_>^ and ^^^ , like Jj and ^y . Part. t--jU • Inf. b^l .
The second class comprehends those which have j or (_5 for second radical, and \ for the third, as xLj for sy^, s.\s- for U»-, and AJ^ for bw) . The first is conjugated like Jljj and U&,
the second like jL and lAi^ , and the third like c_;U and Ua .
o o
Thus, Pret. ^U, c:^*:tLj, ci^j--, <-^j-j> &c. Indef. i »**^ .
c o o
i J -»^ G '^— - i J-
Impera. y^. Pret. ^U-, i-r^^W, c:.,^*-, c:^ur^ , &c. Indef. ^.. Impera. ^^ . Pret. ili>, c:j:sli) , i.::„-jui , c>OLi , &c.
o
Indef. ili^, • Impera. Li» . Part, f i^Ls • Inf. |1^-- Part. ?j_cU- . Inf. A-Jo- and ?Us^ . Pai*t. ft_^li • Inf. ^.jJi .
IRREGULAR VERBS. Ill
In the passive voice the same rules are to be observed ; thus i^ for .«j-o, and ^^^ for ^,<^-
When several HamzaKs come in succession, it is usual to suppress one in order to soften the pronunciation ; this is called
Jjs^mJ or softening, the contrary being called J^xiisr' or verifying.
Of Imperfect Verhs, whose last Radical is * or ^, and which are called Defective Verhs.
Verbs whose last radical is ^ or ^, are called by the Arabian grammarians j_/sJslj defective, and also <UJj3 ^ j^? or verbs of four letters, because they have four letters in the first
person singular of the preterite, as CL^^ji .
The last radical undergoes changes resembling those to which the second radical is subject in concave verbs, some- times it is changed into another letter, sometimes it disap- pears, sometimes its vowel passes to the preceding letter, and at other times it is totally suppressed. The cliief anomalies of these verbs are founded on the rules of permutation.
112
IRREGULAR VERBS.
THE DEFECTIVE j.
Active Voice. Preterite.
Plural. |
Dual. |
Singular |
||||
Fem. Cora. |
Mas. |
Fem. |
Com. |
Mas. |
Fem. Com. |
Mas. |
' (^^ ^ |
i^^ |
^^^ |
^y^ |
c ' ^ |
^^ |
|
<D^J^ |
S^ |
U> |
b> |
Cl.> |
1;^ |
|
•S-.c^^ |
O.jC^ |
^ ^o^^ |
o^^ |
' o^^ |
||
i^^J^ |
fi}^ |
^J!> |
^^> |
^J> |
||
^O'-^ |
., O^.' |
|||||
U^i |
^J> |
Indefinite.
JjJ*'"
UJ'J?;*'.
'V.j^
1,>!
UJJ^
Imperative. Participle. Infinitive.
jy
Jj*^
i>^
oV.j^
c^>^
ijjU
•,u
b>
IRREGULAR VERBS.
113
THE DEFECTIVE ^
Active Voice.
Preterite.
Plural. |
Dual. |
Singular. |
||||
Fem. |
Com. |
Mas. |
Fem. |
Com. |
Mas. |
Fem. Com. |
o — |
Cj |
C^^ |
||||
4-. 0-- |
-o — |
o-> c, - - |
o -' c |
-v
Indefinite.
ur^y. |
Jj^j Jjf^j, |
|
o- |
' -» O' |
" i^ |
c;^!/" |
cjW |
J^J |
Imperative. |
||
J o |
^S^ |
^y |
LfV. |
crt^^
L^^*
^=^1
l2^U«^
V U»^y
Participle.
JXj^Sj J^\j
Xxoli
Infinitive.
r^
V-»-
114 IRREGULAR VERBS.
In the third person masculine singular of the preterite,
\jc. is for »jz , and ^<^ for -<^ . In the third person singular feminine, and in the dual of the same gender, the last radical
and its vowel are dropped altogether, and w5ji is for CL^jJc.,
and \j\£. for bj ic .
In the third person plural masculine, the last radical with
its vowel disappear, and \j\£. and \j^j are contractions for Ij^ji
and \j^j , according to the rule of permutation. If after thi& third person, or those of the indefinite which tenninate in the same way, Waslah or AUf of union occur, Dammah is given
to the . , in order that the union may take place, <dl \ Lc J .
The Fathah which the second radical bore in the preterite, in the indefinite changes into Dammah if the last radical be J , or into Kasrah if it be ^ • Sometimes, however, in verbs whose last radical is ^j , the Fathah remains in the indefinite
on account of meeting a guttural letter, -cj from ^j . This last radical, in the indefinite, loses its vowel and becomes qui- escent, according to the rules of permutation. After the j thus quiescent, AHf mute is not put however in the singular,
.jx> not IjA) (see j, 1.5, rule of permutation) this is not always strictly observed, the AUf being sometimes added. ^^ hen pre- ceded by particles changing, by antithesis, the Dammiah of the third radical into Fathah, the last radical retakes its vowel,
as
jjb, (^^y, > because that vowel being Fathah there is no reason for its suppression.
IRREGULAR VERBS. 116
When subject to apocope, the third radical wholly disap- pears, as jjc and j»y .
When subjected to paragoge, the third radical is preserved,
^ UJlr*:*.' Ui^.' c;:^V.' cT^*-;^.'
In the second person singular feminine of the indefinite, as well as in the second and third person plural masculine of the
same tense, a contraction occurs, ^j>,'f^ ? \ji^y ' u^JSi*:'. ' UJ?i*^ ' tiinnl and ,^^y , for ^^^>j■, ^JJ-^^■, uJLJ>J.» uJJl^'' c:;^V.'
j^»j^y . It may be observed that in k^ , and verbs similarly
conjugated, the second and third persons masculine plural are
like the feminine, and that in ,^^j-, and verbs of the same form, the second person singular feminine is the same as the second person plural of the same gender.
When the second person singular feminine of the indefinite, and second and third person plural masculine of the same tense are subject to paragoge however, the j and the ^^, which remain after the contraction, are wholly dropped, on account of the jj quiescent, which then follows them agreeably to the rule
(gen. 3) this is written with Tashdrd ^oi*^ ? liT^t^ ^ UJ^*^ UJ^^ cif** ' tiTtr'' CAT*:'' ^^* Among the verbs, whose last radical is J, it is only those having Fathah for vowel of the second
radical in the preterite which wholly follow the paradigm he ; those whose second radical bear Dammah, form the preterite regularly, except in the third person plural masculine ; thus
8—2
116 IRREGULAR VERBS.
•^ , in the third person singular feminine, is tUV*^ , and in that of the dual feminine Ij^ ; but in the third person plural mas- culine, it is by contraction Ij-j for \^j^ agreeably to the rules. In other respects these verbs are conjugated like Iji.
As to those having Kasrdh for vowel of the second radical in the preterite, they are conjugated in a peculiar manner, which it is necessary to explain by giving an example, observing that
in this case j radical is changed into ^5 \ thus ^j is written
for yaj .
IRREGULAR VERBS.
117
DEFECTIVE ^ PRECEDED BY KASRAH,
ij«^ FOR y^j'
Active Voice.
Preterite.
Plural. |
Dual. |
Singular. |
||
Fern. Com. |
Mas. |
Fern. Com. |
Mas. |
Fern. Com. Mas. |
crH; |
Uju?) |
UJ; |
o - - ' - |
|
■Si -. |
UJOm7j |
c:,...-jmJ; ci^^Jw?; |
||
lUw?; |
urH/
^y
c;:H;^
\y6j\
Indefinite. |
|
Imperative. |
|
o - c |
Infinitive.
u^b
118 IRREGULAR VERBS.
The preterite is conjugated regularly, excepting the third person plural masculine, where the third radical is dropt, and its vowel given to the second radical which loses its Kobsrah,
\ycj for \y^j-
In the indefinite, ^j>, is for ^^ ; the suppression of the last vowel, and change of j into ^, are in conformity to the rule (j 7,) but it must be observed that this change of ^ into yj which, conformably to the rule quoted, takes place in the third person because the j is final, continues in those persons of the indefinite where the j ceases to be final. Thus in the
plural feminine, ^^rJ^y. and ^^y^y for \jy^ji. ^^^ \jy^y ' ^^"^ the same reason in the second person singular feminine ought
to be written ^juui^' , and in the plural masculine ^y^Ji. and
j^^jupJ ; as in the dual ^J^j^ \ but instead of these regular forms a contraction takes place in these different persons, and iirH/ ' uy"J- ^^^ <jy"y ^'® written agreeably to the rule of permutation. When the indefinite bears antithesis, ^ji, can- not be written in conformity to the conjugation of regular verbs, in consequence of the rule of permutation (^ 3,) it is there-
fore written («-^, in the common form.
When paragoge occurs, ^^ resumes its vowel, because it is no longer at the end of a word, ^jJ^-^. and ^ji^y • When apocope takes place the third radical is dropt, as in jx) and Mj , and we write ^^ji^ ■
When receiving antithesis, or apocope, the second person
IRREGULAR VERBS. 119
singular feminine of the indefinite is written ^^y and not ^^a-t^JJ > but the ^ then bears Jazmah, and if it be followed
by Wadah, or Alif of union, it receives Kasrak. This occurs also in the second person feminine singular of the imperative
^^j^ • In this case, therefore, they are written ^^y and
^^J\ ' In the second and third persons plural masculine of the
indefinite, when receiving either antithesis or apocope, a similar
contraction occurs, and \^y and \y^jj are written for Uj^ ,
l^xJ^' . Jazmah is then put over the j , and if it be followed
by an Alif of union, it receives Dammah ; ^y^yt Vv' The same takes place in the second person plural masculine of the imperative.
The Kasrah and the Dammah used in the cases just men- tioned, are equally used in the persons enumerated when paragoge
occurs, thus ^jJ*-y> UJ*^. ^"^ <)y^f' Impera. ^^Jw?;1 and
In the singular masculine of the participle, j final after Kasrah is changed to ^ (by 14 canon j) ^fjlc being put for
jjlc ; and as ^ final after Kasrah cannot take Dammah^ it rejects it, and throwing the nunnation on the preceding letter, drops, as jKc. for ^jjXc ; but if the nunnation is removed by the
article, ^ then returns, as ^JJ^^ for ^^jUll . The same pre- vails in the defective ^^ , as m\j for ^^\j ; and as ^j final after
120 IRREGULAR VERBS.
Kasrah refuses another Kasrah^ jU and Aj are used also in the
genitive for ^^U and ^^1j . The accusative is however regular, as bjU and Ixc^j . In &j'\s. and iJ^j , the rejected ^ returns,
as not being final, and jjjyU makes a contraction, as in the future.
In the passive voice, the defective verbs of the four forms VJ:. , ji^ , ^j , ^j are all conjugated in the same way,
iJfH^ , ^jM , ^j , ^j • All the inflections of the preterite,
and the indefinite of these passive voices, resemble those of
the active voice ^j- It is only necessary to give Dammak
to the first radical in the preterite, and also to the formative letters of the different persons of the indefinite. Thus in the
preterite is written ,cji , **^j^ > '*^lj^ ' ^^^.j^ ' ^^" ^^ ^^^ indefinite i^i**.' ^^^^ uVj*:l » plural ^jj/V. ' ^^•
In the derivative forms there is no difference between the verbs whose last radical is j and those having ^j , both take ^^ for their final letter through all these forms.
In the active voice ^J is quiescent after Fathah^ as ^_$Jc.
and ^^ . In the passive voice it bears Fathah after Kasrah^
All the derivative forms follow, in the active voice, the con- jugation of ^^j , and in the passive voice that of ^^j .
IRREGULAR VERBS.
121
DEFECTIVE DERIVATIVES.
Passive Voice. |
Active Voice. |
|||
Indefinite. |
Preterite. |
Indefinite. |
Preterite. |
2 3 4 5 6 8 10 |
■a "^ |
- oi ' C - Oi^ |
122 IRREGULAR VERBS.
Of Verbs, hehig at the same time Defective and Ham^ated.
These verbs are divided into two classes ; the first con- s- taining those which have \ for the first radical, and for last
^t ^t ^t
J or ^. Such are ^\ to come, ^\ to refuse, ^jl to pay.
They are conjugated like y \ and he , or j^-j , ^j or ^j . Pret. ^\ , «c^'\ , c:.^i , &c. Indef. ^Jb . Impera.
o
^j:,^! . Irregularly cu or aj" . Part. CLi\ . Inf. \jj\ . The > - - *^ " ^
verb ^i in the third form, sometimes changes the radical Alif into «, it is then written ^Ife, instead of ^\ • Inde- finite jsJ'l^- Impera. culfc. The second class contains those
whose second radical is \ , and the third j or ^, as ^\j ^o
'^- be distant. These verbs are conjugated like JU and he,
--'- -''• s.- '^i- - Ct' /o-
or ^j or i^-j;- Pret. i_^li , CLi\i , c:^.^^ &c. Indef. ^^Iw .
Impera. Ijl . Part. * U . In verbs of this cla^ss, the second
radical preserves in the indefinite tense the Fathah which it bore in the preterite ; this is caused by the Alif-hamzaJi being a guttural letter.
i^ The verb t_^h to see, being in very common use, almost
always loses its Alif-hamzah in the indefinite and imperative.
Plural.
-o — 'c —
IRREGULAR VERBS.
Indefinite.
Dual.
123
JiJ
J^J
Singular.
^.y
^J
^j
V.y.' &c. |
^J,, &c. |
\iji, &c. |
y.» &c. |
•Si |
uV.y.' ^c. |
kj |
u?;j, J or S^ |
Ikj |
With Antithesis, L^, &c.
c —
Apocope, ijjj, &c.
Paragoge, ^j5^_, &c. Impera. ^j Ijj Paragoge, ^Ujj ^^j
The passive voice of ^_^j is ^<'J) which is conjugated hke ^^. In the indefinite, Alif-Hamzah may be dropped, as in the active voice, ^^ for ^^^ .
In the fourth form, the verb ^!j always loses its second radical; thus, Pret. ^j\ , ci^l, i,j:^j] , &c. Indef. ^j. Imp.
j\ . The imperative of the verbs j1 , ^\j , and others being, on account of their double irregularity, reduced to a single letter, as C->, j, a quiescent s is added whenever they are
followed by a pause aJ , Hj.
124 IRREGULAR VERBS.
Of Verbs Doubly Imperfect.
Verbs having two of the letters j and ^ among their radicals are divided into two classes. In the first these two letters make the first and third radicals. Those which have Fathah for the
vowel of the second radical, are conjugated like ^Xcj and ^j'->
those having Kasrah^ like Js^j and ^j'
1 . Jj , e^j > ^^^3 5 ^c- Indef. j^, . Imp. j or Jjj . Part. jlj.
2. ^_^^, ci^-t^^jj ^-^^--T^f-J' ^^- Iiidef. ^^JJ. Imp. ^.^
for jt.U Part. f.!j.
The Imperative j in the other persons resumes i^, con- tracted however in the plural masc. as ^^ , ly , Lw , ^ , j .
The second class contains the verbs in which the letters . and 4_5 occupy the second and third places ; thus, ,_^ to roast ; ^ys to be strong ; ^<^^^ to live. These verbs are concave and defective, but the second radical is subject to no irregularity; thus t^*-ii is conjugated like ^j , and ^y like ^^ji^ j follows J)j . Some follow he .
Pret. u?^ •> ^^^ •> c^jy* 5 ^c- Indef. ^jyio . Imp. yL\ , &c. tjy, (.::^.y, ci^.^Jj Sic. i^yb. >j|
Jew for ^Jo- •
- fc
o -
IRREGULAR VERBS. 125
Pret. ^Jksv , oojo- , c^'jue^ . Indef. U^, , &c. Dual ^Ijosr/. .
Plural ^^J^.-
Impera. ^^>-\ ^^^^' Dual bjc^U Plural \jJc^U ^J:^J^^•
Part. _jli , jlij , t^U- . #■ ^ <f
Inf. \j^, i|^, ^j:^^*
The final ^ of the indefinite jJ^srl ought to be changed into j_j according to the rule of permutation (j, 7,) but here Alif is substituted for ^.j following another rule (t_j, 4,) on account of the ^ which precedes it, and to distinguish it from the
^ o ^
proper name j^ast'. •
The infinitive \jJi, is put for bj-i (^ and j_5 , 3,) and sy
■f-^t^^ ^ - -
for ijy . Instead of the participle 4_jW , the adjective ^^s^
is most generally used.
The verb ^jJs>- is often contracted in the manner of surd verbs, in the third persons of the preterite; excepting that
of the plural feminine, ^^^ , (.::^.oo- , U&- , Uxs^ and t^jes- .
Verbs of this kind preserve in their derivatives the analogy
of those whose last radical is j or i_j , but it must be observed,
that the verb i<as^, in its tenth form, often has a particular
irregularity, losing its second radical, the vowel of which passes to the first. Thus,
126 IRREGULAR VERBS.
Pret. j^^J^sr^l or ^js:*^\ . — Indef. ^^^j^sr^. or ^^•**^. •
Imp. .^jsr*^! or ^Jusl •
O/ Vei'bs Doubkj Imperfect and Ham%atecl.
Of these, there are two classes, the one has for its first radical \ , and for second and third j or ^^ ; such is ij»\ , which is conjugated like ^\ and ^j:^ . Pret. ^^\ , CJjl , c:^j1 »
&c. Indef. tJjV. » ^^' •'^"^P- ^^ » ^^' ^^^* J^ • ^'^^' V3 •
In the second class of these verbs the second radical is
\ , and the letters ^ and y_s are the first and third ; as y^\^
to promise ; which is conjugated like ^j and JL> , being at the same time similar, defective, and hamzated.
i- o i^ - of-' *-- *-' *^
Pret. ^1^ , c^lj , <::^^\) , &c. Indef. ^l» , ^Ij' , ^li' ,
^ S.' % - ^
J}3 , i^*) , &c. Indef. with antithesis, ^b , &c. With apo-
i^ s-^ s-^ s- ^ S o
cope, l» , Ij , Ij , i_^li' , i>\ , &c. Imp. \ or i] — ^_$\ , &c. Part. ^\^, &c. Inf. U^ .
Of the Negative Verb.
The Arabians have a negative verb, possessing only the preterite tense but unlimited in time, and the conjugation of which much resembles that of the concave verb. It is the
verb ^j»j\ is not^ was not, will not be, &c.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
127
Plural. |
Dual. |
8inj,'ular. |
|||
Mas. |
Com. |
Fern. |
Mas. Com. |
Feni |
Mas. Com. Fern. |
llj |
i' |
||||
UJ |
o ^ o ^ |
UJuu! |
cLJj |
In some cases CLi^ is used instead of ^jj^ . This admits of no inflection, and the Arabian grammarians are not agreed upon its nature.
F'erbs of Praise and Blame. Those verbs which the Arabians denominate ^.j^ \ JUif aJJIj or verbs of praise and blame, do not admit of conjugation. They are *xj , which is also pronounced **i , **j and **3 , to he
o
^oo(:?, and j^^**jj to he bad. They may be regarded as a species of interjectional verbs ; they receive a feminine termination also,.
c
as c^''*'*^ i \j:^^>mM , They are sometimes, but very rarely,
written U*; in the dual ; and \^.4JtJ in the plural. The word
'' wi ' IJoo- may be looked upon as a verb of this kind; it is com-
pounded of i_;^>s^ and 1j, and signifies, to he excellent, or worthy
of love. To these three verbs may be also added s\^ to he had;
and j^*urw for ^^f**»-i to he beautiful; but these under other acceptations are regularly conjugated.
128 IRREGULAR VERBS.
Of Verbs of Admiration.
'V "^ ■-» '*^ S-
Verbs called i_^j5r*^^ Jl«^ :> verbs of admiration, are rather a kind of admirative formula than a particular species of verb.
There are two. In the first Jjtil U, the form of the third person singular masculine of the preterite of the fourth con-
jugation Jjtil is used, preceded by the monosyllable U, and followed by an accusative. In the second, the second person singular masculine of the imperative of the fourth conjugation
Jxsl is employed, followed by the preposition t— >, as J«djl U \dJ\ or jj J J-oJ^ Zaid is very excellent.
OF NOUNS.
Nouns wt are divided into proper names, As. , as ,X4.s^
Muhammad ; ^L< Mecca ,• ^^^s^^ the Jaihun (river) ; or appel-
latives, ju*xs!t wi (name of kind or genus), as ^-v3 a prophet;
ixjiXo a city; ^ a river; and into adjectives, 6a^ , (quality or qualifieative) ; as J^jt^ little ; \^jaSi\ white.
They are either primitive, deriving their origin from no other words ; or derivative, from either a verbal or substantive origin.
The servile letters employed in the derivation of nouns are
^ Si ^
comprised in the word Ix^-uJ^j •
^ is added at the end, as ^^ « Persian ; it is placed after the vowel of the second syllable, so forming diminutives, as v---oK a little dog ; and sometimes, though rarely, before the radicals, as ^^joj a fountain.
d^ is employed at the beginning, as J-;^ prolotigation ;
j^ pride ; in the middle, as in nouns, from the eighth con-
jugation ^\^\ confession ; or at the end, where it is repre- ' *^
sented by 'i , as Ia^^^j mercy. 9
130 OF NOUNS.
ow never serves alone, but with two others, as in nouns
from the tenth conjugation, as jUxLol deprecation ; —jS^"**^ a leader.
A is servile at the beginning, as KU^ a kingdom; and,
though very rarely, at the end, as Ju\ a son.
^^ serves in the beginning with \, as in nouns from the seventh conjugation, as clkajl abstinence ; or at the end, then forming nouns of action from the primitive triliteral verb, as ^y^ pardon^ from ii ; or adjectives, as ^^ from J^ .
\ is used at the beginning, as J^^ hlaclc ; ,j*«*-^ handsomer ; ,\yJi a horseman ; or after the radicals, as * Ijj^ haughtiness ;
in this case it is represented by Hamzah only, and has quiescent \ before it.
Under the head of verbal derivatives, are comprehended almost all adjectives, and participles used adjectively, together with those substantives which signify the Agent or Patient, the Time or Place of Action, the Instrument, and the Action itself.
Name of the Agent and Patient.
Adjectives derived from verbs, or as they are considered by Erpenius, active participles, received in a substantive sense,
denote the agent, as jAi agisting, an assistant ; (.j3U ruling, a king or ruler.
These verbal adjectives, when derived from the triliteral primi- tive verb, are for the active voice of the form Jjils , and for the
OF NOUNS. 181
passive voice of the form J^«a^. Thus J^ from J.^ to judge ; i,.^^\j from e--i^ to desire ; ^^ye from Je*-. to be found, to exist; <_-)4i_« from t_^>i^ to he desired.
From the verbal adjective of the form J^li is derived an- other of the form JUi:, which adds to the primitive idea, that
S -it -
of intensity, or constant habitude; thus jjLuc^ signifies very handsome ; ^y^\ a great eater ; i^Vd^ one habituated to lying ; JLc isery learned.
This form of verbal adjectives supplies the names of trades, &c., as jU;i a baker; jls^ a carpenter; %.\JL: a water-carrier.
Name of Place and Time.
The place and time of action are denoted by the same noun, as c-JiC* place and time of icriting ; ^^-isr* place and
time of sitting ; it is formed from the indefinite tense of tri-
t literal verbs, by substituting >» for the incremental letters ^jJl .
When the second radical of the indefinite tense has for its vowel Fathah or Kasrah, this vowel is preserved in the noun of time and place ; but if that letter have Dammah for its
vowel, it usually becomes Fathah ; thus from c-^^a^; is formed
L»».x^.« a school, a place where writing is taught. There are, however, twelve nouns of this kind, which change Dammah into Kasrah, as
9—2
132 OK NOdNS.
j^L* tlie place of rising^ the east.
t— >^*^ the place of setting^ the west.
(Jij^ a place on which tJie elbow rests.
c:,-o^\^ the place where a plant grows.
kS***^ the place where a thing falls.
j\^ the place where a camel is slaughtered or flayed,
j^^ the plaice of breathing, the nostrils.
c_Cw*jc< the place where the victim is sacrificed.
«_ili« the place of rising of the stars.
So-'
^J^ the place on the head where the hair divides.
S o -'
il>M..< the place of residence, a house.
Ss!^**^ the place of worship, a mosque.
Of these nouns, the last five, and according to some gram- marians, the first six, may take indifferently Fathah, or Ka^rah for vowel of the second radical ; the seventh may also have
Ka^rah for the vowel of ^ , as yS^ • In nomis derived from
a similar verb, whose first radical is ^ , the second radical always has Kausrah for its vowel, and the j is preserved, even when
dropped in the indefinite, thus Ju:^^ time and place of promise,
from Jo:, to promise^ of which the indefinite is Jk*j , from «-Jj
OF NOUNS. 1S3
to place, the indefinite of which is j-^> , is formed j->^ place
or time of position, or place in general, from i^^ to go towards
a place, the indefinite of which is do^^; , is formed a;*-j^ the place towards which we direct our way.
In concave roots, if the first radical have for its vowel, in the indefinite tense, Fathah or Baramah, the noun of time and place is made by substituting an Alif quiescent for the second radical, and carrying to the first radical the Fathah which
belonged to the second ; thus from *U to stand erect, indefi-
nite j*yb is formed, ^lio , for *^i^ place where we stand up- right, or place where we stand, in general. If the first radical have Kasrah for its vowel in the indefinite, the second radical
undergoes no change; thus from jU?, indefinite Jwx> to arrive somewhere, is formed Ju^x< the place of arrival, from Ijld- , inde- finite kxsi to crawl, is formed k^s:* the place in which a ser- pent crawls. In defective roots whose third letter is . or j_^ , the noun of time and place is regularly formed by observing
the rules of permutation ; thus from W to save himself is formed lj-^T^ ^^ place of refuge, for ^js*^ ; from ^j to graize, comes L<t^ the place of pasture ; tjjU the place where we live,
c
is, however, sometimes written ^U . It often happens that these nouns of place take the final ^, as ^J^ place of burial, a cemetery ; diyix^ the place of sun-rising ; 'ij\Jt^ a deep place, a
cavern ; ^Du a place proper for a light-house, a tower ; i'U_«
184 OF NOUNS.
place of pasture. When the noun of place takes this final s , the second radical sometimes bears Dammah ; thus ijxL< a ceme- tery ; there are some nouns of time and place of the form JUi« ',
these nouns belong to roots whose first radical is j , thus SL^^
the time of hirth ; c^Uju! the time fixed for a thing.
The noun of time or place coming from quadriliteral roots, or derivative verbs, is formed from the indefinite tense of the paissive voice, by substituting a for the incremental letters of that tense, so that they differ nothing from the name of the
patient (the participle passive of Erpenius) ; thus from ^-ftlb
passive indefinite of ^Jul^ ^^ meet., is formed ^JIU the place
of meeting., the confluence of two rivers ; from uJ-oil to return,
i' ^
i^^j.^^ place or time of return., from i*p to pray, ti-A* a
place of prayer.
Nouns indicating the place in which any thing abounds,
are nearly allied to nouns of time and place ; they are of the
o
S — O- J'O' S A- S O-
forra ^jtk< or J*Lc , such are ixA^ and &xkm.< a place in which there are many lions^ derived from Ju-j\ and j-Ju^, which signify a lion. jULLo a field of cucumbers, derived from * Ujj a cncwmher ;
Isr^ a melonry, derived from IajsLj a
melon.
Name of Instrument or Vessel. These nouns are usually of one of these three forms,
JjtL« , JULe , A*SL<. They are distinguished from nouns of
OF NOUNS. 135
time and place by their first letter * bearing Kasrah, as c_Jl^ a milk-pail, from c_^L^ milk ; A1sl< a key, from .-sui to open ;
^|jx* a balance, from ^jj^ to weigh ; Ist^ a broom, from -sAau^ ^0 sweep ; ^ils^ «% instrument employed in cleaning cotton.
There are a few nouns of this class of the two forms Jju^
and ^Ui^ ; as J>sr^ a sieve, from J^r* to sift ; jjJco an in- strument with tchich flax or cotton is beaten, from /^O to beat ;
o -> -> o ^ S' ^ . ^
^tXo a vessel for holding perfumes ; S\sr^ a vessel containing collyrium, from Jsr • The form of this word distinguishes it
from ^^.^^ , which signifies the instrument with ichich that colly-
rium is applied ; these two last forms, however, are rather names of vessels than instruments of action. Besides the species of derivative nouns here mentioned, whose forms constantly indi- cate the ideas, added to those of the primitive, there are other forms not classified by the grammarians, but which may be reduced to a system, almost as regular as that of the forms we have just described.
Such is the form JtUi which usually indicates, as well as
the form Jjw a passive sense; and particularly the quantity contained in a place or vessel, resembling somewhat our words
a handful, a mouthful, a pinch, &c. X^JiS a mouthful; ^JjJi
a hcmdful ; djtb what suffices to prevent starvation ; hJi> a sip. In the following forms it merely shews a passive attribute,
136 OF NOUNS.
<s,XA>»~ a crowd or assembly collected together ; ^\a^ the total, that which is added up ; ,us^ a present, that which is given ; the form Axi which is much Hke the preceding, designates a frag- ment, or piece broken off, as itlajj a portion ; iU>t\»- a splinter ; i^jS- a rag.
The form JUi indicates diseases, as jU^ the liver complaint ; and the form ^Ui a piece remaining, or thrown away, as dj\soo the surplus of any thing sold hy measure ; ^IsP a bite.
Noun of Action.
This is an abstract noun, signifying the action or manner of being, expressed by the verb, without the least regard to
subject, object, or time ; it is named jiX^a^ the source ; not as being the root of the verb, from which on the contrary it is often evidently derived, but as being the origin of the signifi- cation of the verb, and containing the primitive idea, to which the different forms of the verb only add accessory ideas. It is thus that the primitive idea contained in the word love, pro- duces first the word, loving, which connects the idea of love with that of some being, and then all the forms of the verb to love.
Most of the Ai'abian grammarians consider the third person singular masculine of the preterite, as the root from which not only the whole verb, but also nouns of action, verbal adjectives, nouns of time and place, &c. are derived. The learned of the School of Kufah were of this opinion, while the School of Basrah held that the noun of action is the root,
OF NOUNS. 137
from which comes the verb itself, and all nouns and verbal adjectives.
Every noun indicating abstractedly the attribute contained in the signification of the verb, is not to be regarded however
as a noun of action ; thus Ac learning ; f 2o thirst ; are not the nouns of action of the verbs Ac to learn; |<^ to be thirsty;
their nouns of action are Ac and Uii . The Arabian gram-
S o
marians call these simply nouns t^ , in contradistinction to the
nown of action jS.^^ ; the difference between these is often almost imperceptible, and they are frequently used for each other.
The noun of action is chiefly distinguished by being put in the accusative case, or as it were adverbially, and joined to the verb itself; adding to it a species of energy, thus,
UjIC ^^y: ^\ ^ '' God spoke to Moses, speaking^'
In treating of the verb, it has been observed, that the noun of action, when put in the accusative case, supplies the place of the infinitive, which in all languages is really the verVs noun. These forms for the first conjugation, that being most in use, are very numerous, and are in all 35. The second, third, and fourth conjugations have a few variations ; the remaining nine have each but one form, which will be found in the tables of the verbs, where they appear in the accusative case as infinitives.
138
OF NOUNS.
Nouns of Act
1. jii
2. ^Ui
on of' the Primitive Triliteral Verb.
6.
Noun
0. ^
1. iLw
2. ^ 3.- lUi
4. aLo
5. llUi
7. Jui
8. jL'
19. |
J^ |
20. |
J*i |
21. |
^ |
22. |
ui«' |
23. |
u^^ |
24. |
^^ |
25. |
ui«' |
26. |
|
27. |
J^' |
28. J*j
29. J^^
30. a3^
31. i]j«
32. J^
33. al*i«
34. J*L
35. d\jtSL^
s of Action of Derivatives.
2nd Conj. JjouJ, aUaj, JUiJ:, JUi^, JUi, JUi. 3rd . ,tl.cli«, JUi, J^xJ-
4th JUil, JUi, llUi.
This multitude of* forms of nouns of action belonging to the primitive trihteral verb, need not however alarm the student,
OF NOUNS. 139
for very few verbs have more than one or two, and those are indicated in the dictionaries. In the nouns of action derived
from Jj«j, the form ijj^ is most used; in those derived from
JiU , the most common form is <ilcU^ . In the nouns of action
derived from Jxi^ the form JUil is almost always observed.
Nouns of Action formed from Surd Verbs.
In forming nouns of aetion from surd verbs, the same rules take place as in fixing the contraction of the second and third
radical ; thus from Jc< , the noun of action is <x< for J Jc< ; from
t-c , the noun of action is 'iJ6 for ijjtj •
Several nouns of action, where the two first radicals bear
Fathah^ suffer no contraction, as tiiX-j, ^— ^'^> Ji-c-? Sic.
In the noun of action of the third form of these verbs,
S<i ^ ^ S-- - ^
the contraction may or may not take place, i<jUw« or iJJjU,^.
Nouns of Actio?/ of Ham%ated Verbs.
The rules of permutation of Alif must be observed here, as in the verbs themselves; thus the third form of the verb
j\ has for noun of action ij^y or lJi\yo, the Alif-Hamzah
* S ^ 5-
being changed into ^ or j; the eighth form has jUwl, and so on.
Verbs having \ for second or third radical follow the same
si' -i- s' it.' -t-
rules, as J^^ noun of action of JL>; ha^ from /»i! ; and
140
OF NOUNS.
LcX^ from ^X^ , the third form of the same verb; *ljaSl from /* UJ t , eighth form of the same root.
i
Nouns of Action of Similar Verbs.
Similar verbs, whose first radical is j , lose this letter in the indefinite tense, and imperative in certain cases ; this irregularity takes place also in their nouns of action, which then have Kasrah or Fathah for vowel of the second radical, as in the indefinite.
ifiXc from JlCj Indef. A«j ,
«lj |
e^ |
fV. » |
5^ |
ujj |
uy.' |
iJJ
^^3
^Sj
In this form the final i is regarded as a compensation for the first radical suppressed, and the noun of action is considered
to be of the form Jjti ; many similar verbs, though irregular in the indefinite, have their nouns of action regularly of the
form Jju ; as jf-j, noun of action of ^j ; Indef. ^. ; several
have at the same time the regular and irregular form.
All the forms except Jju of nouns of action derived from similar verbs are regular;
—jjj from ^)j Indef. ,j^
uVj
Jo.,
J.^
'^^■'^
OF NOUNS. |
|||
s |
from |
uJjj Indef. |
H^. |
,^' ' |
- |
||
?L, |
L5^-? |
^5-^. |
141
Nouns of Action derived from Concave Verbs. The rules of permutation observed in the conjugation of these verbs must be followed here.
There is however a particular form occurring, of nouns of
action of concave verbs ; it is this, ^^Ui ; here tlie place of
the second radical is always filled by ^ ; thus from aI J , ^b ,
and c_ >li, for *jj, ^, and ^—^oJ:-, are formed aUj^J,
ii^juo , and ^^JO^ .
Nouns of action, of the fourth and tenth forms, have a peculiar
irregularity ; instead of writing regularly A\y\ and ^lyLJLjl , as JUi^ , JlxiLsl ; we write Lc\i\ for the noun of action of the fourth form ; and ^UJLj^ for that of the tenth.
Nouns of Action of Dejective Verbs.
Nouns of action coming from defective verbs, having . or (_^ for their last radical, have no irregularity when they are of one of the forms where the second radical bears Jazmah ;
S(j ' Jo" So' S'o
as j)>, ^j> ^> Jrv^ ^^•
Those of the forms Jxi , Jjw , Jju , change the third radical, if it be ^ , into ^ ; and this third radical is always quiescent ; as ^^j and ^ ; it is the same where the third
140 OF NOUNS.
k<i\< from ^s.^ , the third form of the same verb; *ljal^ from /♦ UJ i , eighth form of the same root.
Nouns of Action of Similar Verbs.
Similar verbs, whose first radical is j , lose this letter in the indefinite tense, and imperative in certain cases ; this irregularity takes place also in their nouns of action, which then have Kasrah or FatJiah for vowel of the second radical, as in the indefinite.
SS£. from jdTj Indef. Jut> ,
A£l> ^Jj fJO 5
In this form the final i is regarded as a compensation for the first radical suppressed, and the noun of action is considered
to be of the form Jjti ; many similar verbs, though irregular in the indefinite, have their nouns of action regularly of the
form Jjw ; as jf-_}, noun of action of ^j ; Indef. ^. ; several
have at the same time the regular and irregular form.
All the forms except Jjw of noims of action derived from similar verbs are regular;
— jlj from ^]^ Indef. .j^aL
OF NOUNS. |
|||
■^Jj |
from |
(_Jjj Indef. |
^j. |
^-- |
y ^ |
' |
|
*ttfj |
^i |
^s^. |
141
Nouns of Action derived from Concave Verbs, The rules of permutation observed in the conjugation of these verbs must be followed here.
There is however a particular form occurring, of nouns of
action of concave verbs ; it is this, ^ 4Ui ; here the place of
the second radical is always filled by ^ ; thus from aI J , ^^b ,
and <_>U , for * jj , jo , and t_^o^ , are formed ^^^, J ,
ijj^ , and "i^jJ^ .
Nouns of action, of the fourth and tenth forms, have a peculiar
irregularity ; instead of writing regularly At\^\ and ^\^XJ\ , as JUi^, JUaJLsI ; we write <Lcli1 for the noun of action of the
S — o
fourth form ; and iUUjL;\ for that of the tenth. - i.
Nouns of' Action of Defective Verbs.
Nouns of action coming from defective verbs, having . or 4_^ for their last radical, have no irregularity when they are of one of the forms where the second radical bears Jazmah ;
^ J!>» ^j' ;J^> Jrb^ ^^•
Those of the forms Jxi , Jjti , Jjtj , change the third radical, if it be ^ , into ,^ \ and this third radical is always quiescent ; as -.^ and ^ ; it is the same where the third
142 OF NOUNS.
radical is followed by i', as ilCt for i^Ll ; 'i^ or i^ for iJuff ; iUs^ or i'^As'- for ivo- . And in the form Jxi* , as ^_^4jU for ti>^ ? from j_5y .
In those of the forms J^ and JO^ an irregularity occurs ; if their last radical be j, the . quiescent of this form unites
by Tashdid with the j radical, as ^ for j^ ; if it be ^ , the J changes into ^.f, the Dammah into Kasrah, and the two ^i
unite by Tashdid, as ^j for c^yj ; thus from Lii for ^.^
is formed the noun of action yn*- , and from Lii for ,-.^1^ comes the noun of action ^^ .
Nouns of action of the form Jjxi unite the last radical by Tashdid with the quiescent ^, changing it into ^ if it be
J ; as t_^ for ^^^s from j_5yb .
The forms JUi , JUi, JUi, change the last radical into
HamzaJi, as ? ^ -^ , and ? IL for ^j^ , ^Ijo .
In nouns of action of derivative verbs from defective roots, there is no difference between those whose third radical is ^ or those in which it is <_j.
In the second form, the noun of action is of the form iLtaj" ,
as Ij-ajmj , from ^^.^^ . In the third form the noun of action is either dic\Le or JUi , as i'^jUu for <Lj\Ju, and i\dj for
OF NOUNS. 143
In the fourth, seventh, and all the following forms, the last radical is changed into Hamzah^ according to the rule of
permutation; (4. , and ^), thus tlkc\ is derived from , Jacl , f \^j\ from ^c^jS •
Nouns of Action of Verbs doubly imperfect.
It is here only necessary to observe, that triliteral verbs, having the second and third radical infirm letters, in nouns of action when the first bears Jazmah, unite them both by Tashdid^
as i^ for ij»jj, noun of action of ,_^ ; and if one of these
letters be j and the other ^ , the j is changed into ^ ; as s ^ , ^ ,
- ^ S- o^ ^^ -S- Si^s 'S.
^Ji» for ^^yt> from ^Jj-^ » and 4^! for ^^ from j^l . This is in conformity with one of the rules of permutation (3. . and ^).
In the same way ^ysr* is written for ^>^ of the form
S o " £■« - S- 1^- ^^—'
J*fc« ; or ^Lxs* of the form Axk^ , coming from the verb ^ U- , Indef. j-srl . This verb has a noun of action belonging to no
acknowledged form, fWU * -^
Noun of Unitij.
The Arabians have a particular form for an action occur-
ring but once; this verbal noun is called ^'-♦Jl wU or noun
of unity, and is regarded as a noun of action. It is derived from the noun of action of the simple triliteral verb, by sub- stituting Fathak for the nunnated vowel of the third radical,
144 OK NOUNS.
and adding i' , as 'ij^> from ^' . <Lcy IVoni j*lj , which signify the action of assisting aiid of standing up, once only.
Tlie noun of unity, of imperfect verbs, follows the same rule ;
thus from Ac, similar verb, is formed sS£j : from *lJ5 a concave
verb, comes Ley ', from ^j^ and ^j defective verbs, if^^Xc and
ix«.. This noun is formed in the same way, from the qua-
driliteral and derivative verbs ; thus from r-'W'i ^^^ action of
rolling ; -^^y^-^ t^^^ action of sending out ,• are formed L>^\^J
and ls>~\js>-\ , which signify the action of rolling, and of sending out, once only. If the noun of action should itself end in 'i, this kind of noun cannot be formed ; the word i<tX*-U is then
added after the noun of action, as Soo-lj Z<Xs\ the action of
establishing once. Here may be classed another species of nouns, of unity, or rather of individuality ; formed from primitive nouns indicating a whole species, or a collection of homogeneous parts.
By adding i at the end, nouns are formed which signify a
portion, or an individual ; thus from jJ straw., is formed
iJuJ a single straw, from i»^^>^ gold, comes Xx&J a grain of gold, from *Uj>. the genus pigeon; ioUs^ a single pigeon only.
Another kind of verbal noun, regarded also by the Arabians as a noun of action, and the form of which differs little from
that of the noun of unity, is by them named cjJJ\ t^\ noun
of species, or specificative noun ; because it serves to restrain
OK NOUNS. 145
a general expression to a particular idea, as when we say, this man excels in writing, the general idea to excels is determined and restrained by the word of action, writing. This noun, derived from the primitive triliteral verb, regular or irregular, is always
of the form Axi, and differs only from the noun of unity by the first vowel being Kasrah ; thus Luv^ signifies the action of writing once, and iu^ the action of writing considered abstract- edly, and rather as a fiiculty than as an immediate action ; thus l^ ^^yu*s^ ^ he excels in icriting. When this noun is formed
from quadriliteral or derivative verbs, it is of the same form as the noun of unity, and the context can alone distinguish them. The poets sometimes confound the two forms.
Possessive Nouns.
The possessive is the noun adjective, signifying possession, or relation of origin, quality, &c. It is named by the Arabian
grammarians c-Jj-aJuJ \ *«s^ J ^ nomi relative., or JuuuJ relation.
It is derived from the substantive by adding ^J" > as ^J.U-j
heatenly from i U-s heaven ; ^^^.^jL solar from ^j^^^ the sun ;
^jA< Egyptian from j,a^ ^QVP^ > e^ ^'♦^ « T^^an of the
family of Othman ; i_^Jv*-j a freed man of Sadd. When the
noun from which this relative adjective is formed ends in
i" or it , this termination is dropt ; thus from i^ Ale^ca comes 10
14(6 OF NOUNS.
I^ a native of Mecca ; from IxJJ^ nahire, is formed ,^_f-J^
natural.
When the third radical is suppressed in the primitive, but replaced by iJ, it is restored in the possessive noun, or relative
adjective ; as from A*) language or dialect, comes ^^ .
Diminutive Nouns,
The diminutive noun is named by the Arabians yLt« t^\ diminished noun, or j^jt*^ diminution. In triliterals it is of the form Jjs*i ; if the primitive is quadriliteral, the diminutive is of the form JJajti , as Jj^ « little man, from J*-^ a ma/n, ;
t-jyJb. a little scorpion, from (^ys. a scorpion.
Of Adjectives.
The Arabians do not consider the adjective as forming a different part of speech from the noun, and under the names of agent and patient, that class which Erpenius denominates participles has been already noticed ; another has just appeared under the name of possessive nouns, or relative adjectives derived from nouns.
There are other verbal adjectives derived from the primitive
triliteral verb of the forms Jxj , Jjti , Jjti , J-\« , Jjsi , Jj«i ,
fjyti , JUi , JUi , Jxi\ , Jixj and Jix} . This sort of verbal adjectives belongs in general to neuter verbs, as Jo^ witness-
OF NOUNS. 147
inp, a witness, or martyr, from Js^ to icitness ; »^j merciful,
from ms^j to have mercy ; j^j****- handsome, from ^u*s>- to be hand-
some; l-»-^ difficult, from L—sit-^ to be difficult; i^jjj compas-
sionate, from uJ\j to be compoLSsionate ; jJis. forgiving, from
jA£. to pardon ; i^S^ intoxicated ; jjljwai angry ; ^J^jC- naked ;
<:y«1 smooth or beardless ; y^^sJ^ fed ; <— 'Is? wonderful. Most of these forms are only used to express an habitual and con- stant quaUty ; others convey the idea of intensity and energy.
Of Genders.
Genders are of two kinds, masculine and feminine. Femi- nine nouns are known by their signification or termination.
Those of which the gender is determined by the significa- tion, are :
1 . The names of women, as ^yo Mary ,• jJufc Hinda ; and
those whose signification carries with it the idea of a woman, s j' - i
as (jwjyi a bride ; m\ a mother.
2. The names of provinces or towns, as j.a< Egypt; aCc
Mecca; |»liJ\ Syria.
3. The names of parts of the body which are twofold ;
as Si the hand ; J^ the foot ; u-aJ^ the shoulder. Nouns or
adjectives feminine, the gender of which is fixed by their ter- mination, are
1 . Those terminated by s , as ^ 1>. friendship ; <lU>- a
garden; ij^jf^ little (fem.).
10—2
148 OF NOUNS.
2. Those ending in \ not radical, as "'^I't^ pridq ; ""Aj^ a field.
3. Those having for final letter <j> servile, or AUf short,
quiescent after Fathah ; as ^S^^ remembrance ; ^j\ the first (fem.) ; bo J for ^g^ii the world.
o S t^S. So ' Si-
To these are to be added ,jOj\ the earth; -♦cj- wine ; yj
s ^ s s c- S l^ ^
a well; j\j fire; ^j the wind; ^jjwA) the soul; ^jj*AJi> the swn;
and others, which must be learned by use ; on the contrary, a few words having the feminine termination 'i , are of the mas- culine gender, as <Uji> a Khalif ; it is the same with those verbal adjectives, which ending in i , become a species of inten- sitives, as aUiU very learned; Ksf^ habituated to laugh; h^j relating from memory. Substantives and adjectives not com- prised under these heads are masculine ; as yis the moon ;
^,::^jo a house.
The names of the letters of the alphabet are of both genders ; but more usually made feminine.
The manner of forming the Feminine Gender.
Adjectives, and some substantives applicable to both sexes, pass from the masculine to the feminine. This they generally do by dropping the nunnated vowel and adopting s at the end
of the masculine, as *jdic great ; Iaj^ great, (fem.) ; J^ a
grandfather; s<^»- a grandmother; ^Jyj a young man; irUs a young woman (for <UAi).
OF NOUNS. 149
Verbal adjectives of the form J*i \ , when not of the com- parative or superlative degree, take in the feminine form ^iUs ; as JlJ\ yellow ; fem. * \Ju3 ■
Verbal adjectives of the same form, but of the comparative or superlative degree, take in the feminine the form 1« ; as j:^\ greater; ^jj^ greater, (fem.); J^^ first, which is for
J:sj^, or Jj J » and ji-\ another, which is for ^U ; make in the feminine agreeably to this rule S^\ and t^fA •
The word Jo-1 one, makes in the feminine ^^SsA . Verbal
adjectives of the form Ixi become in the feminine ^Ixi , as
(jlx^ , feminine jjJuii ; ^jU^ , feminine i_^^ - These very ad- jectives sometimes take their feminine in the common form, as
Those of the form Ixi having Dammah for vowel of the first radical, make their feminine by adding *--, as ^^V.r^ naked,
S C.J
fem. ^\j^jS--
Verbal adjectives of the forms Jyi and Jjoti , which are
often of both genders, sometimes however take final s - to make
the feminine. The form J^ when of the passive signification,
always admits the variation of gender ; as J^-^ a messenger, or
one sent, fem. Siy^j ■ When neuter or active, as <__>.j»^ a liar ;
jif-^ a grateful person ; ^y^ one of violent temper ; they are of both genders if the substantive to which thpy relate is ex-
150 <>F NOl^NS.
pressed ; if it be not, they then admit the difference of genders. The form J-^« when of active or neuter signification, as j^
assistincf ; i^Jjss- abstinent, is subject to the variation of gender ; when of passive signification, as l^jo^ beloved; Jjojj a person
slain, the gender is distinguished only when the noun to which they relate is not expressed.
Verbal adjectives of the forms ^Ui , Z\xi , Z^ , ^Ui , iLtic, JUiuj:, Jjcti^, are of both genders; ,j^^>-*>^ makes
however fem. <Luilu^ •
The Arabians have no neuter gender, whence adjectives used as neuter substantives, are expressed by the feminine gender,
as I— i;**j" is=>-^* one thing is wanting to you.
Of Numbers.
There are tliree numbers in the nouns, as in the verbs, the singular, the dual, and the plural.
The dual is formed from the singular, by adding ^^ , and
substituting c:^ for the 'i final ; thus c->U^ a hook ; ^UU^ two
books ; IJu Jw« a city ; jjUJu Jc* two cities.
When the last letter is j or ^, and in the singular, a short Alif represented either by 1 or ,_^ has been substituted for them ; in order to make the dual the original form is re-
stored ; as ^ a young man, for ^ , dual ^jUIi ; ^^j for
f)F N()liNS 151
(C^j rememhrance : dual (jV^*^ • ^-^^^ ^'"^ .?*^^ "^ staff; dual
In words of three letters, the radical, whether j or ^^ , re- turns in the dual ; but if the word have more than three letters,
the . is changed into ^ ; thus ^j* passive verbal adjective of the root ya, , makes in the dual ^\jJ>j^ , and not ^j\y^j^ •
When the singular ends in Hamzah, preceded by servile Alif, forming the feminine, the Hamzah becomes j in the dual;
as > \Ju> feminine of jSu>\ yellow ; dual ^J^}^J^ •
If the Hamzah^ preceded by Alif, is in the place of j or ^_$ radical, in forming the dual it may be preserved or changed
into ^ ; thus i\^j for ij\i^j a mantle; dual ^^-'L^, or ^^^^j)
if the Hamzah be radical, it must be preserved, f \ y a reader, from \^ to read ; dual ^^^y •
There are two sorts of plurals, the one uniform and regular, called by the Arabians JL: j-^*^ or perfect plural, because it
preserves all the letters and vowels of the singular. The other, which adopts a great number of different forms, is called
jmL-c f—*-*- hroJcen plural.
The regular plural is formed for the masculine by adding ^ ^ s
^.", and for the feminine by changing i?" into (Jl:)\^ . When
the feminine does not in the singular end in i"-, the final vowel
of the singular is dropt for the termination, thus JjL- a robber,
plu. ^yil-; robbers. £j iL.- a female thief phi. LZ^\ij[^ .
152 OF NOUNS.
If the singular masculine end in ^^ quiescent after Kasrak, or Fatkah ; in the plural a contraction occurs, according to
the rules of permutation, thus ^\i for ^^lij a judge, plu. ^^^
for ^j^JwjlJi ; ^_5-J^ Moses, plu. ^y-'y fo^" ij^y<' ■ ,^_^&liua^
Mustafa, plu. ^^^aL^a-c for ^j^aU.^^ •
Feminine nouns of the forms Jxi or JQjtij, coming from a regular root, experience a change in the plural, the Jazmah of the second radical in the singular, being in the plural changed
into Fathah. J^J name of a woman, plu. cuWj ; A*^ a
saucer, plu. cjU^ .
If the singular be of the form Jxi or Zm , the second radical takes, in the plural, Dammah or Fathah, or may pre- serve the Jazmah ; Ia^ darkness, plu. CjUll? , ci.?UJij or Cl^Uiir .
If the singular be of the form Jju or J[Ui ;, the second radical in the plural takes Kasrah or Fathah, or preserves its Jazmah. ^Jwj the lotus ; <JLi\jS^ , CLi\jX^ or JLi\jS^ .
The broken plural is that which is formed irregularly, and
not by the addition of ^^ and s^ul". Of these there may be reckoned twenty-eight forms. It must be observed, how- ever, that the application of these singular and plural forms to each other, has many exceptions, and is not to be taken strictlv-
C-OJv.
OF NOUNS. 153
First form, Jj« ,
Is formed from the singulars il« and ^jju fem. ; as 'ik^ , i presents^ ^jji^ plu. ^ veri/ great ; and very rarely from the forms <)lw , ^Qjti ; as aji , plu. ,c^ villages ; hA , plu.
^i mustaches, for ,c^ and ^si .
Second form, Jas. This form belongs, first to nouns of the form JUi and
JUa , whose root is neither surd nor defective ; and to those of the forms Jj^, ^^t*^* J^> ^^^ coming from a defective
root; as 4— ?U^, plu. c—J^^ hooks ; j ^ plu. j— j, thrones; J^*kc
plu. Jk^».£ columns; <iuuA-j plu. ^i-o s^*jt>s,' Xaj^ plu. t_jLsf leaves of a book. Second to a few nouns of the forms Jj«i, Jjo,
^Ui ; as j^ plu. -4J leopards; J^\ plu. Ju-I ^iows; ify*u plu.
jjjjj glass beads. Third to verbal adjectives of the forms Jj^,
Ay6 , not having a passive signification ; as j jj plu. . jj preachers.
Third form, jj«. This belongs to masculine adjectives of the form Jjtil and to their feminines "''^, as jAj>-\ red, and ^^\j,*^ red, (fem.) red (mas, and fem.)
15+ OF NOUNS.
Fourth form, Jj«i. This comes from the singular, a!Ui as ^^ plu. (_^X-» coins,
s - s -
l)Uj plu. j_Jo churches.
Fifth form, Jl« .
The fifth form appertains first to singulars of the forms Jjo , Jjw , J*i J S'S - jJi a dart without a point ; plu. J\^3 ;
^j a spear, plu. ^tej5 Jf^ « »»«>*, plu. Jl>-j-
2. To the forms Jje and <d« ; as c--^j«^ ^^^ A^^?, plu. c->U^, Ims a saucer, plu. q LaJI ; <-->j3 a «^s#, plu. <-_jLvj, ( . being changed into ^ after Kasrah) ^.^Jiki a desert, plu.
3. To the forms Jxi , Zm , not having a surd or defective root, (that is, the third radical like the second, or the third
radical . or ,_^), as Jjc.- a mountain, plu. JUf-, l^j the neck., plu. C->\j^( .
4. To the adjectives Jjoti and ^bxj , as 4— i»^ and isUjL , %o5^^, plu. <_j1-i ; but not when these are taken in a passive
sense, as in <JjJo a person killed.
5. To adjectives of the forms Iaj and ijlxi ; as ^U<AJ and ^LeJj penitent, plu. aW- •
OF NOUNS. 155
6. To adjectives of the forms Xo and ij'ixi , as ^Ui»^ and AiLi*.*- famishing^ plu. ^U^ .
Sixth form, J^ •
This belongs to substantives of the forms Jxj , Jaj , Jju , Jjti and Jju ; and sometimes to adjectives of the form
Jxli , as jS^. the sea, plu. j^ , Jos- a« army, plu. Jy^^ ,
Jwsl a ^iow, plu. ,iyJ\ , JJbll a witness, Jj^ .
Seventh and eighth forms, J*j and JUi . These belong to adjectives of the forms J^x^li and al^li ,
with this only difference, that the form JUi is exclusively ap- propriated to the masculine, thus (._^'\^ a writer, plu. t_->U^ ;
*^U- a judge, plu. jS^^ and aI^ ; jU. a combatant, for ijjU ,
plu. f^ii for jUc ; <— ^.^ owe ^^0 is absent, plu. ^--ouj, ^b a female camel, J^ .
Ninth form, Axi .
This appertams to verbal adjectives of the form Jx^li, when applied to rational beings, and not coming from a defective root, as J^li perfect, plu. ^ui^; ^\jj standing erect, plu. ho^ ;
j\i innocent, plu. 'ijy ■
154
OF »UNS.
il
i
Fourth i m, Jxi .
This comes from the singi r, alxi as i!$Lj plu. ^_^lC> coiw*, Jujo plu. »_J0 churches.
Fifth f. a, jUi .
The fifth form appertain first to singulars of the forms Jj« , Jjo , Jjw 5 as -Ji a r^ without a point ; plu. J ji ;
-s^^j a spmr, plu. ^Uj, Jf-^ t w«w, plu. Jl>-j.
2. To the forms Jxs a 1 JSjw ; ae t_^ <A<? Ae«?, plu. c->U^, K-.^n*' a saucer, plu. La5 ; c-y a «^«^, plu. c->Uj, ( . being changed into ^ a -r Kasrah) ^Lki a desert, plu.
uJbJ •
3. To the forms Jxs , ii , not having a surd or defective root, (that is, the third rad il like the second, or the third
radical j or ^), as Jj^ a n mtain, plu. JUs^, lijj the neck^ plu. t_jlj^ .
4. To the adjectives Jjk5 and ilx« , as »-ij^ and ijj^ , Tiohle, plu. uJI -i ; but not len these are taken in a passive
sense, as in JjJe a person k «d.
5. To adjectives of the brms ^ijti and 1^1/6 , as ^,U»Jki and AiLeJj penitent, plu. j*1x
^*^.
X «
i
I
I
OF NOl'NS
155
6. To adjectives of the form? . o and Z;lu , as j^,Li«»i. and Z;Li«^ /amukiuff, plu. ^*w«^
Sixth form.
S w- 5k.-*
This belongs to subetantives oi the forms Jxi , J*i ,
5 -- 5 -
J« , Jjo and Jjo '. and sometim* ^ .i.li« rtiv.s ..f the form
So 5 --
Jicli , aji ^ M*^ y>=/7. plu. .»sr' x- a« army, plu. Jw »X-»^ a /i</w. pin. J»-j^ , Jk>*Ji a iri/n/* -•f-'
Seventh and eighth fonw- jo and J'jo .
5 S- -
Theee belong to adjective* < rns J^U and iltli ,
uith this only difference, that thf fern J'ju is exclui»ively ap-
S i^
propriated to the mascidine. thu- tcriter, plu. <_j'Jk^ ;
5- S-i ^ S -i . S "
S^o^ a jndge. plu. ^S-a- and /•'<^ i^/rn^ for ^jU ,
plu. f ^ Li for jUi ; *— oU <m$ who Ui>'>*t7</, plu. a female camel, J^ .
a>l
ft * ft
« « ft; ft ^ I
^■^
*% €'^ ^^^
]56 OF NOUNS.
Tenth form, ilw . This belongs almost exclusively to verbal adjectives of the form JjiU coming from a defective root, and applied to rational
beings ; as *,\j an archer^ plu. *"U, for iLu, , jU a combatant^
plu. 'i\^ for ^.ji _, ^Ijj a Kadhi, plu. iJlaJj for iyJi . *■
Eleventh form, ^Ui . This belongs to substantives of the form Jj«i , and to a few of the forms Jj« and Jjo , as <-_>J a hear^ plu. LuJ ; j^ a pitcher^ plu. 'ij^ ; 77 ?j <* spouse, plu. i>jj , Jyj «% ajog, plu. ir J^ .
Twelfth form, ^ •
This belongs to substantives of the forms Jj«i , Jjti , J*j , Jl*i, JUa and Jj^, as jJ a bull, plu. ^^ ; ^1 for ^\ a
brother, plu. ^^^ ; ^^ «j branch, plu. XJuai ; JUi «% aw^e-
lope, plu. ^j£ ; *iU a slave, plu. ai^+lc ; ^^x^ for ^JOus «% infant.,
plu. ajjw? .
Thirteenth form, Jjtil . This belongs to substantives of the form J.*i , and some- times Jjei, Jj«i and J*i . not coming from a concave root,
OF NOUNS. 157
as A>-j the face, plu. ^^\ ; ^J a bucket, plu. Jc>^ for ^jl ;
Lie a s^a^ plu. ij£i£\ for t^cl ; Jj>-^ ^A^^ /t't^^, plu. J>f-;^ •
It also appertains to feminine substantives of four letters, not ending in s , and of which the penultima is a quiescent letter,
as c|^J the arm, plu. cjjl ; ^^y^t^, ^'^ oath, plu. ^^\ . It
also belongs, by custom, to several forms different from those indicated, and even to singulars coming from concave roots,
as wiuj a lion, plu. ■%-s^\ \ X^ the day, plu. j^\ \ ^-xc the eye,
plu. J^s.\ ; j^J a house, plu. j^d\ .
S -i^i-
Fourteenth form, JUil .
This belongs to substantives of three letters, and of all forms, though but rarely to the forms Jjti and J-xi ; as .ko rain, plu. jllx<l ; tj^j^ « disease, plu. ^j^ \ u-cJ^ the shoulder^
plu. <_JU^1 ; Jj^ a camel, plu. J\j \ ', ^Ja:. the eye, plu. ^Uc\ ;
*^< ^A^ c?ay, plu. *Ij1 ; «--^ a d^te, plu. <--?ll?jl .
Fifteenth form, iiUil .
This belongs to nouns of four letters, the penultima of which is ^ , J or t quiescent, as SH a necklace, plu. i^'jJi^ ; dll
God (which is an abbreviation of ^^) plu. ^ \ ; ^y^ a column, plu. 'is^^ . This plural form belongs particularly to
:a Zjl ;
]5fi
OF NOUNS.
Tenth form, alw . This belongs almost exclusively to verbal adjectives of the form Jils coming from a defective root, and applied to rational
beings; as a\j an archer, plu. 'i\^j for ij^j , 'Xs- a comlatant,
plu. s\\s. for it'jS. , (^l5 a Kadhi, plu. isUiJj for S"4.Jj .
Eleventh form, Axi . This belongs to substantives of the form Jxi , and to a few of the forms Jj«i and Jxi , as c->J a 5^ar, plu. iuJ ; j^ a pitcher^ plu. ^jj^ ; 77- ?J <* spouse^ plu. X=>-^j , Jyi an ape^ plu. i^J^ .
Twelfth form, ^ .
s 1^ - s ly ^ s —
This belongs to substantives of the forms Jjti , Jjti , Jjti , JUi, JUi and J-vjw, as jjj a 6m?^, plu. ^^ ; il for ^^ a
brother^ plu. ^"^1 ; ^ai a branchy plu. iuu^ ; Jhc aw aw^g- ^ -
lope^ plu. a]^ ; Ai n slave, plu. <L«ic ; ^-Jws for jJOui' an infant,
plu. <UJU9 .
Thirteenth form, Jjiil . This belongs to substantives of the form Jjti , and some- times Jjti, Jjt* and Jjti . not coming from a concave root,
157
as
OF NOUNS.
ls^% the face, plu. l=^j\ \ ^J a bucket, plu. Jj^ for ^J\ ;
LiC « S^O^ plu. f^^\ for j-£ic\ ; Jj>-^ <^(^ /00#, plu. jjf-;^ •
It also appertains to feminine substantives of four letters, not ending in 'i , and of which the penultiraa is a quiescent letter,
as t^jj the arm, plu. cjjt ; ^^r^„ c-n oath, plu. ^j^\ . It
also belongs, by custom, to several forms different from those indicated, and even to singulars coming from concave roots,
s ^ ^ s -jCi s ^-^ s-t-^s- So-'
as «-ju> a lion, plu. %-^\ \ j\^ the day, plu. j^\ \ ^jJs. the eye, plu. ,^r>^^ I j^ti ct house, plu. jtJ\ ■
I
Fourteenth form, JUil .
This belongs to substantives of three letters, and of all forms, though but rarely to the forms Jjti and Jxs ; as Ja^ rain, plu. jlk<;l ; ^j< a disease, plu. t^^j^\ ', »-_iJ^ the shoulder,
plu. 4_JlJ^^ ; Jj^ a caniel, plu. JM ; ^^^ the eye, plu. fj^\ ;
*^< #A^ rfay, plu. aU ; ^~^j d date, plu. t—'li?;^ •
Fifteenth form, ^Uil .
This belongs to nouns of four letters, the penultima of
which is ;_j , J or \ quiescent, as jIIlj a necklace, plu. i'jJii ; i^\
(toc? (which is an abbreviation of i^\) plu. 1^ \ ; J^.^^: a
column, plu. *Jc4^^ . This plural form belongs particularly to
"k-^^-V
1 '"? c
;i 4 -^f
158 OF NOINS
the singular form;* J\xs and ^\^\xj , coming from a surd or
defective root : as c:jUj an artide of furniture, plu. 2^} ; jX<\
S <.■>■ J. S- s- i. '■^—^ 5^- Oi
an Imam. plu. i.*^^ for .;u^^^ ; ? Iw a tunic or ^AjW. plu. ^ujj^ •
Sixteenth form, J^^ J . The sixteenth form belongs to substantives of the forms J.i'j and J'jtj , and to substantives and adjectives feminine of
the forms Zs.'^ and % l^'j , and, though rarely, to verbal ad- jectives masculine of the form ^^U , thus ^Ji^\a a frying pan,
plu. (jAy: : ili'-; d^<it?i. plu. ^Lt^*.* ; ;j*^li a cavalier., plu.
Seventeenth form. Jj *aj .
This belongrs to substantives singular feminine, of four let- ters, of which the tliird i^ ^ j ^* ? or ' ser%-ile or quiescent, after a vowel of the same kind ; and to feminine substantives
of the same forms, but adding > at the end ; as h^^ a cloudy
i^^^''ssr ; j^^sr an old teaman, plu. y^ I <^^^ ^ vxtnder,
plu. . -'W^- •
Eighteenth form. ,.i^ • This belongs to substantives singular of the forms JUi, J'*j . ^jii . and to some nouns of the forms Jxi . Jj6 and jj^z'i, coming from concave roots, as *lc. a young man, a slave.,
-c S
OF NOUNS. 159
plu. jjUlc ; Jhc aw antelope, plu. ^^ ; ci^^ a fish, plu.
^^Uo*^ ; -Xi a crown, plu. ^Isr^' ; J\ a brother, plu. ^^^ ■
Some nouns, whose singulars belong to other forms, admit this plural also.
Nineteenth form, Ixj . This belongs to substantives of the forms Jxj , Jjti , J't'^ j
not being of concave roots ; as ujia-j a roof, plu. ,^Ua-j ; jJj a region, a province, plu. (j^jJj ; t— 2J^ a ca^^, (^l^i; .
Twentieth form, i ilw . This form is applied to adjectives masculine, of the form Jjk« , not having a passive sense ; and to some of the form
Jx.U not coming from a concave, or defective root, but applied
to a rational being, jsaj a poor man, plu. * 1 -ai ; -x<\ a prince, y^ — ^f s s.^ Si-' ^~-S.- s ^
plu. i \j<\ ; {j^j for {j^]j ^ chief, plu. i \^^j ; -cLi» a poet, plu. :{ l^^xi . The word ^ijA*- Khalif, also makes the plural
Twenty-first form, ^ 1«^ .
This belongs also to singulars of the form Jjotj, but is almost peculiar to those whose root is concave or defective, as
c--^A>*- a friend, one beloved, plu. * \xs^\ ; Jui a riV^ man,
plu. 1 bait ; c^'.J'-^ veracious, plu. i la ju»l .
160 OF NOUNS.
Twenty-second fomi, Iw .
This is made from adjectives of the form Jjoti , and some- times also J-tU and Jjw , signifying pain, or destruction ; as ^ j>- wounded, plu. ^^j^ i J^ slain, plu. ^JJii ; (.^U
'Ox-
perishing, plu. J3ji> .
Twenty-third form, iJUi •
-(
This belongs to substantives singular, of the forms ^ Ixi ,
Jjw , (Jjw j and feminine adjectives of the forms * %ej and
-• t, >« >*. — o ' •^^ — '' ' ^ -' ^c^
1*5 ; as -i \j^ , plu. cf;^ J ^ ^jj^ « «iV^m, ^lic ; j^^ ^A^ cfecr^ 0/ a judge, plu. tj^^Ui — 1,^)^ ^ pregnant woman,
Twenty-fourth form, ^Ui .
This belongs, first to the same substantives and adjectives as the preceding ; as i \jj^ a virgin, plu. i^jVss- .
2nd. To adjectives of the form Xo , as ^J^S^ intoxicated, plu. i_sj^ ■
3rd. To feminines of the form ^Qj^ coming from a de- fective root, as <L< J0& a gift, plu. Ij!jj& .
Ol' NOL'NS. 161
Twenty-fifth form, tj^ • This, which is very rare, belongs to singulars of the forms Jxi, JUi and J^U , as jOLt a slave, plu. Joac ; jU*- an ass,
plu. jJ^y*^ ', t— ^ a dog, plu. t-^jJi^ 5 jU a conqueror, plu. ^jj£. ; jIc a courier, plu. ^cJj: .
Twenty-sixth form, a]^ . This, which is also of rare occurrence, belongs to singulars
of the form Jxi, as kjo- a thread, plu. JQajjo- ; *£ a paternal uncle, plu. iU».4j: ; ^^ a wild ass, plu. ^jJ>£ •
Twenty-seventh form, <i]Ui. This belongs to singulars of the forms Jjti and JxU , as jS^ a stone, plu. 'ij\^', >.-^»-\*a a companion, plu. i)\^ .
Twenty-eighth form, Jxi .
A few singulars of the forms ^i*i , ^\xi , JxU , have their
plurals of the form Jxj , as sjj a pulley, plu. io ; aaLs- a Ww^, plu. ^jis.. ; t^m? a person who seeks, plu. t_^ .
It may have been observed, that the same singular assumes various forms of plurals ; some have at the same time a plural
regular, and one or several irregular plurals ; thus from ^j*ij 11
162 OF NOUNS.
the soul, arc formed the plurals (j^yo and ^jmAi] ', from JU a
ioy, plu. A^ and jjUix ; from ^js£. ^7i<? eye, \J^^ > cJ>^ '
from jy^ a icall, j\^\ . ^j^^ \ from Jjlc a slave, jUt , iJ>^ ,
j^Ijjlc ; and also from jS^. the sea, j\si , ^si , js:^.\ ; from ojiLi
a witness, JJbl^ , ^^jj^li , <^^^ • It must not be supposed, however, that a singular admits indifferently all the plurals of which its form is susceptible ; thus ^jjJo does not admit (jm\ju ,
a^wAJ , Juij , (jUuij ; nor does Jat adopt the plurals Outc^ ,
^Joc , 5 Joe , &c. Sometimes one only is formed, as from J^^
a man, the only plural is JU^j and ^^ an affair, a command,
5 j>
makes only jy^ . This must be learnt by the use of the dic- tionary.
When a singular, having several meanings, admits several plurals, it will be often found that certain plurals are pecu- liarly, or exclusively attached to certain significations ; for ex-
ample, ^jo:- signifies the eye, a fountain, the substance, or essence
of a thing, and a person of rank. In the plural it has ^jJ^ »
^j^\ and ^Ij^I .
The two first of these answer to the two first meanings, and the third only to the two last.
The regular plurals, and those of the twelfth, thirteenth,
fourteenth, and fifteenth forms, are called ^ f J**^ plurals of small number, in contradistinction to the other forms, which
OF NOUNS. 16S
are called ir J^ t^^ plurals of great number. This obser- vation applies, however, only to nouns having several forms of plural : when the plural of one of these four forms is its only one, it is employed indiscriminately like those of the other forms. All simple quadriliteral nouns, and most of those aug- mented, together with their feminines, take a broken, or irre- gular plural ; assuming Alif quiescent after the second letter, which, as well as the first, bears Faihah., as the third letter
has Kasrdh. Thus they are of the form ^Uj , as cji^J a frog.,
plu. cjIaJ, Jci-Jc* a vestibule., Jj^Ij^; final i is dropt, as Ai^e a dunghill., plu. Jj|u • If the last radical be preceded by either
S o
of the letters t^, j , ^ quiescent, it remains, as Jj Joe a lamp.,
plu. Jj^Uji ; if it be \ or j , the preceding Kasrah changes it
into ^ ; as jo^i=i-^ * sultan., plu. ^^J^'^^ ■ Sometimes, however, it is omitted, i being put at the end as a compensation, thus
t^ji*S:^\ the devil, jj-jJ^^ and ^M ; t-JlL^^ a shoemaker.^
t_a>^L! and IsQ^ . Final I is sometimes found in the plural
of quadriliteral nouns not having quiescent letters before the last radical in the singular; this is particularly applicable to foreign words, and possessive nouns, or relative adjectives of
four letters, as c-.afi.,.-1 a hishop, plu. t-wL-l or ^L\ ; ^t^ljuo
a native of Baghdad., plu. ifJjUj ; 7*^ ^'^ emperor., (Caesar)
plu. 3j^\Ss \ e^j»- (I Circassian., plu . 'i>jj^\j>- .
11—2
164 OF NOUNS.
Adjectives of the form Jmj^ being comparatives, or super- latives, take in the plural the form of quadriUterals ; but this is
only when they are employed as substantives, as JiyA hlack^ plu.
JjL;^ serpents Jiating a black skin ; j^\ most areat, plu. j\^1 the
great men of a kingdom.
The forms of quadriliteral plurals serve also to make those plurals which are called ^^^^ \ ^-^^■»- , or plurals of plurals, and which are derived from other plurals ; thus from il? a finger nail, is formed the plural j\s^\ , and from that, the plural of plural -tiUil ; from Jo for ^Jo the hand, comes sA for j_^Jol ; and
afterward i^jbj ; from .^k-j a bracelet, ijyJ^, and from that «Ls| .
Words of five or more letters, not including l , or ^^ , j , \ , quiescent, take the same form ; these words then lose one of their letters of the singular number. This is sometimes the
penultima, but usually the last, as J^i-: a pomgranate, plu. _.jU-) ; C-J^jXIc a spider, plu. c^^lJ*^ > or (J-'jj^ ^ spider,
plu. ij)j\}>- . and JjU^ . If, however, the penultima is j or
^ , forming a diphthong after Fathah, both remain ; but j is changed into ^ by the influence of the preceding Kasrah ; as
U^j^ a crocodile, plu. ^^^^^1/- Augmented words drop the ser- vile letters ; -,js>~\< the place in which a thing rolls, plu. ^jU..j ,
If, beside the servile /• , there is also a ^^ , or the letters ^j:„^>^ , the ft is presei'ved in the plural, while the other servile letters
OF NOUNS. 166
disappear; as ^Ux« plu. ^_^lk< loosed; -^^js:^**^ a leader^ plu. ^jlsT* , There are some nouns whose plurals are very irre- gular, or even borrowed from another root, thus fJj)o a road,
plu, culiJs ; a1 cl mother, plu. Ll^l^<^ ; *i a mouth, plu. }i\^\ \ f U> tvater, plu. !i\yo\ or ^Ixo ; in these two last words, it is
the singular which is irregular, for *i is for ?ji , and t U for ifLc . The singular 'i\j<\ a woman, has no plural, the place of
which is supplied by tL*j , 'iy^j or j^lj*uj ; the word j^Lul
s "t s ^
a m^n, has in the plural (juwl3l , and by contraction {jn\j ■
166
OF NOUNS.
Table shewing to ivhat forms of the singular those of the jilural usually belong.
Form of Plural. I Singular.
Plural.
1 |
J*i |
Lie (« w^^7i?: />at7, |
c^ |
2 |
jii |
<»j^U^ a book. |
|
j-i |
jA^\ red, |
||
4 |
j^ |
'ijuS a fragTmnt, |
> |
5 |
jUi |
Jj.-^ a man. |
J^^, |
6 |
jP |
jj: seed, |
J3?. |
7 |
jl^ |
^U I a judge. |
^ |
8 |
^ |
" ( |
^^ |
9 |
lUi |
s J.«\^ perfect. |
lU |
10 |
^Ui |
^\s a Kadhi, |
'ii\Ja |
11 |
^ |
jyj an ape. |
'idjS |
12 |
5 o ^ ^^ « branch. |
S' O |
|
13 |
6^^ the face. |
||
14 |
S 1^ ^ Ja^ rain. |
s - i.i |
|
15 |
5^ o:£ ^1 |
ftVtS an Imam, |
^1 for Ia^\ |
OF |
NOUNS. |
167 |
||
Form of Plural. |
Singular |
Plural. |
||
ji |
« necklace, |
|||
16 |
c>jy |
&f |
a frying pan, |
JJ^^> |
17 |
jXi |
JU^ |
the left hand. |
JjUi |
18 |
S ^1^ |
r^' |
a boy. |
^UU |
19 |
J^ |
iT O ^ |
a roof. |
S y (^ ^ |
a country. |
||||
A^ |
5 ^ |
/^^-\. |
||
20 |
^^h6 |
^y^ |
noble. |
^U/, |
jcli |
a poet. |
> Vr*-i |
||
21 |
- a |
L- -OJc*. |
a friend. |
> Us-t for * Uj^^ |
22 |
J^ |
5 ^ |
wounded. |
|
23 |
Jl«' |
a desert. |
^j(^ |
|
24 |
J^' |
-. xo^ u'/- |
intoxicated. |
^JL^ |
The twenty-fifth, twenty-sixth, twenty-seventh and twenty- eighth forms are of rare occurrence.
168 OF NOUNS.
The details into which I have here entered, and the accom- panying table, may be of some use, but no rules or tables can greatly assist the memory ; those forms, however, which most often occur, will soon become familiar, and a dictionary will afford every necessary assistance with regard to the more un- common.
Of Declension.
The Arabic nouns are classed under two heads with respect to declension : Triptots, which have three variations of case in the singular, or plural ; and Diptots, which have only two, the dual being uniformly of this last class.
The first class of Diptots are the duals forming the nomi- native in ^- ■, and the oblique case in ^/.
The second regular masculine plurals, whose nominative is in ^y , genitive, &c. in ^;.
The third regular feminine plurals, having the nominative in o^", genitive in cjW.
The fourth invariable nouns, whose last radical never admits the nunnation, having the nominative in - , and other cases in ^ .
These invariable nouns are :
1. Positive and comparative adjectives, of the same form
as jAs-\ red., :i \jA£>- fem., except a few having their feminine
S S -oi S — oX
in i, as J^\ toidowed, mas. i\^j\ fem.
OF NOUNS. 169
2. Adjectives ending in ^J\^ servile, whose first radical has Fathah, and which do not form their feminines by adding s , as j^ljuii enraged; fern. j^J^-iii •
3. Substantives and adjectives singular, ending in Alif short,
or ^ quiescent after Fathah, as ,^Jt*o tery little ; ^J^_ good tidings; or in Hamzah, preceded by Alif bearing Maddah^ as
^ \ji^ a virgin ; i Ulaj white. If the ^ or the Hamzah are
radical, as in ^_fJJl> direction, f\(^j a cloak, these words are Triptots.
4. All irregular plurals containing four syllables, of which the two first have Fathah for their vowels, and the third has
Kasrah ; as i.^ l^sf iconders ; ^jw^l^Xo colleges ; ,^x>j\su> keys ;
^Jc*.|^ mills; i—jj\s\ relations.
5. Some names of countries, cities, villages, castles, moun- tains, rivers, and other places.
6. Most proper names, and among others all those end- ing in ^j^ ' , together with foreign names consisting of more than three letters ; also all feminine names terminating in 'i , and such as consist of four letters. The three letter female names, a few excepted, are occasionally either Triptots, or Diptots, which is sometimes the case, among the poets, with regard to other invariable nouns, whilst the variable or Triptots, are like- wise sometimes converted into Diptots.
The declension is exceedingly simple, there being in writing, where vowel points are not used, no real difference of case, excepting in the addition of \ servile to the accusative, ^V'^here
170
OF NOUNS.
vowel points are used, the nominative singular and plural are distinguished by £.; the genitive dative and ablative by ~\ and the accusative by £. ; the dual always ending in Kasrah. The 'i , terminating a word, changes into ci^j when being preserved,
it ceases to be the last letter, as ^ jc* a town, dual ^jUJu Jc« . It disappears in the regular plural, as Sj^\j a woman who assists, plu. CLi\j'£>\j .
1. Declension being Triptots singular and plural.
Singular. I Dual.
A house.
Nom. c:,,.oj ...ULw
Gen.
-JO
Accus. Uuj
U'
ur^^
Plural.
^^
\j
'^
2. Being Triptots in the singular, and Diptots in the plural.
An assistant,
Singular.
Nom. Gen.
^\
j.\
Accus. \j^\j
An assistant.
Singular.
(fem.) Nom. Gen.
Sj>a^j
ij^K
Accus. iLtfU
Dual,
Jj^^
Dual.
Plural. Plural.
OF NOUNS.
171
3. Being Triptots in the singular, and invariable Diptots in the plural.
A mosque,
Singular. |
Dual. |
Plural. |
s o - |
^ |
^ -^ - |
Nom. vX-e**^ |
J^— |
kX>-Wi |
o ^ |
c o -^ |
^, |
Gen. Jcs***^ |
c;d'Jf^ |
|
Accus. ^Jc!^* |
4. Being invariable Diptots in the singular, and Triptots in the plural.
Bed,
Singular. |
Dual. |
|
->- ^s |
^^ i^S |
|
Nom. |
^' |
Jj^\ |
'-a |
O^^ Ci |
|
Gen. and Accus. |
^\ |
cr'vT^^ |
Plural.
5. Being invariable Diptots singular and plural.
SmalUr,
Singular.
Nora.
Gen. and Accus.
Dual.
Plural.
When the last letter of a noun is j preceded by Fathah, or else \, or ^j, also preceded by Fathah, and called short Alif,
y\j-t;p'-c u- sl\ , the three cases are alike ; if it be <_j preceded
by Kasrah, the nominative and the genitive alone are alike ; in this case the ^ not bearing either Dammah or Kasrah.
172 . OF NOUNS.
Thus in the three cases ^a^ a staffs is written for j-oc , yas- , \yas. and s^j <^ mill, for ^js^j , ^-s^ , Us^j which are of the first class, or Triptots. ^\i a Kadhi, in the nominative and genitive for ^-aljj and ,<-»^ 5 of the same class, ^^J^, good
neics, for ^5/^ iri the nominative, and tj^ in the genitive and accusative of the second class, or Diptots. u_f;lsr** deserts,
for t^.lsr* in the nominative, and ,^j^^^ in the genitive and accusative, irregular quadriliteral plural of the second class.
Six w'ords have a variation of case peculiar to themselves when in construction either with a noun, or an affixed pos-
st si s^
sessive pronoun ; viz. t_->l a father ; ;l\ a brother ; ^ a father
in law ; _& a thing ; *i for i^ the mouth, when governing a
genitive, and .J having, possessed of endowed with ; which are declined as follows :
Nom. *^.' J J\ the father of Zeid.
Gen. li^J ^} of the father of Zeid.
Accus. S-ij \A the father of Zeid.
Nom. j*s. o or *i the mouth of Omar. Gen. y^ ^ or *i of the mouth of Omar.
Accus. jAS. li or Ui the mouth of Omar.
OF NOUNS. 173
' c ' «*
Nom. <Uv>-^ J J endoved with compassion.
' O '
Gen. iU^ 4_^J of compassionate.
' C " '
A ecus, ^A»-. L> compassionate.
Nom. 5j*-^ A/s brother.
Gen, <u*-l 0/ A^s brother.
-• - 1 Accus. aU^l A/d^ brother.
Nom. (_^^i^»»- <Ay father in late.
Gen. i.-^jk,'*'*- 0/* ^% father in law.
Accus. ( S\a>s^ thy father in law.
Nom. ;_ioJ2> ^/^y ^Aiw^. (Res aliqua, pec. non magna.)
Gen. uJjJu!) of thy thing.
Accus. uJUfe thy thing.
When these words are prefixed to the pronoun of the first
t person, there is no change of case, as ^\ my father., of my
father., &c. When ^ is followed by an affixed pronoun, it
varies only in the vowel points, as i_C*i your mouth., t_^Ui of
ycmr mouth., u-X*J your mouth.
The accusative is substituted for the nominative, when cer- ts «5 tain particles go before, as ^ indeed, certainly ; ^ because.,
174 OF NOUNS.
therefore; ^ as if; ^ but; c:^ would to God! Jc cand
^-' ^ ^- <-^- <i, -i ^
J*J perhaps ; as *yb iU^ ^^1 indeed the vnan stands ; ^
^^kXJj (_iX»Jl but the King is powerful. No other word must intervene, however, except a preposition with its case, as
iU*-^ jIjJI ^ ^ certainly the man is in the home.
- *
^ is 7iot, when immediately preceding any appellative, and denying its very existence, gives it also the accusative ter- mination, as <uj t_^ J "i there is no doubt in it. In this case
the accusative loses the nunnation, but the noun must not be definite, either as a noun proper, or as an appellative limited
by the article Jl , or by a word which it governs.
The vocative is expressed by the accusative with l> pre-
- o 5 fixed, as IL^l l» Oh sister!
^or God is against you, 0 ye unjust ! prepare ye, therefore, weeds for wretchedness, and be ye the companions of sorrow !
Except however a proper name, an appellative with an article, or when the object addressed is in sight ; where the nominative without the nunnation, when that would otherwise
-. -' J - ^ t y-
occur, is employed, as ^UJLc \ 0 Othman ! j^\ l* 0 Prince I
The nominative thus employed, is naturally pronounced with rapi- dity. Hence it is, that the mmnation is always dropped, and that
the affixed pronoun 4,5- is sometimes cut off, as *ji b 0 my people ! t_^ 0 my Lord ! Some words, chiefly proper names
OF NOUNS. 175
in frequent use, throw off a whole syllable at the end, as -U \j
for (jJes-U I' 0 imj friend'. ,^j£^ I; 0 Mansur I ^-c b O
Marvan ! for jyaj^ , &c.
On the other hand, when placed at the end of a sentence, and pronounced more strongly, the vowel is prolonged, and
receives a kind of aspirate, as Ix^ b for ^iU 0 my hoy I
Sometimes this appears as final ah, as nVAc. U or UiU for As..
When the name invoked, however, bears the article J \ ,
the pronoun 1 JJi , or one of these words, 1 j^^j \ , Lj \ , Ljo \ ,
always comes between the name and the particle b , as L^ \ b (juwUl \ 0 men !
In calling for help, J is often prefixed in the genitive, as ^;jJ \ jXA b help, 0 Saldh-addin !
The dual and the perfect masculine plurals in ^, drop that letter, when followed by a noun in the genitive case, or by
the afiixed pronouns ; as ;— i-jj ^Iji the two fawns of Joseph ;
A^iii his two feet ; aJij his sons.
The nunnation is not only affected in the same manner as ^j, when under these circumstances, but likewise before and
J " O -O " 0.^3 -»
after the article, as i^J^U.) \ the King, c-^1^1 \ j^ J the Kinfs house.
176 OF NOUNS.
Of Com'parison.
The comparative is formed from the positive, which is itself formed only from primitive triliteral verbs ; by prefixing
AU/y and is of the form Jjwl , as ^jji^ little ; jtJ\ less ; i.
beloved; c_^>s^1 for c-^jo-I most beloved. It in general takes _<i after it, as i_$3^\ ^ Jicl greater than the King.
The positive with _« is used sometimes to express the com- parative, as in the following couplet :
^s long as morning and evening succeed, the present day is better than the past.
^ however, and other particles, often follow the compa-
rative instead of ^, as (^jsr\ ^J j^\ more glorious in war.
In the feminine of the comparative, ^ quiescent after Fathah,
is added in place of \ prefixed, as _jo^ great ; j^\ greater, (masc.)
^jj^ greater, (fem.) Without ^, but followed by a genitive,
it forms the superlative, as ^jwUl \ -<■.■■ j-1 the best of men.
It has likewise a superlative sense, when placed absolutely,
as Ac! <d!! G^o(^ is ww5# «?ise.
Verbal adjectives of the passive voice, and those which
designate colours, or deformities, as jjjl i?we ,• J^l 6/ac^ ,•
OF NOUNS. 177
,^\ crooked ; ^^^ blind ; jy.\ squinting ; and which are them- selves of the form Jj«il do not generate comparatives.
These comparatives being formed only from certain adjec- tives ; when it is necessary to give the accessory ideas of com- parison and superiority, one of the following comparatives ;
Juil stronger ; ^^y*^ handsomer; ,^\ more ugly ; ji^ letter;
jii»\ worse^ &c. is used; with the infinitive or abstract noun of
the quahty in question, as SjA^ juil stronger in redness; that
is, redder; LojIj j U.:>J-«J m/*^*"^ Jitter to instruct and to teach.
12
THE ARTICLE.
The Arabians have only one article, which they call AijX^ \
notification, because it renders the noun to which it is prefixed definite, which would otherwise be general, or indetermined ; as in the following distich,:
-•c ' -o
TIi£ world like a water-wheel rolls round, wherein pleasure with pain revolves.
Now the youth soars above the heavens, and now behold him low under the stones!
Here 4— j^jJ a water-wheel, being indefinite, is without an article.
When a definite substantive agrees with an adjective, the
article is prefixed likewise to the adjective ; as *J»la)tJ \ t_->U$3 ) the excellent hooTc. When the noun is indefinite, the adjective becomes so too, as 4_^-tac t__?U^ an old hook.
Proper names do not admit of the article, but it always
accompanies the epithet, if any follows, as ^jJ^^ 1 (*:^^\H^ Abraham the faithful. The article is likewise omitted when a possessive pronoun is affixed to the noun, as will be explained hereafter.
THE AKTICI.K. 179
J in the article is sometimes dropt ; its place being sup- plied by Tashdid^ when the word to which it is prefixed begins
also with J ; as JjJ \ for Jjs.^J \ . It frequently remains, how- ever, and Tashdid also ; as
. JST ^ ^ ^^T ^^,
He plunges into the sea %cho seeks for pearls ;
And he who desires greatness, must have icatchful nights.
The J is always omitted in the masculine singular of the
■it -is-
relative pronoun, ^^'^ \ ; the fem. sing. JkI \ ; and the plural mas-
culine ^v jJ^ ; being so written instead of ^^o^\ , &c. but never in the other cases, which seldom occur.
When the particle J is prefixed to a noun beginning with
J , and which being definite, ought to have the article, in order to avoid the meeting of three lams, the article is dis-
pensed with, or represented by Tashdid, as JjdJ for JjJJJ,
•Si '■^
or <dJ for <dSJ , but when prefixed to nouns not beginning with J, Alif alone is dropt; as
-C-^3 ^ .
Bid say to the rejoicers in our distress, wait yet a little. Before you are misfortunes, and great ones.
12—2
180
THE ARTICLE.
The article changes the substantives singular, and irregular plurals, which are diptots, into triptots, as
Nom. |
Gen. |
Accus. |
|
J^C-io,^! |
^^t^s- |
'■-■•^i.'^S. |
|
tyj \ Mack, |
J^l |
>J**mJ 1 |
|
■^~^ o^o^ |
>*— ^ O^G S- |
'•^^ co^t |
|
iljjoJ^ white. |
» ULjoJ 1 |
^ l-4>jJ ^ |
|
Of |
Numerals. |
Numbers are either cardinal or ordinal. The cardinal num- bers from 1 to 10 are of the two genders, thus
Fern.
J^"^
;i)j
^Uj
Ti Ml'
Mas.
H 3 LoUj 8
HjUiS.
10
Fern.
^JCM^)
t^JkS-1
Mas.
4>i-!i
Jl»"l
1
^J
■So"
^ A.o
'i)Uj\ 4
(Uuu4.>-
XjLj 6
<UJu^
From three to ten, the termination 'i , the usual sign of the feminine gender, here marks the masculine. All these numbers,
except (jUj^ and j^UJu^ , are Triptots ; these two have only one inflexion, ^^^JaJ\ and ^jJJul for the genitive and accusative,
- " > T" *
like all the duals.
From three to ten, the cardinal numbers are employed either as adjectives or substantives ; in the first case, they are
THE ARTICLE.
181
placed after the name of the thing numbered, with which they agree in gender, and case ; if employed as substantives, they take for their complement the thing numbered, and then lose
their nunnation, as JU-; ^^ three men. When ,^Uj eight,
loses its nunnation, it recovers the ^^ . which had disappeared
according to the rule (fi, ^), for ^Uj is for ^Uj; we then
■a-
write (JUj in the nominative and genitive, and jUj in the
accusative.
From eleven to nineteen, the cardinal numbers are com- posed of units, and of the number ten, which in the masculine
is jJiX. , and in the feminine Ijl^ or 'iJLs..
Feminine. — o - ' o
'ijLs. UJjl
iiJLs.
Jjt^
- O - - O -
Masculine.
jiLs- Jo-1 11
- - o
jLs. Ui! 12
-uui ^ il 1 4
jjcuf tUu.'tA 15
jIlc tU-j l6
^^-ia: JutA-j 17
y^r. ^Uj is
182 THK AHTICLi:.
All these numbers, from eleven to nineteen, are indecli- nable, except jLs. Ui^ and iyl^ UJu\ , which in the genitive
and accusative make jLs. _\3^ and 'iJ^ 15^^ •
' *# o '
^^^^ 70
^^Ui! 80
UJ/^ 20 ^^^ oO
u^j^ 4.0
The numbers from twenty to ninety, are the same for both genders ; they are always employed as nouns, and are followed by the name of the thing numbered in the accusative; not however losing the ^ final, as the regular plurals do when they govern a word. This rule, however, is not always strictly observed. These numbers are Diptots ending in the genitive
and accusative in ^^ .
In the numbers composed of tens and of units, from twenty to ninety-nine, the conjunction j is inserted between the two numbers ; the smallest number is put first, and both are de-
clined, as \^^f^ * ^^>^ \ genitive ^v A^ j J^^^l ; accusative
THE ARTICLE. The numbers of the hundreds are for both genders
X»U c:, > 6"oo LLo 100
183
hVi «_juj 700
LU ^Uj 800
iJ^o jJUj
<LU j_«j' 900 I The numbers of thousands are
;_i^ \ '^ 3000
J^J \ lxij\ 4000
^^IwU 200
Lte C-Jilo 300
ajte j_Jj^ 400 ilLo ^j*-4ci- 500
5 Oi
t_2]l 1000
,IaJ 1 2000
and so on, up to ten thousand, Ull yL£ Uul 12,000
Ull yLi J«^^ 11,000
and so on, up to ninety-nme thousand.
i-JJ\ X)_Ualj 300,000 &c.
^\ JuU 100,000
uJll UoU 200,000
In numbers where units and tens are used, the units are always put first ; but if hundreds and thousands are employed, the thousands may be placed first, then the hundreds, and then the units and tens ; or first the units, then the tens, and then the hundreds and thousands.
184
THE ARTICLE.
The Ordinal Number.
Feni. |
Mas. |
Fem. |
Mas. |
||
<L>:l)U: |
f)th |
-o1 |
J>1 |
1st |
|
^L: |
i.^ |
7th |
J ^ |
2nd |
|
s^ ^ &l<\i |
°J' |
.sth |
Su |
JjlS |
3rd |
^u |
9th |
ho\j |
i> |
4th |
|
^u |
lOth |
<UjUr<;V>- |
CA*^^ |
oth |
The twentieth, and all above, are expressed by the car- dinal numbers ; the intermediate ones are formed nearly in the same manner as the cardinals ; as
Fem.
-" o ' ^ ^
jj«yu»£ 4 cljjlri-
Mas.
jIlc tJ^jU- 11th
jJHs. ^\j 12th
jLs. i-iJU 13th
^jJ)-Ua£ J ^JU- 21st
(J^T^ J ifiA^'j
UV^ J '^^'J
And thus with the others ; but when they take the article, the first number is declined, and the second not ; thus in the
nominative -iIlc c_iJU]^, genitive JLs. (.i^Ull ; and thus with the others, as well in the masculine as feminine.
THE ARTICLE. 185
The cardinal numbers are often used in the place of the ordinals, and it is common to say indifferently Ujj^ or htJ\^ \
the fourth hour, day, iceek, &c. ; d^^ an hour, &c. being under- stood, according to the sense.
The Arabians denote fractional numbers from one third to one. tenth, by particular numeratives ; they are nouns of the
first class, Triptots ; as cj^jj , d-Jj , ui--->l» one third ; (__^Juo
and ^jyjiX-j one sixth ; ^^ and -4J an eighth. After one tenth,
periphrasis is employed, as f >- ^!.A^ ^ ^l/f"^ ^^ three parts of twenty parts, that is, three twentieths.
Distributive numbers, or those expressing the parts of a whole, divided into equal portions, are denoted in Arabic by
repeating the cardinal number twice successively, as Jo-1. Jo-U one by one ; ^^Uu \ ^Juo\ two by two ; in the feminine irjo-lj iJjks-lj. ^JXio\ ^UJut , or by using, from one to ten, parti-
- i-
cular numeratives of the fomis JUi, or Jjti^ , and which are
employed either alone or double, as jU-^ jWI , or jWj u^U-j ,
or Jc»-v< S=>-yc one by one ; or ^ Uo ■* Uu , or j<joU ^«ju^
tioo hy two; cbj cbj or ^^^ t^>-^ /oMr by four; these numeratives are Diptots.
Numeratives denoting a periodical return, are of the fonn
Jj«i . They are put in the accusative with or without an article, as Li-Jj31 or UIj emry three days, months, &c.
18,6 THE ARTICLE.
From the cardinal numbers are formed relative adjectives from one to ten ; these present no difficulty. It must be
remarked, however, that from ^^\Jo\ two, a dual of which the
singular, if it could have one, would be ^\ for yo ; the rela- tive adjective is formed by recurring to the form of the sin- gular ^^jul and ^yj , like ^^*^\
From eleven to nineteen, the numeratives composed of two indeclinable words, form their relative adjectives from the first word only, wholly suppressing the second ; whence it follows, that these adjectives exactly resemble those derived from nume- ratives from one to nine ; thus i.jjJu is the relative adjective
of ^jUu^ two^ and of jLs. ^^ju^ twelve, ^y****^ is that of <Lu^
y^ y " ' L, "
jite, and of _u^ "k^j^ fifteen.
From i)lo one hundred, is formed the relative adjective
s ,' s ^ s
,_^jjw« or -x^ ; and from uJl! a thousand, ^ \ . Another sort
of relative adjectives, derived from numeratives from one to ten, answers nearly to our addition of the monosyllable fold ;
these are of the form ^JUsj thus j^Vj /o«^ fold; i^-sU^ fi,V6 fold, he.
OF THE PRONOUN.
The personal, demonstrative, and relative pronoun, have the same variation of gender and number, as nouns, but have no difference of case ; the duals of the demonstratives and relatives excepted, which follow the modes of other duals.
The personal pronouns are as follows :
Plural. |
|
They |
You |
- |
o-.oi |
f |
r' |
We
^
^
Dual.
These two
1^4.
You two
He
She
Singular.
Thou I
Mas.
Ul Com.
Feni.
The third persons of this pronoun are frequently used in
place of the substantive verb ^ in every tense.
The demonstrative pronoun, implying an object near at hand,
is expressed by 1 J this (hie.) and is declined as follows :
Plural. |
|
-- ,' |
^-j |
Sjl |
or >. \ |
Fem. |
The same |
Dual. |
||
o-- |
O |
1 • |
^..^ |
4^ |
|
o^ |
f. |
' |
¥' |
re |
J^ |
Singular.
^J
^^J
>J <0
iJ
Mas.
Fem.
The remote demonstrative, that (ille) is formed from the preceding by adding i_J .
188
OF THE PRONOUN.
Plural.
Dual.
Singular. 4_ilj Mas.
s Fern. The same. t^<lJu6' | ^-Jljlj" i i_ilj' Fem.
J is often inserted before t >, as ;_j3^j, i^!*.), *^^<^>
v^lj or t_iX' , &c. U is frequently prefixed to 1 J and uJ^-^ j
the 1^ being generally dropt, and represented in pointed books by ^- , or a perpendicular Fathah' which is also the case
where !j precedes any word beginning with J or \ quiescent, in the following manner :
Plural.
Dual.
I^JJb % ^dJb
Singular.
liji Masc.
Fem. The same.
I ^
^aj&
i^ULfc si^ Fem.
The relative ^_jjj \ u^ho^ whicK that-, is compounded of S and ^JJ ; one J being omitted in the singular, and in the masculine plural. It is declined as follows:
Plural. Dual. Singular.
IM
n
=: U'
,UU
,_^jj 1 Mas. . ^ 1 Fem.
This relative does not admit of any of the servile letters
being prefixed, excepting ^ , J , (_J , uJ ; the oblique cases
are seldom used, and it is construed with the afiixed pronouns
■it annexed to the subsequent word, as ^ ^jj^ ^ ^'* ivhich. for
OF THE PRONOUN. 189
<_^jJU . i <U^ ti'JJ ■ from icMch, for t_^JJ 1 ^^ . <Oylj ^^1 1
-. o/ - ii:s o --
w^o^w / saw, for c:^J t i^JJ U ij^ ^^ ^^<'' ^^^^^ *''^^' whoever,
and Ic ^/ia^ which^ those which, whatever, are also relatives in- cluding the antecedent. The first is only applied to rational beings, the second to irrational beings, animate or inanimate,
as in the proverb ^ jJii *J^ \ k_^ JJ ^ i^j^ ^ e/* ^'^ '^^^ commits the sheep to the care of the wolf does wrong.
- i s-iiS-
The word ^\ for the masculine, and h\ for the feminine, who, which, what, of what hind, is generally used interroga-
tively, governing the substantive in the genitive, as c_jU^ ^_s\
what hook ^ It is often joined with ^ and U , as ^^ \ who- soever ; \aj\ whatever, whatsoever, and sometimes plurally *^ \ mas, ^} fem. which of themf dual U^. ^ *^ is sometimes
■is-
employed in the same sense as \j'^ \ ; this word is indeclinable, and used for both genders and all numbers ; d^^b is however
sometimes used for the feminine in the singular, and oljJ in the plural without any distinction of cases.
This is a peculiarity of the dialect of the tribe of Tai, as
Verily, the water is the water of my father, and of my grandfather ; and it is my well, which / dug, and which / ■walled round.
190
or i'llE rKONOlN
The article Jl is also regarded as a relative by many of the Arabian grammarians, and is often indeed employed as one; this use of the article is particularly obser\able when it is placed before a verb, a jireposition, or a nominal proposition, that is to say, commencing by a noun acting as the subject.
whose decision aught to be accepted.
<u^ 1 ^Js. I^Li J|^> 'i _c t/ie man icho does not cease to testify his gratitude to those who are with hini. The rela- tive pronoun ^_s a! \ is never interrogative.
^\ fem. <L \ ; being employed alone and interrogatively,
iX --is.
receives all the numbers and cases ; dual ^_ \ , fem. ^Uj \ , plu.
^Ki \ , fem. d^L) 1 . The singular, as well as the plural, are declined as Triptots.
^ employed interrogatively, also receives the genders, num- bers, and ciuses ; but nothing must then be added after this word.
Masculine. |
Singular. |
Dual. |
Plural. |
||||||
Nom. |
1,1^ |
uA* |
|||||||
Gen. |
. - 1 |
c — |
O |
||||||
Acciis. |
< 1 |
^ |
c;^ |
||||||
Fem. |
' c |
-< J ^ |
c — |
Nom |
^Ul< |
cL'Uu |
|||
for |
all |
case |
S. |
Gen. |
& Acc. |
^ji^ |
for |
all cases. |
OK THE PKONOUN. 11)1
The use of these words thus declined, is, when any one has
said, for example, \i>~j *-i-^|i "' / have seem a man," ho who is
addressed replies It \ or ljt< icho or irhat r.< that man ? or when
t - -- <= -. o - ^ it is said i\j^\j ^ZJ,^ I passed by a woman, he is asked
ij\ or £^ tcho is that icoman?
5
From the relative ^^ is formed ^ , answering precisely
to the Latin cujus, cuja. cujuiii.
The following, which are called tli«:^ affixed pronoims, are always annexed to a verb, a nr.un. or a preposition. When affixed to verbs or prepositions, they have a personal, and some- times a relative sense ; when joined ttj nouns, they are pos- sessive, or relative ; when added to verbs they are generally in the accusative, though often in the dative, particularly when another accusative comes immediatelv after, thev are as follow :
Plural.
r* (^
c^
Dual.
lo>
U^
Singular.
^
u ^
Mas.
Com. Fem.
The words which take affixed pronouns undergo changes which may be reduced to the following rules.
1st. The nunnation of Triptot nouns disappears, and the
vowel alone remains, as c-jUo a hook; <ijUi his book.
2nd. The afiixed pronoun of the first person displaces the
vowel itself, as ^<J^ ^ny hook; there is then no difference in
the three cases.
192 <)K THE PRONOUN.
.Srd. Nouns ending in i , change it into ijlj , as L*jtj a benefit ; <OUx} his benefit.
4th. The final ^ of the duals, and the final ^ of mas- culine plurals ending in ^^ disappear, as nom. ^\j^ , gen. ^jolj^ two hooks, with the affixed pronouns ^blj^ and *^U^ your two books ; nom. ^yj , and gen. and accus. ^^jJu sons ; with the affixed pros. <— 5jAj and lS^. thy sons.
5th. Nouns ending in Hamzah, change it into j if its vowel be Dammah, and into ^ if it be Kasrah, as f LJ women ; s^ Lj his women ,• ij Uua] ^o his women.
fith. In the third person mas. plu. of verbs, the quiescent Alif after ^ disappears, as Ij-^a) ^Agy assisted; ^^r^ they
assisted ms ; \yoj they threw ,• *&v«i M^y #Arg!r against them.
7th. After the verbal termination *j , they add a Dammah
over the *, and a ^ quiescent, as Jy. ^j ;/o?t saw?; t^y^\j you saw tJieni.
8th. In those persons of the indefinite, which end in ^^ , as \^yijLi , the final ^ is sometimes dropt before the affixed
pronouns ^J and U , as ^^jj^ ^ for ^Jojj^ ^ you order me.
9th. The ^^ quiescent after Fathah., may in nouns as well as verbs, be preserved or changed into Alif., as ^j he threw ;
OF THE PRONOUN. 193
iU) or ij^j he threw against him ; ^li a hoy ; sUi and
<uJo his boy.
10th. In particles terminated by (^ quiescent after Fathah^ the ^^ takes Jazmah, on account of the affixed pronouns, as
^Ic upon; UjIc upon us; ^\ towards; uJ^^ towards thee.
The affixed pronoun of the first person ^^ in place of Kasrah preceding it, takes Fathah above it, when annexed to any word ending in ^ , ^, \, without vowels ; if the letter preceding is t_f quiescent, or jazmated, it is joined by Tashdid with that of the affixed pronoun ; if it is j quiescent after Dammah., the J changes into ^ , and also joins the affixed pronoun by Tashdid^
the Dammah being changed into Kasrah^ as IfUa^ sins ; ^bllx>-
my sins ; (jUilc two slaves ; ^U.^ my two slaves ; ^^Jv/*iU of
two slaves ; j-^li of my two slaves ; ^Is- on me ; ^ in me ; Lai a staff; ^.^Lic my staff; f^\i Kadhi ; ^\s my Kadhi ; ^xtiuj^ of Muslims ; j^-^iu^ of my Muslims ; ^^/♦Lu^ in the nom. makes in the same manner with the affixed pronoun ^^*Ljj^. The ^ affixed, pronoun of the first person, is sometimes sup- pressed ; as t__^ for ^j, my master ; ^^^ \ for ^J>^ ^ /^«^ '^e ;
this often happens when the noun is employed in a vocative sense ; and ahnost always, when the word to which the affixed pronoun is joined ends in Hamzah, which by the influence of
the affixed pronoun becomes i_f ; as 4_^ \j^\ my friends ; i^\j\
my fathers ; for ^ lx»-U ^nd ^«J V ' from '^[x»~\ and i\i\, 13
194 OF THE PRONOUN.
The affixed pronouns of the third person 'i , Ua , *A , ^ , change their Dammah into Kasrah when they are immedi- ately preceded by Kasrah, or by ^J quiescent after Kasrah, or
^' t-f jazmated, after Fathah, as ^^Uo- , Ujb,Ucv- , ^, <LUi->^ «uic, j*^(:A^, &C.
J in place of ^i, is used when joined to verbs, and also to particles ending in ^ ; such as ^^ , ^ , ^, ^, and also to ^ and (jl^. The affixed pronoun here always represents an accusative case. The words ^ and ^ when taking the affixed pronoun of the first person singular, are written ^\
mS. ■Si <iS.
and (J ^ 5 or ^^\ and ^^ U It is the same with the first
person plural 'Ji and l3^, or Uul and Us 1 . It is the same
with (jl^ . i3 makes ^J^ or IJ^ .
Some other words, regarded as adverbs, also take the affixed
"Si ' "Si "' " '
pronoun ; such are Jx and Jjel may he ; e^o^) would to God that !
Two affixes may be annexed to one word, when that of the first person is always placed before the second, and the second
before the third ; as <u3lkc \ he gave it to me ; mjSjjSj it will
suffice you against them. The same thing takes place with nouns
of action, as ^Uas^ my love for him.
These examples however are not common, and when a verb governs two pronouns, the separate pronoun of which we are about to speak is usually employed.
OF THE PRONOUN. 195
It often occurs, that the pronoun being required in the accusative, the affixes should be employed ; but in such cases a separate pronoun is used, either on account of the meeting of several pronouns in the accusative, or on account of the ellipsis of the word which should serve as antecedent, and to which in consequence the affix ought to be annexed. In this
case a separate pronoun is made of the word bl , which has
~ ■51 no sense in itself, and of the affixed pronoun ; as ^\A me ;
\j\j\ us; (_51jJ tliee, (mas.); <_Jl»1 thee, (fem.) ; U^U you two;
S\>\ you, (mas.); ^\>\ you, (fem.); i\i\ him; W\j\ her; UjsU t "^ "> "* "* \
O ^ "Ci ^ ^ ^
them (tivo) ; ^JbU them, (mas.) ; ^W them, (fem.).
This form of pronoun is also used when the pronoun per- sonal is put before the verb which governs it, with the view
of giving a gi'eater emphasis; as ^jotluJ uJbl j Jo*} i^\A
thee we adore, and thee we call to our help.
Reflective pronouns, such as myself, thyself, &c. are expressed
by the words ,^jJii or c:jU , as i<*uiJ my soul ; ^,S-mJO thy
soul; SmJij\ your souls; or ^\j my being. These are some-
times joined, as tuij i1 jj i. e. by himself.
13—2
0tm
0» f'AKTI
m
tW ■—Dty; tW} xK IbOofving bCtan : K th» m an mtcrrofUnrr pai «i^ IM ; ili^ ^ •' thin is nMd in osUw
oUing lh«' futur- • ■ ' '
MTftftn/jr ; and t<> th<m> may br joined f ai ««vor »n^ vrn* m^Ulom un*'*! . the finrt nino arr» r«
t4K>hnic«l wonln ^Xi , ^^p-JL- ' .
Mon lli.in oiii of t !>«•»*«' p.irticK* may \** rrrfi
thus Uh' int. n<';;.it i\ • in;i\ U- |i>ll<<u.-.i i> — •
«^>njunotivr |»aiiirl»>!« »_.• ami % may likt'Hi»»* U- foil
££^i£^iI^Sfi9B9HU^ .
ay Py\HTr(ij;s.
197
indicatinpf'he future, or by t\u: prepoKitioriK ( >, CJ , J, ^,
Ih, aH haH bofjn observed, in an int^rro^ativ*- particle,
.1- 'tx III- dwi '' It JH ol'ton join*'*! to ^' , uiid i^ tlicn
i ... .,x- - i*^
\Mi' ^ , aH u-i-iy c:^ ^ t_^lAj \ art tlum irutet'd Joxcjih'^'
Whu a second propOHition follows, preceded by the w;parate
- i
iiii ; V ve particle a1, they both become disjunctives, si^ni-
(viruf ir Ihcr — r>r, thus *yj JJ ; ^ (*irA^ \^y^ ^*/^ i^.'^ ^ u'
r ^ a\ a« <o /Ao«<9 whfj have digbelierefl, it is the tar/ie with
f/tem, itither you ad/mfmish them^ or do vM adnumvih tliem.
■ ■ 'i
in a [(article of invf>cation, as k_i«f«j^ O Jmcph' it I I >metim(!« written thus \.
always bears Kanrah^ and si^ifies
In ; as A^C**^ \j m t/ie mosque.
With ; especially when prefixed to a noun of instru-
Aij i^^K^ J vnrote with a pen ; or when Hubjoine<l
< of Cf/ming and yoirig^ which then ;i«Hunir; thr- Kignificar
hringing an<l f/iviwj, or takiwj away^ as t-jUil b ^ \
ii'/dh they hook^ i. «;. /wJ hrowjht tin- hook , jJJ b c--»AJ array loith thi li/jht^ i.e. /«« /oo^ r«?r«7/ /f/;^ /t^/*<.
I
OF PARTICLES.
Particles are divided into inseparable, and separate ; the first being always prefixed, and the second class, though not joined, always preceding the word which they govern. They occur in every line, and are of much consequence in acquiring a proper knowledge of the language, the inseparable adverbs, prepositions, and conjunctions especially ; these, together with the servile letters, perplexing the learner in various ways, but more particularly by exhausting his patience in turning over, to no purpose, the leaves of a Dictionary for vocables, which he can never find till he has learned to analyse and separate those letters or particles from the words to which they are prefixed. It will be requisite, therefore, to pay very great atten- tion to the observations upon them, in order that they may make a due impression on the memory ; they consist of the
following letters : \ , this is an interrogative particle (an ? num \) c_j in ; o b2/ ; this is used in oaths, (jw , an adverb, indi- cating the future: i_i and; i $ like; J for, in order to; J
certainly ; and to these may be joined ^ and * , which how- ever are very seldom used; the first nine are contained in the technical words jKi , jj.Ju \ .
More than one of these particles may be prefixed to a word ; thus the interrogative 1 may be followed by uJ or . . These conjunctive particles c—j and ^ may likewise be followed by i^ ,
OF PARTICLES. 197
indicating the future, or by the prepositions < > , C-5 j J , t_5 ,
t , and J, .
s
\ . This, as has been observed, is an interrogative particle, as ci^U^ has he died ? It is often joined to ^ , and is then written j U as t— fl«j^_ c:^ ^ uJou 1 «5^^ thou indeed Joseph ?
When a second proposition follows, preceded by the separate interrogative particle /» \ , they both become disjunctives, signi- fying whether — or, thus *J>j^ ^ ^ (*r^ ^ ^^^ ^J/^ c^-*^ ^ c^^
CjO O^ O-' Ci
(^jjj J *\ as to those who have disbelieved, it is the same with them, whether you admonish them, or do not admonish them.
2. It is a particle of invocation, as t— i-j^, \ 0 Joseph ! it is then sometimes written thus \ .
This always bears Kasrah, and signifies
1 . /w ,• as Aisf**^ \j in the mosque.
2. With ; especially when prefixed to a noun of instru-
ment, as Jij «.::.-oJ^ / wrote with a pen ; or when subjoined
to verbs of coming and going, which then assume the significa-
tion of bringing and giving, or taking away, as c_->U^ b ^ \
- -rfj ^ ^ -- Ae cawie wi#^ ^^e book, i. e. ^ brought the book ; jy^ b v«^j&j
^ <re»^ away ^<7^VA the light, i. e. ^ took axcay the light.
O v> '•«C ^ ^ 'C)'^
198 OF particles;.
3. Because, for, on account of ; as ^jotl \ ^ jj^**^ b ^_;j*iAl ^ ^j^l b ^//^ /or ^2]/^, «»c? ei/e for an eye ; ^ lSs-^j{ ui^Jo 1^ \
aLJ \ may God destroy thee on accoimt of thy relapse from Islam !
'- *
■Si -O
4. It is a particle of swearing, as <dl b by God!
5. It is often put before the predicate of a negative, and becomes a species of expletive, as JjUj ^\ U God does not
neglect ; literally, God is not in neglecting ; JUj c^**^ -^ do not knoic.
6. After \S\ behold, c_? is prefixed to the name indicating
the object of attention, as J>>V ^"^^ behold a man I
7. It subserves to the construction of many verbs, as » ^>aJ b ^^;-*»- Ae perceived the thing ; ^.j I; (J^ ^^ j/* -'^ passed near a man who was sleeping.
This is a particle of swearing, as ^ \j by God ! it is em- ployed in a few other forms of oath, as ^ J by my Lord ! but is never applied but to God only.
This is prefixed to the future tense, fixing it absolutely to a future signification.
<— J- This is a conjunction of very general use, signifying and, then, therefore, so that, &c. : and implies something that follows
OF PARTICLES. 199
immediately ; differing in that respect from J then, afterwards, as well as from j and ; both which denote a more remote con- sequence ; as jj'+Jti Js'J c^ ^ ^ came to me Zaid, and then Amru, (he following Zaid immediately). It also differs from J , inasmuch as in the propositions connected by it, something is inferred from the preceding to the consequent ; as J^ *U) ^J^ ^\ J'li iw*^3£. s j^ once a stag was thirsty, and came to a fountain of ipater.
2. This conjunction is often used to indicate that the sub- ject of the succeeding proposition differs from that of the pre- ceding one. This should be particularly observed, as it may prevent the mistakes which might otherwise arise from the want of precision in expressing the subject which is sometimes found in Arabian authors. It is frequently prefixed to the imperative, and then in general marks the passage with pecu- liar emphasis. It frequently however appears as a mere copu- lative, like J .
This is an adverb of similitude, signifying like, or, as, and governs the genitive; as J^?-/ H^c « man. It is prefixed also
to the personal pronoun, as l3\^ lilce me; c:^ ^ ^*^^ thee; ^ like him. It is very rarely found with the afl&xed pronouns,
as ^ like rm ; t_<^ like thee ; i^ like him. The word 1 j^
composed of u-5 and of the demonstrative Ls is considered as a noun, and if governed by a preceding word, the antecedent
200 OF PARTICLES.
loses the nunnatron. \^ ^j^ ^^ \'^ ^J^ ^ in such a month of such a year. Of this particle, and the relative pronoun U, is formed the word U^ , signifying, in the same manner as.
J-
This is a preposition employed in various senses, as
1 . To, the sign of the dative case, as c->J to the master ;
■it v» o ^ o-^
^ iXKsr \ praise be to God. With pronouns it bears Fathah.,
as i,_<3 to thee ; Ul to ?<s, &c., except the affixed pronoun of the first person singular, as ^J to me.
2. For, because, on account of; ^^ lislw <uLi4J ^S -jf^^ my grief was increased on account of what had happened to his two eyes.
3. It expresses swearing with a mixture of surprise, as
h by God!
4. When prefixed to a verb it sometimes means in order
to ; as £\^\j\ bw /^g-«J31 he sought something that he might eat.
5. It is elegantly prefixed, by way of pleonasm, to that part of the sentence which is called the predicate, or what is
afi&rmed of any person or thing ; particularly when ^^\ is put
before the subject, or the person or thing, of which somewhat
is affirmed ; as y jJil jdSLJi ^1 for Alexander is powerful.
6. With Kasrah before the future it forms the impera- tive passive, and occasions an apocope, as \^i% (X^J^ \,^^.^3L^^
OF PARTICLES. 201
let a scribe write an agreement between you. It will be observed
that when uJ or j are prefixed, it loses its Kasrah. With
Fathah it is also used in calling for help, as Jkjjl b help, 0 Zaid!
It must be observed that when J comes before the article, the latter loses its Alif ; uJ^j ^^ {^^ ^'^ ^ verily that is
the truth coming from thy Lord. Here ^j^ is for ^JsM ■
7. In conditional propositions it answers to the antecedent
^ if; or il^l if not ; as u-X^/^ li"^^-^"'^ J^ *-^ <^^'* ^^^'^^^ ^^ ^^' / w«7^ certainly honour you.
J- This is, 1. The conjunction and, also.
2. It denotes swearing, as ^]\ \j by God !
3. It signifies with, indicating a simultaneous action, and then governs the accusative, as Loi»Ui 1 ^ ^IaM tj;y^\ the
wafer is even with the bank ; {J^y- ^ j r*^ ^ ^ V ^^^ -4miir mme ^p^^A the army.
4. This conjunction is sometimes equivalent to \3\ when or lohilst ; and then affects the indefinite tense with antithesis,
as L-J-ij 1 Ij ^ ^ Li^**' U^ i— i^^ ^ /^«^' ^^«^ '/io«* '^'oilt kill me whilst I am dnnkiny.
202 OF PARTICLES.
c and * .
These are prefixed for ^ and ^ , the letter ^ being dropped ; as \as. for U ^ , and \a^ for U ^^ .
Of Separate Particles.
These are divided into Prepositions, Adverbs, Conjunctions, and Interjections; it is rather the office of the dictionary than the grammar, to point these out ; but as they very often occur, the learner will find great advantage in being well acquainted with them. I therefore here make a few remarks upon some of the principal.
The number of separate prepositions is not great, they are the following :
^\ . This indicates the term of an action, to, until; as
ZJujL^i \ ^\ ^i-\>- he came to the city ; ,jJc^ ^J \ until the time.
- - * ^ - ^
y^o- . This is used in four ways : ^ffk ~ t,v>ML .
1. As a preposition, shewing the term or extremity, and is equivalent to u7ito, as jJ^ \ ^^vlk* Jo- unto the place of sun- rising. When thus used it governs a noun in the genitive, or a conjunctive proposition beginning with ^\ .
Si ' J -
2. It is applied to time, then meaning until, as (Jvs^ S J^ ^^/♦wi*! \ c:„.jtll? they travelled until the sun rose.
OF PARTICLES. 203
S. It is equivalent to our word even, as ,J^ i^A^] \ e:^^ \
o
- ' s- -
L-j1j / have eaten the fish, even its head. Had the particle
-J - |J1 been used here instead of ^2s>^ it would have meant, I
have eaten the fish unto, or as far as its head.
4. When preceding the indefinite tense used as a future, it affects it with antithesis, and answers to the Latin donee fol-
lowed by the subjunctive mood, f^j'^ l5^ lA«^ march until you overtake them.
LiU- , %>- , and \iisi . These are exceptive particles, origi- nally verbs, signifying to be separated from, to be beyond ; thus
Jo J \sc t,jjtj.Ao~ yjo literally means the whole of them beyond, or separated from Zaid, have been slain.
^\s. . On, above, is a preposition denoting superiority of place ; it may sometimes be rendered by against, as <Lilc ^j^ he went forth against him.
2. According to ; as sAa ^Ic- according to custom.
3. Office, or duty, or debt, as jUjJ u-a!l ^jx literally, upon me a thousand dinars, i. e. I owe a thousand dinars, \^ fJjd'J (jj s_J^>ic you ought to do that.
4. (-JjJ^ • Is used to signify Jo- take, as 1 Ju j ^_<1j1c take
Zaid. An ellipsis for tje J ^\'j ^ c-J^s*^ H '^^ your place to take Zaid.
204 OF PARTICLES.
^ . This usually signifies separation froDi, or the capability
of doing without a thing. ^js^W ^ ^ ^Jkz <dl 1 ^1 verili/ God is rick enough ^cithout men. From this is derived another
signification, of leating behind^ as Jklj ^ cuU he died leaving a son.
^ . This denotes in, whether of time or place, and is
' o ' S
used to express multiplication or proportion, as L.*^ ^J sj^
three multiplied by five ; U|^J ^Lc Ju \ ^ Icl^J ^^«*.4j>- ilis
U^ its length is fifty cubits by twelve cubits broad. It some- times answers to the preposition with, as he departed with fifty
thousand men. Ul \ ^Sm*a.s- J <ib^J . jjjj J jj , j_^jj to, with, nigh, &c.
jc* , iX< , or sj^ , jJu . These denote the commencement of a certain period of time, and are equivalent to since ; as
hu^ \ A^ Juu '^J. ^ J tc / Aa«(.' wo^ seen him since Friday.
When the period is not yet finished, Jw< or jJu governs the
genitive, as ljkj& l3 ^^ >x< aJUi^ U / ^are not spoken to him during this month.
-< . i^rowi, of, for, than, as j^jJ 1 ^ jjU^ \ ^^^ Joe ?rAe;i the Amir departed from the palace.
2. It denotes composition, t— )lJu: \ ^ iS^ ^ ^^ ^ garden of palm-trees and vines.
OF PARTICLES. 205
3. In negative propositions, or int(aTogative propositions implying negation, it often happens that the subject, or object of the verb, instead of appearing in its proper case, is expressed
by the preposition ^ governing the genitive ; as ^ ^ U- U
Jjv^ ^ no man came to me ; ij^£. <iJl ^ J3 U you have no God hit him.
Adverbs.
The Adverbs of the Arabic language are few in number, but this deficiency is amply supplied by the means of putting nouns in the accusative case, or adverbially ; and as this is applied to all nouns of action, and active participles, there is no noun, adjective, or verb, which cannot form an adverb ; thus
ir^-b within ; U^U- without ; \jJ^ much ; Ixljj little ; \x^ toge-
ther with; |j>i to-morrow; U.j one day; iUl hy night; \\.)
by day ; \s\su\ hy chance ; Uluo on the right hand ; I'U-i on the -* "-■' I-
Uft hand ; 1*>;-j quickly ; Ij^j eagerly ; U»l? willingly ; Ui" vio-
lently ; Ijj \ eternally, &c. These are all substantives, adjec- tives, or nouns of action, which being put in the accusative case become adverbs.
Nouns thus put in the accusative case, are often found in elliptical expressions, where they depend upon a verb under-
stood ; as XclL ^ \x.^^ meaning / am ready to obey you ; this
is literally, by hearing and obeying. IxiL; may God water this
land, literally by vatering. Jjls^ by his praise, i. e. may he
206 OF PARTICLES.
he praised. These are elliptical expressions for . \xa*^
a^Url oj«L>l / heard hy hearing and obeyed with obedience;
UiL: «d]\ (_iliLs ««aj/ God water thee hy watering I <Uls^ t.s:H\ I praise him with his due praise. These modes of speaking are very common in Arabic ; as (_^ L*«j may you perish ! Us^ Xj,-s J yoM are welcome, literally, at your ease and convenience;
JLolj^ J Ur^ all is at your service, literally, a pitcher and a pot-lid, or, on the contrary, h^^ ^ ^ ^ which is a double ellipsis
for h^i ^ J U»- \' neither pitcher nor pot-lid^ i. e. expect nothing from me.
A List of the most common Adverbs and Adverbial
Names.
^\ yes.
J1 , \d\, Ui^ and Ul j\ when. \^\ , U^il are conjunctive * » ^ * * ^
adverbs usually employed with a future sense. J\ is limited to the present, and signifies also, seeing that.
^\ and U^ signify also, then, hehoM.
' -5) ' ' o
t_5^j^ or 4_-51J i^ i^^ew, a# #/«a^ time.
^jj\ or I Jl we?^ done !
^^ or 51 unless, otherwise, verily.
OF PARTICLES. 207
a
a1 whether ? this often acts as a conjunction expressing doubt, and then signifies, or else.
U! is it not 9
^jtt^\ yesterday.
^\ . This when followed by "iS signifies, 7iot ; as J^ \ ^j\
■ii •Si
<d] ^1 there is no judgment hut with God. Sometimes when the
- ' h
word '^\ does not follow, this adverb still expresses negation;
as JS iUi dL*J i_sji^\ J J «w<^ / know not whether this may he a trial to you.
u'
yes, verily.
Uil because, since, only; as <d!^ J^ tJ^^ ^'^^ *^y rewar<^ «s ow^j^ wi#/i God.
^\ how? wherefore?
Ill) \ alas I
^ yes ; equivalent also to ^xj ; it is only used when a
form of oath follows ; as j • » ^\ yes, by God.
^J\ that is — as also the exclamation oh !
-Hi. ii
1^1' \ and ^\ when, whensoever.
^ \ where ; j ] ~< whence ; j \ ]\ whither ; Ul) \ wliere-
soever.
208 OF PAKTKLES.
iLA , I'o^ , liji hravo ! zrell done ! '"* "i> ^"*
if
L,j\ stop ! that is enough !
Jutj after, behind; Sxj ^ hereafter. When this word is
used as a preposition it ceases to be indedinable, and appears
either in the accusative Juo , or in the genitive, if preceded by
the preposition ^ , as j^ ^ . The formula Sxj U 1 , is
commonly employed in letters, or the prefaces of books, in order to announce the commencement of the real subject, after the praises of God, or the usual expressions of politeness.
Joxj the diminutive of the preceding signifies, a little after.
|Jj ^es, certainly.
^ between; this is the noun ^jo — difference, separation; in the accusative.
Uua whilst; and sometimes like the preceding, betw^n.
— O'
Ujuo whilst ; in the mean time.
ij>,sr' helow ; to this word what has been said of Jk*j , ap- plies also.
L:i,.os5r' a little lower.
J and c>-*>J then, afterwards. (J here. j^ci^ yes^ certainly.
OF PARTICLKS 20.9
LjU- . /^U- God forbid ! When this word appears with the nunnation, it becomes an adverb, though before described as a preposition.
^&- , hb ^>- hallo !
ui-Oks- where ; ei-oo- ^ tchence ; ci,-o«»- ^\ whither ; UwUj»- wheresoever ; it is also written ci-^>^ .
^jjJ except, undsr, besides.
Ujj o/if^«., sometimes. This is compounded of the preposi- tion <-r^, always governing an indefinite noun in the genitive case, and also signifying sometimes, or often ; and of the particle
u.
c^lj until.
;_i^ , ^ , ^^ , t.jLj . These indicate the future.
Ujw) ^ above all, principally.
Jo: above.
J^ • J*^ perhaps, by chance. This adverb receives the afl&xed pronouns.
^^ and ^fcc . This adverb conveys a negation, is only employed with a verb in the future, and signifies never.
_xi except. This is the accusative case of the noun jXc. difference ; it is also used adverbially, thus ^^ i! , signifying wo^
o o "■ ~* '' 7.
othencise ; and is then indeclinable, like Jut) , i,j„^ , &c.
^udj and J5 iLij /ar from, much less, &c. 14
210 OF PARTICLES.
^a&i ow^y, solely.
j^ a&ow. It is with this word as with iiM .
Jjkis J^r^. This word is in the same case as the preceding.
«>^
ISi along withy in the power of,
^ o ^ ** •* O^'
Jjoi diminutive of JjuJ, a ?«W?e before. *x5 , J>a1 , JJii certainly, sometimes.
o- -X- -^ O^ -J
laJi, Uij, laj, lajj, Ljj, «^er. This adverb is only used with a verb in the preterite; if a future time is spoken of, ^»c or \^\ must be used,
^ as if.
^ \^ how much ?
1J^ thws.
K assuredly not.
UK ^^ry ^i»?e ^^a^, as often as,
S how many f how much ?
U^ as if according to.
u-fl^ wherefore, in the same manner as, howf
Uijk^ any how,
iJ wo, not, not at all, is not ; jSi necessarily ; /•^i undoubtedly.
J unless, no, not ; apphed to the past tense.
OF PARTICLES. 211
UI not yet^ when.
Ul and J whj? This is compounded of the preposition J J and of the indeclinable word U. J wo, not. ^ or U^ unUss. ooJ ?<JOM?c? #0 God I This admits the affixed pronouns.
U, negative adverb of the present tense, and conjunctive noun, meaning thM which, and as an interrogative particle whatf or how?
^JLc when; U ^Ju in whatever way. W with., together with.
^ O '■
U^ as often as.
''(^
l**j yes.
Jks»-.. This word always requires an affixed pronoun, thus.
2f Jc*.j he ahne ; lifcJc»-j s^ alone.
t^ and u/jj- Adverbs of admiration or reproach.
U behold! This with the affixed pronoun of the second person, has the signification of ^ take! The affixed pronoun changes, however, then into Hamzah., as i l& , > U , UjU , |*jU» , ^.U ; according to the variation of gender, and number, for
(_JU take thou, (mas.) ; i^U ^a^^ ^^om, (fem.) ; U^U> ^a^e ^ott
<?/?o, &c.
14—2
212 OF PARTICLES.
IJoU s^ee Iter el behold! sJoU fern.
Ja whether? An interrogative adverb.
\£> and 'hb whether ? is it not ? well done !
Jj& and J.J3 Jjfc ; *^ , &c. come on !
Ui and Ui here. From this adverb other demonstrative adverbs are formed, in the same manner as demonstrative pro- nouns; as (_5Uj>5 uj3Uui) there, in speaking of things at a
distance ; UaU here, in speaking of things at hand.
1 jyfc see there ! behold !
bjb , c^^ J V. 5 V- ^ V. ' VV- ^ V, ' these five adverbs are used in invocation and speaking to.
Conjunctions.
It is with conjunctions as with adverbs, they must be learned by the Dictionary, but a few of the most common may be here enumerated.
■it Ct
V\ . This is compounded of the conjunction ^1 that, and the negative adverb ^' not ; with the prefixed particle J ; it is written thus, 5D that it maif — not.
i!t if not.
■it
U^ hut, however, nevertheless.
"i "i '
U^ or. or else ; Uli if. but.
OF PARTICLES. 213
i lit si
^^ , (jl that. ^\ is used when this conjunction is imme- diately followed by a noun ; it is often written with the affixed
pronoun i . The purpose of this addition of the pronoun, is to remove the influence of the conjunction, which would, but for such addition, require the accusative case.
^ , and by contraction ^ . This conjunction comes before
the subject of a proposition, when that subject is placed before the verb, and adds energy to the expression. It is also written
djl , as is done with aj \ , and for the same reason ; from the
inseparable particle t-j, joined to this conjunction, are formed
the words ^U and &j\i , signifying and indeed.
^\ if; from the affirmative adverb J certainly; and this conjunction if formed ; ^jJ certainly if. • 1 or, or else., until.
i in order that; ill is used in the same sense and with
the negative adverb 1 , it becomes \^ and \^ lest not, so as not.
ji3 and ^ hut. il! is only used before nouns and pro- nouns.
Interjections.
\^ ah ! alas ! This exclamation may be followed by the nominative case ; or the nunnation being dropped, Alif pre-
ceded by Fathah, or il , may be added Jls U, or Ijoj 1j,
214 OF PARTICLES.
or i^J^J \j, when two nouns in construction follow, the syllable i\ is added to the last, as s\<^jj /•iU \j alas the boy of Zaid!
Jjj alas! woe! This is sometimes used disjunctively, as
<d Jjj woe to him ! or conjoined, t-Alj ^'^^'^ ^^ ^^^^ •' iV^.J ^ ?ro(? ^0 me !
SYNTAX.
The concordance of the substantive with the adjective, of the relative with its antecedent, and the nominative with the verb, has but few peculiarities in the Arabic language. The substantive however precedes the adjective, the verb the nomi- native, and the nominative the genitive.
Syntax of the Noitn.
A proper name being definite by its very nature, takes no article ; but the epithet, if it have one, always requires it, as
^jw*i! \ (^\y\ Abraham the faithful. This is the case also when
a substantive is rendered definite by an affixed pronoun, as
(*S^ \ ^A iny honored father.
The nominative, in the beginning of a sentence, is often found to be, what may be called, the nominative absolute, as
^j1 \ ,1c _j Lu\y^ \ ^ \^ ^ i^\ God., to him is what is
in heaven arid on earth.
A noun substantive governs another in the genitive, which, as above observed, is always placed after the nominative; as
^UjJuj <_-jU^ a book of Solomon; t-,-j&J *jU- a ring of gold. The governing substantive sometimes has the effect of an
adjective ; as <_->;Us*^ \ J^ length of experience^ i. e. long expe-
rience ; this is always the construction of the word J^ the lohole
216 SYNTAX.
which is used for all or every ; as * ^-2» J^ every thing ; J^ ^jywUl 1 all men. This, and some other substantives, such as
^jjo the soul, self; when they have the possessive pronouns an- nexed, and follow another substantive, with which they agree, become as it were adjectives, and follow their construction, as
<UlA) t_--jjkrfc. a friend his-self, a real friend. <il^ jx^ the whole
of the bread, all the bread ; gen. d]^ Jjo- of all the bread.
It has been observed that the accusative termination con- veys an adverbial meaning, which may often be rendered by
the Latin Gerund in do, as \j^\j x\»- he came riding (equitando)
\>\sr' <_->U! \ \^ii\ enter the gate adoring (adorando.)
The sense of the Latin quoad, by reason, or in respect of,
is conveyed by the accusative, as Luij t_g-v c->ll? Joseph is good, in respect of his mind, or disposition, i. e. he is well dis- posed.
The Arabic noun having no vocative case, the nominative and accusative are both used in its place ; if the person or object addressed be present, the noun is in the nominative case, with- out nunnation, as * U-j b 0 heaven ! tj^^ V. ^ Prophets ! but
in this case the noun must not be followed by a word which it governs, either immediately, or by a preposition ; in these
cases it appears in the accusative, as s]l \ sjs. \j 0 Abd- Allah !
(0 /Servant of God) d^^^ lw>- Ij 0 thou tchose face is beau- tiful. The accusative is also used when the object addressed is
SYNTAX. 217
indeterminate, that is to say, without an article, and is not considered to be present, as Uju Ij 0 Prophet'.
The principal use of the passive voice is to consider an action, only with relation to the patient, the agent being left out of sight; if it is only desired to fix the principal, but not exclusive attention on the object or patient, the name of the subject or agent may be added ; and it may be said, the Vazir was killed hy the Sultan^ but this form of construction is very rare in Arabic.
The transitive verb, when entering the passive voice, loses its object ; which then becomes its subject. Verbs doubly tran- sitive, however, preserve both their objects, the second remain- ing in its preceding form, and the first becoming the subject
of the proposition, thus in the active voice sjj^ ^jULJ \ ^JLi U».4«u*^ lU the Sultan gave his Vazir poisoned water to drink. In the passive voice this becomes U^/^-u*^ * U jj^ \ ^JL: The Vazir received poisoned water to drink. In the same
way it is said \jS^ by \jA£. JoJ ^Jat^ Zaid gam Amru a
splendid Vest. In the passive voice \js}^ ^^ ^jA^ l5^^ Amru has been presented with a splendid vest.
As in other languages, so in Arabic, two nouns meaning the same thing, or as it is termed in Grammar, put in apposition, must agree in gender, number, and case, nor can the second, when one word governs another, be the same thing as its ante- cedent. Such grammatical anomalies are however sometimes
-0-£ J o- J - -
met \\ith ; as ^^^j^ks^ \ *^^ the day of tuesday (the fifth) iLs
218 SYNTAX.
^^ \ the prayer of the first ; that is, the first prayer aUUx w_q*C
a worn-out of a turban ; that is, a worn-out turban. Many nouns indicating time, or portions of time, govern complete pro-
positions; the governing noun then loses its nunnation, *jj liXa>
(»JJ Jup ^jJj jLs) i f-AJy. ^/^«^ <^«y <^^ justice of just men will aid
them
c:->jjj Ajj ,-Lc aLuJ \ Peace was upon me the day when
I teas horn ; jy^ \ ^ -f^.. &^.. t— ^3^ ^ ^ To him will be the
royalty, on the day when the trumpet is sounded.
The subject and object of a transitive verb represented by the noun of action, being both expressed, the subject may be put in construction with the noun of action, that is, may re-
ceive the genitive case ; as XJuJ \ n'sib ^j^ \/^^ ^aAs^ \ JIl* j^l^
In this year it was that the Khalif slew J afar ; or the object may be put in the genitive, and the subject in the nominative,
He forbade all men in speaking or writing to call him our Lord and our Master.
The active participle may, like all verbs, except the sub- stantive or abstract verb, express an attribute of a subject, and as the subject of a verb is always in the nominative whenever the active participle has a subject, that subject is placed in the
nominative thus ^^jy^^sr* n^A Jjliil \ ^y^s. Amru whose father has
killed Mahmud; s^j \s£. <)ju \ ^^b JoJ The son of Zaid will to-morrow marry Zuhaidah.
If, however, the active participle expresses a quality inherent
SYNTAX. 219
in the subject, and unconnected with any circumstance of time, it may govern its subject in the genitive. It is not therefore
incorrect to say <_->i! \ J^\ Jo j Zaid^ whose father stands firmly.
This construction, where the noun, which is really the subject, is put in the genitive case, and governed by the participle, seldom takes piace but when the participle is of a neuter verb; it is sometimes found, however, with participles derived from transitive verbs, when they are used as mere adjectives, as
i_^ii! \ (>>-\ji\ merciful of heart.
The active participle, accompanied by the article, is equiva-
lent to the relative pronoun and a verb; thus ii^\ JjUJ 1 \'si>
\jA£. is the same as \ ^as. ny^ \ JJJJ ijs] \ ^*X2> This is he whose father killed Amru.
The subject to which the passive participle is attached,
appears also in the nominative case ^^\ i!U- J^^*^ JyJ Zaid^ lohose father is at this moment killed. It may, however, be put in the genitive, being then governed by the participle, or in
the accusative case ; thus it may be written c->3 \ Jy^iU Jo j ,
or \j \ JjJoU] \ .
If the passive participle belongs to a verb doubly transitive, it preserves in the accusative the second object governed by
the verb; thus Ujbjii hSjj:. ^J^^*^ '^\j '^^'^ ^^^^ ^f ^^^^ ^^^ been presented with a piece of silver.
The substantive signifying the object to which the adjective refers, or by which the quantity or quality of that adjective is defined, is often joined to it ; as when we say a man learned
220 SYNTAX.
in (quoad) musk; a young man handsome of (quoad) counte- nance ; a man whose father is just ; the Arabians express such sentences in three ways.
1. The adjective preserves its nunnation, or article, and the following substantive is in the nominative case, as ^^-^ <-Jl \ ,j*u2>- {^^^ji or *jj1 ij**^>- There cam^ to me a man whose
father is handsome ; a^^J \ -*AJaJ5 J^^J '-"t'r* ' ^^ '^r^'J -f'S^^ / parsed by a man ichose face was ugly.
2. They put the adjective with the following substantive
in construction, as ic>~^ \ j^*-^ J^ . ^'s- U- , or <l^j mT**^
J - JO —
tliere cam^ to me a man handsome of countenance ; (Jf-y <-^j -«
^jl 1 ^J**^-s^^ > or <^;=^^ (j**^ -^ passed by a man handsome of countenance.
3. The adjective preserves its nunnation, or its article, the
following substantive appearing in the accusative, as ^i^W lyf^ (J****- (J>f-; 5 or tio-J ^ ..uo.- TVi^rg cawig to ^/^e a /waw handsome in countenance ; Ls-j ^f*-*- »-^^ '~iir* ' ^^ iir"**"
tib»-.l 1 / passed by a man handsome in countenance.
In the three ways here indicated, the adjective which pre- cedes the substantive, shewing the object, may have the art-icle or not ; the substantive, itself may also be definite or not. It is made definite, first by the article, second by a substantive governed by itself, and which substantive has the article, third by the affixed pronoun, fourth by a substantive governed by itself, and which substantive has an affixed pronoun. From
SYNTAX. 221
this results a great number of different forms, some disapproved, and others authorized, but more or less elegant.
The adjective, even when taking the article, may receive
the affixed pronouns, thus ^ [jj\^ \ Jo JkA) \ ^,laJu.! \ -*ajo^! \
ifjoLs] \ lie who is ugly of countenance, who has a strong head, and a little one.
The adjective, in the form of construction just before indi- cated, must agree with the preceding substantive in regard to
the use of the article, as <b^J \ ^-uo- Jj>^ a man handsome of countenance ; and d.s>.^ \ ^-^ \ Sij Zaid handsome of countenance.
If such an adjective have a substantive following, which it governs in the genitive, it must itself agree with its preceding
substantive in gender, number, and case, as ^^*^o- Jj>-;J '-"iir*
i^^ \ I passed by a man handsome of countenance ; i ij^\ kj>j \j
i»-»! \ ajuus^ / saw a woman handsome of countenance ; ^ :s U-
&c>.^ \ U-^ssw. ^^i->-j there came to m£ two men handsome of coun- tenance. This agreement of the adjective with the preceding substantive, is equally observed, though the following substan-
tive may be in the accusative case ; as l^j Mr*»- J^r? ''—^Jr* / passed by a man handsome in (quoad) countenance.
If however the substantive following the adjective be put in the nominative, the adjective then agrees with the preceding substantive in case, but with the substantive following in gender
man
222 SYNTAX.
and number, thus <^^J i^f*^ «-h*v^ ''^Jj^ ^ pa/ised by a
whose face is handsome; Um-^^^j ivt*^*' ^^r*V *--^r* ^ passed by a woman whose face is handsome. If the following substantive be a broken plural, the adjective is usually put in the feminine
singular, as (^Jt>y^^ .u****- Jl>-;^ ''-^Jj^ ^ passed by men whose
faces are handsome ; *^^^ JuwjUU Jjji woe be to them whose hearts are hard!
Before a substantive masculine in the plural number, the
adjective usually appears in the masculine singular, as <-i-%»Jj jj ^t, «- - ■(■ ^ ^
<i^Ulc ^,r« *^^j I ^^^ ^ *w*^^ MjAose ^oys «rg sicJc. The ad- jective may however appear in the plural, either broken or regular, as <uULi ^r^ "^j c:--J^j ? or <!OUli ^^y^j<.
If after a substantive definite by its nature, by the use of the article, or an affixed pronoun, an indefinite adjective follows, an ellipsis of the abstract verb to be must be understood, as
{j^„j^ j^llalwJ \ the Sultan is sicJc ; ^^ r« ^\ my father is
ij^„f<i '^-^^, Joseph is sick.
If however the adjective be limited by the article, the pro- noun personal ^ is interposed between it, and the subject, and
supplies the place of the verb to be, as -»jjsii! \ ^^^ \ yt ^^\ God is living and self subsisting.
An adjective constituting the predicate of a proposition, agrees with the subject in gender and number, unless that sub- ject be a broken plural, in which case the adjective may be in
SYNTAX. 223
the feminine singular i^U (jJ:^*^ ^ J '-r'^^ ^ Li'*^"' ^^^^ hearts are blind though their eyes see.
If the predicate precede the subject, as takes place in inter- rogative and negative propositions, and the subject be dual, or
s -s-
plural, the predicate is to be placed in the singular, as J^lj^
^SUJ 1 do the two men enter? J^^^ tJ^ ^ ^^ ^^^^ ^^ ^^^ go out.
A substantive preceding an adjective, and forming with it
a proper name, throws away the article, as JUs^ \ Joe (Abd- ul-Majid) the servant of the glorified (God).
When two substantives meet in construction, the antecedent is commonly indefinite, and the follo^ving noun definite, and the effect of their union is to determine the antecedent, thus
^jAS. /Xc. the slave of Amru ; ,J^^ ^ ^ the servant of my sister ;
^IUjuvI \ jjj the Vazir of the Sultan. When both terms of the proposition are indefinite, the antecedent so continues to be, as *\^ Jjs^ s^j^\ a barber's wife; JUj J[ao- a green-seller'' s
ass ; Jtc i_^>*.L> a possessor of riches. In this case, though
the antecedent do not become a definite noun, it is no longer entirely vague, and it will be perceived that a Vazir of a Sidtan, and an ass of a green-seller., are more definite than a Vazir,
and an ass. This case the Arabian grammarians term ^.^.^ , OT particularized. The antecedent never takes the article, though some of the principal authors of the last four or five centuries do not observe this rule, and prefix the article to both the
224 SVNTAX.
-«0 'i ''^■^C
antecedent, and the consequent ; ^j^ ^ ^ j^:^ ^ f*^ • *-f^^
jo«A1 \ he satisfied a vast multitude tcith harley bread.
When the meaning of the construction cannot be resolved into possession, or some synonymous interpretation, the nomina- tive is either with or without the article, according as the sig-
nification is definite or indefinite, as Ssxi \ c-^Uil \ the scourger
of the servant ; or JuoJ \ i^Jia a scourger of the servant. Nouns
of measure and weight govern the accusative singular, as
Uj ; ij^j tv:o pounds of oil of olives.
The cardinal numbers, from three to ten, may be considered either as adjectives, or substantives; as adjectives they agree in gender and case with the name of the thing numbered, as
^j^i.A^' clS\m ^ dj^ ^^ Ju <d ^ he had three sons and five daugh- ters. As substantives they govern the following word in the genitive plural. The numeral must agree in gender with the
name of the thing numbered, as Jl>^ ^^ three men ; c:,,^-'
CuUj six girls.
The numerals, from ten to one hundred, govern the accu- sative singular. The tens excepted, they not admitting any variation of gender, these numerals agree in their gender with
the name of the thing numbered, as Ijk^^ yis. s^\ eleven stars ;
i^ i^yt^J J j_mJ ninety -nine sheep.
In the numbers above twenty, the unities are put before
the tens, thus |;lxO ^j^j^ } h*>^^ ttcenty-five pieces of gold.
SYNTAX. 225
After the numerals of hundreds, the name of the thing num- bered is in the genitive singular, the numeral antecedent losing
its nunnation, and the dual the termination ^, as J^j LU
a hundred men ; jU>>. UyU two hundred asses ; c--Ji^ LUj ijuj^ five hundred dogs.
s 'Ji
The numerative i^al \ ons thousand^ is a masculine noun govern- ing the genitive singular.
If the number to be expressed is composed of numerals of different classes, it is sufficient to put the name of the thing numbered after all the numerals, and in the number and case
demanded by the last of them : ijilj ^lijlal \ j L^y \ ^
<U-j (jj*f>-' J j-^j \ J ^UjcujJ j uJi! ^ between the Hijrak and
the Dduge there are three thousand nine hundred and seventy-four years.
In the dates of years the cardinal numbers are employed,
governed by the word aJuj . This word is then made definite by the numerals which it governs, and is consequently without
an article ; the numerals agree in gender with the word (LLj , which is feminine ; the units are put first, then the tens, the hun- dreds, and the thousands, inserting the conjunction j between each numeral, v^l \ j XtUoJJ ^ r^^^^^ j c:-^ ^Ju> ciJj-J J then began the year 1396.
15
226 SYNTAX.
Ordinal Numbers.
These are true adjectives, and agree with the nouns which they qualify, in the use of the article, as well as in gender, number, and case.
The ordinal numbers of tens, hundreds, and thousands, being the same as the cardinal numbers, are employed for both genders.
When the ordinal numbers are made definite by the article, they do not appear in construction with the name of the thing numbered, but are joined with it by means of a preposition,
thus j^Li*i jj^J^ ^^ u^y*^ 3 tiJU] \ the twenty-third of the month of Ramadhan. When the numerals are without an article, they may govern a noun in the genitive, or an affixed pronoun.
- - — o ^
ijLici jy^ he was saluted Khdlif after the hour of noon of Wed- nesday the twenty-eighth of Ramadhan ; and thus with an affixed pronoun, ^Ul b ^jdy ^,A^ uiJlj ^J the twenty-third of it (the month) a proclamation was made at Kahirah. The indecli- nable numeratives S , ^jJ ^ > or ^^l^ , how many^ put the noun which follows them in the accusative, as ci^Jo-1 Uj&^iJ S how many Dirhams have you received f UJj iU-^ j\^ how many mm
Imve been killed f It is the same with \i^ .
If, however, before the indeclinable numerative, or before the thing numbered which follows it, a preposition occurs, the thing numbered is in the genitive, in the first case, as being governed by the indeclinable noun, and in the second as being
SYNTAX. 227
governed by the preposition, as *^J Jj for how TMmy Dir-
hams ? Jo-. ^^ ^_ l^ how many men ? If the indeclinable words
here spoken of, are not used as interrogatives, the name of the thing numbered, may be in the genitive, either singular or plural,
as ;«:^Uj JU-j S (-^<^^ ^ I ^noio not how many men tliou hast hilled; or Jj>-^ *^.
The comparative adjective, when governing an indefinite word, always remains in the singular number and masculine
gender, as 'i-s.jJ\ J^iil ^Jt> she is an excellent woman; J-^1 jJb
<Jj>-^ he is an excellent man; i\\>-j (^\ f^ they are great men.
When the word governed by the comparative adjective is definite, that is, takes the article, the comparative may remain of the singular masculine, or agree with the noun it governs
in gender and in number, as ^ LJJ \ J*ij \ ^ she is the most excellent of women ; or thus, ^ LoS \ ^X^ |^ •
When the comparative adjective is without the article, and does not govern another word, it is always of the masculine
singular, and ought to be followed by the preposition ^ , as
O^O-^ o
Jar! 1 ^ <xi> \ aJJa\ \ sedition is worse than murder.
The comparative adjective of the form Jxi \ , when govern- ing another word, or accompanied by the article, expresses the
superlative, as ^^J^-*^)^ ^ *>-j ^ ^ ^ (^od is the most merciful of
the merciful ; j^^ ^ yb <sU 1 God is most great.
15—2
228 SYNTAX.
When followed by ^, and a word which that preposition
governs, it is merely the comparative, as j^iU^ JJ^^ Sa£>-\ Ahmad is more faithful than thou.
The relative pronoun ^^33 \ agrees with its antecedent, if
it be a rational noun, in gender and number, as has been observed, it knows no variation of case, excepting in the dual. Where the antecedent, however, is an irrational noun in the
plural, the relative is put in the feminine singular, as t_->I^ \
^aJ \ the hooks which. This also takes place with the personal
reciprocal pronouns, as Li'^y % \j^ ci^Jo-1 / took books and read them. The oblique cases of the relative are likewise sup-
plied by these affixed pronouns, as <C»-<a3 ^^ \ J*^ \ lS^j^
the man whom I assisted beat me. The relative however is some- 's y ■j'i..^
times dropped, and the affixed pronoun used alone, as jj>- d^ \
j^S -
aj Li God of whom the condition is glorious. The relative and the affixed pronouns always require an antecedent in the sen- tence, either expressed or understood, as IjyJ^. ^ Uiili- t^JJ \
who created us, he directs lis; the antecedent he being understood before the relative pronoun.
These affixed pronouns are generally thrown to the end of the sentence, or followed only by the nominative when a proper
name, as jjJ <uli <—> -»? he beat servant his Zaid, for Zaid
heat his servant ; Ljks^U» j\d^\ \ J in house tnaster his, for the
master is in his house, but not j\,y\\ ^ (.--^^^U .
SYNTAX. 229
Syntax of the Verb.
When the noun which is the subject of the verb precedes it, the verb must agree in gender and number with the noun,
ifSJM J (jLs^ \ Ijoj <dl \ God produces creatures, then Tie gives
them life.
It must be observed, however, that if the subject is an
irregular plural, coming from a noun, whether masculine or
feminine, or a regular plural feminine, the verb may be, and
usually is, in the feminine singular, as ^J^Ji \ cjUUcw l> 1\
JLJ \ ro o^l ^ k—^vio <3Lj^, fX*^ 0 doves who rest on the
branches of the Arakl hear the message of a lover, who cannot recover from his intoxication.
If, however, the irregular plural be of rational beings, of the masculine gender, the verb may be in the masculine plural,
angels who hy turns watch over you ; angels in the night, and
angels in the day, UjJu*jl hj |^j \^\ uJjUl \ fj\ when
kings enter a town, they lay it waste.
When the verb precedes the subject, if that subject be singular and masculine, their concordance is always preserved. If, however, it be a singular feminine, the verb must agree with its subject in number, but may differ in gender.
If the subject, be a creature, really of the female sex, and that it immediately follows the verb, the verb must then be in the feminine ; but if the noun does not immediately follow the verb, the verb may be either masculine or feminine, yet the
230 SYNTAX.
feminine is to be preferred, as j>,'^'^ 'itjo\ \^\3 the wife of Aziz said.
If the subject be merely a grammatical feminine, the verb may bo of either gender, whether it precede its subject imme- diately, or not; in the second case the verb should rather be
in the masculine, l^ SAc (j^Uil ^^^_ LJ in order that men Tnay have no pretence against you.
If the verb is separated from the feminine subject by 1i\ ,
it is put in the masculine i^Ui il^ ^j U there is no one in/nocent but the servant maid, the verb may, however, here agree with the noun in gender, the word iJUi would then be under-
o —
stood directly after the verb o<^ •
When the subject is a masculine plural, the verb preceding
it may be in the singular, as "« LAgJ \ ^ \ U^ ^j^y \ do we believe as fools have believed.
If the subject be an irregular plural, coming from a singular, whether masculine or feminine, the verb may be put in the singular, and in either gender.
When the subject is a regular masculine plural, the verb
must not be in the feminine, but it may be so with ^yj plural of ^\ a son, and with such like words; which, though
having the termination of regular masculine plurals, do not keep the forms of their singulars ; for these plm-als are in fact
broken ones, as JjjI -j^ IJu e:^^ the children of Israel said.
The verb may also be in the feminine, and even in the plural number, when the noun following is a collective one,
SYNTAX. 231
as A^ a nation ; or a name of a species, as *Jlc sheep ;
J^ bird.
The subject, if it be a mere grammatical or conventional feminine, or a broken feminine plural, may have the verb pre-
ceding it in the singular feminine, or even mascuhne, ij-uJ JU
Aju4X/«J \ jJ roomen in the city said.
The dual follows the same rules of concordance as the
plural, (jUaj <iiJt< f^ys^ \ jj:^t5 two youths entered the prison
with him, ,J^J 1 ci^i^ the two feet said.
Though, as has been said, it is usual when the verb pre- cedes the subject, to put it in the singular, with the subject, dual or plural, yet the verb may agree in number and in
gender with its subject. if^j^ f^ *-r^:^^^ ^ L^l?*^ ^ ij:}j ^^^ girls have seen the grey hairs appear upon tmj face.
In the compound tenses expressed by the union of the
verb (jl^ and the preterite, or indefinite of another verb, if the
subject is put between the two verbs, the verb ^J^ follows the rules of concordance of the verb preceding its subject, and the second verb follows those of the verb placed after its subject- When the subject is a collective noun, preceding the verb,
the verb is commonly placed in the plural (j^uU! \ y^] ^j
^•Xuj ^ but the greater part of men are not grateful.
If the same verb have several subjects of different persons, it agrees with that subject which, in the language of gram- marians, is of the best person ; the first person being better
232 SYNTAX.
- 't
than the second, and the second better than the third, j \i\
»Xsi**^ J J j^^ ^^j.oAJ *lil \ I and the young tnan will go thi- ther, and we will worship.
When the same noun is the subject of one verb, and the object of another, it is necessary to attend to the way in which the two verbs are placed. If the verb which governs the noun as its object, is placed first, and then the verb to which that noun is the subject, the objective case is under-
stood, and the noun appears only in the nominative, as c:^j«^
Jjj ,Ji^_^ J / struck Zaid and Zaid struck me; r« j *--iLr*
jjAs. ^_ I passed hy Amru^ and Amru passed by me. It is permitted, however, to give an affixed pronoun as its object to the first verb, Jj; is^r^ j <Uj-J.
If the verb to which the noun acts as subject, comes first, and then that which governs the noun or object, the object is equally suppressed, and the usual rules are observed in the
agreement of the first verb with the subject, i^::^ ju? j J>^.j^
' o "
^^Ijuj the two Zaids struck 7ne, and I struck them.
The noun may also be expressed in the objective or accu- sative case ; giving to the first verb the termination which indicates its agreement with the latent, or understood pro- noun, which represents that noun in the nominative case, as
^^.^J) \ ^i^y J Jy.y^ for ^.^j] \ c^^ J J^jui ^j^jl 1 the Zaids struck me and I struck them. If a verb be used which requires a subject and a predicate, such as ^J^ to be;
SYNTAX. 233
jLs to become ; and that the predicate be common to two propositions ; as / was ill, and Zaid icas ill ; the predicate may be given only once, or may be represented by a separate
compound pronoun, as Uij k<i ^\ ^ 5 c:,,^ / was, and Zaid
was, ill, or UaJ -<i Jo J ^ j s\j\ \,ji^ I was so, and Zaid was
ill, or }i\j\ Li' _< ^\ ^ . e>^ I *^^5 ^i^d Zaid was ill,
it; that is, Zaid was ill, and I was so. The first of these three methods is the one most in use. All this requires that the two subjects should be of the same gender and number, otherwise the predicate must be repeated.
The same rule takes place with verbs, such as ^^ to believe ;
t_^-uo- to suppose, when governing a complete proposition, formed
■J o - -
from a subject and predicate both in the accusative, as c:.^.a-\l?
UlU Wj / believed Zaid was learned. The predicate may be
common to two propositions, and, of course, to two different subjects ; and the noun, which in one of the propositions is the subject of the verb to believe, may, in the other, be the sub- ject of the proposition which is governed by that verb, thus, Zaid has believed me learned, and I have believed Zaid learned.
U!U \si\ c^-J^J^ J lA*^ ^^^ ^** believed me, and I have be-
lieved Zaid learned; or U]U ^Joj i.::^Jj]? j iXA ^j-a^Is he has
believed me it, and I have believed Zaid learned; or j \J^
i\i\ UiU !tX)j ci^Jud? he has believed me and I have believed
Zaid learned it ; that is, / have believed Zaid to be learned, and he has believed me to be so. The first is the method most
234 SYNTAX.
approved. If the subjects be of different gender cond number,
the predicate must be repeated; l^^ ^ IjoJ U-t i^^-^, j ^J^^ fj>,^\ I regard Zaid and Aniru as my two brothers^ and they two regard nie as a brother.
In treating of the tenses of the verb, an enumeration has been made of the various particles which affect the indefinite tense, with apocope, antithesis and paragoge. The indefinite tense, as has been observed, (page 64,) is by the Arabians
denominated ^ lUio , or resembling^ because, in some of its acci- dents, it resembles the noun. As the noun has various cases, BO the verb, in the indefinite tense, has various terminations; these, by some European grammarians, are considered as moods of the verb.
The first, which is the natural and proper state of the in-
definite c--J^. j is by them called the indicative mood ; by the
Arabians «_3i , elevation, i. e. of the final vowel o or u. The second, which is when the indefinite tense receives antithesis
4_J^Jo , the same European authors call the subjunctive mood ;
by the Arabians themselves it is denominated (._,-%*aj , or erection. These epithets, which belong also to the noun, when applied to that, designate respectively what we call the nominative and accusative cases, distinguished by the final vowels o or w, and a. The third state of the indefinite tense is when it receives
Jazmah »— ^J^ j or apocope ; this the same authors call the con- ditional mood ; while the fourtli, which is when the indefinite
SYNTAX. 235
tense receives, what the Arabians call the ^ of confirmation^ and which Erpenins has distinguished by the term paragoge^ is deno- minated the indefinite tense energetic.
The more simple distinctions, as they appear to be, of Erpe- nius, have been followed in this graimnar.
1. The indefinite, having a future sense, is subjoined to the preceding verb in the preterite, in order to denote the immediate and consequential succession of the action which itself indicates; a meaning conveyed in English by the future of
the conditional mood, as <— >^. * U ^^^ ^\ ^\ he came to a fountain of water that he might drink ; /A;*5 ^ iX^ i_^y^ \ /J j^^\ jJu then he ascended the throne, that he might administer
justice; vXcliU ^^^j^^M ^^^ t_^l ^ OjJkc 31 when thou
wentest out in the rmrning that thou might lead the faithful into the camp.
2. The indefinite is subjoined, in the manner of a simple complement, to some verbs, the sense of which remains imper- fect without the addition of another verb. In such cases the
indefinite usually receives jj! before it, but the interposition of this particle is frequently dispensed with :
1. It is seldom used with verbs denoting inclination or
tendency to action. The verbs clkJuj \ and jjj' to he able, are
'^^ ' '^^
usually joined immediately to the indefinite t li and jl^ \ to wish
or desire, more rarely so, as ^ \ :>^J\ I ivish to see (that I
t - 't could see) ; ^! j|^ 1 , is however more correct, and in more
general use. With some verbs the common forms of speech
236 SYNTAX.
seek brevity more than grammatical purity ; as ^juuj <— V^ he knew how to swim. This verb i— Sj£ to know, should receive ^J\ after it, as Jjuj ^^,1 (_J^.
2. Verbs indicating an action about to be immediately.
Among these the most frequent is jli to he nearly^ or almost. (Lat. parum abfuit quin,) which is almost always immediately
joined to its indefinite ; as (J^bj j>**iJJ \ CJ jl^ the spirit was nearly departing.
^LsjI i_aJis'. jj-jj I j1^^ ^^g lightning nearly took away their sight. More rare, but of the same tendency, and of the
same species of connection, are Jl, ^-^^J and uX^j^ io he Tiear to. All these very seldom require the interposition of
jj! ; but ^ja*a£ expressing apprehension of any thing, and which may be considered as an impersonal verb, requires the con-
junction ^\ as J^ j^ y^ j IjJi ly&^ ^jl 15*^^ *^ *^*^ -?'^^' Aaps ie ^^«^ you may hate a thing ^ and it may he good for
you. Even this verb ,^_j*u£, however, among the poets is found
without ^ preceding the indefinite, as jAi^ ^ t_J,lJ jjfr> ^g***^ perhaps he who is travelling may see your fire. When a nega- tion takes place, it must be put before the first verb, as
^jo jIC; "i he is hardly ahle to speak plainly ; ^j\ (Jus*u£- U
I^LuJ" perhaps you will not do it. It is to be obsen^ed that .-uxc, and t— >^ are only in use in the preterite, where they
SVNTAX. 237
assume the meaning of adverbs, as is probably the case with
Jjsl , which, if so, has entirely lost its verbal sense.
3. The indefinite expressing a present sense, is often in
apposition with another verb ; this indefinite holding the place
of a participle, is in very common use, and is subjoined to the
-' - ^ ^ ^~> ' -.5 first verb to explain the mode of its action, as ^_^jj cuixj J-^il
■^j; ^ -
he sent announcinp this to Mm, ^d! 1 V\ d\\ 1 ^J\ ^^JUjj c:jto _<
<Us: \ tJ»-J he icho dies testifying that there is no God but God will enter paradise.
There are several classes of verbs taking the indefinite im- mediately after them. As 1, verbs of beginning , which, when thus joined to another verb, always point out the commence- ment of some situation, or action ; although the spaces of time occupied by that situation or action, may be very different.
The most frequent of this description is the verb Jjts- as
^Ls^lUo \)to. they two began to dispute together, UJJ^ J-**-
^jM J"} k d^. Lr>* i L5^-^J^ Lr->* V. d^.. Karun began to say, 0 Moses pity me ! and Moses to say, 0 earth
i-'^ ^■'S ^^^ -^ci
swallow them up! Such are the verbs Ijoj i^\, f-i, Jj^U ^jU, \Lj\, (JJ^j (j^ i and t_^>i»i.
2. Verbs expressing duration of any state, or conti- nued, and repeated action ; as Jb , to continue, to remain,
or to persist, <V^ ^^ ^ j ^ucJuw ^ ^,.y, ^ji\ J-jJ^j J^ J ^, i-^\ j-dsr^. 1' J jj^! iZTaif? continued to send to Ihn Buwaih in-
238 SYNTAX.
viiino him to come, and Ihn Bincaih to excu&e fiimself and not
to appear. To this class belong also the verbs ./♦JL;) to con-
- -t
tinue, or persist; ^\s\ to remain, to persecere ; L. to he firm,
or unmoT^d ; Js. to le accustomed; Jii to continue, not to cease; (during the dav) ci-'l' to continue ; (during the night) as well as these ; J^ U not to cease : ^ji U , ^« U ; and i_>iJ'^ U
not to fail; i. e. to continue to do until the end of the period mentioned.
3. Of the same description are all verbs denoting to be,
to exist. The most frequent of this class is .,i, and those
whose meaning is derived from a particular point of time ; as
— t,^ - 'S
XJ^ to travel in the moraino, .*aa^^ to he in the rwornino, ^c.
That state of th^? indefinite which the Arabians call c nashated. or bearing Fathah for its final voweL and which Erpenius denominates antitlcesis. is subjected to some particle always conve^-incr the sense of that. Its most frequent use is
after the conjunction ,} that: if a verb of will precede, as
<ul^ ,-,>s:' .,' Jc> ,' / icish that vou icould fator him iS^ ^,*x3? _" V '-' - *^ ■■<. , -^
♦.Jjtx; ^\ the^ sought from him that he mould send, them. In -t '- — ^i --
like manner, after .} 1^ a'j:- he labored that; ...^ c^ «-^)
(or J ^j) hji mas pleased that. There are many verbs of this dcsscription, as well as others indicating the reverse, as
i^. j' to he umcillina. ^ j'>>, ,-1-.; and .j'.^ to fear; *_jcv
to kinder, to pretent. It is the same after all verbs of com-
SYNTAX. 239
manding, and forbidding ; as ^ jJ\ , ^^ , *js>- ; of pardoning^
swearing^ testifying^ and iBowing ; as u-gl*^ > jo&Uj , j JJ • Verbs of efficiency., or of power, constitute another class of this de-
scription, as MJi\ to compel. In the same way j^^o ^ (j^si*^\
of ~> - "o-
he is deserving that he he, ^^ l_^ns^. , ^y«AAj «7 is necessary that; ^^1 j>sri **^ «s permitted that, (Hcet ut.) Hence after the word if jU custom, as *& jI^j ^ |^*luXs::'. ^ i, ULs^ ^ if jU ^jl^ *V was a
custom of the Khalifs that they should confine their sons. Nei- ther is it necessary that a verb, or verbal noun, should always
precede, as ^yO i! ^j! U^ j ^j^^ ^1 Ul whether that it he, or whether that it he not.
The indefinite, however, does not always bear antithesis after
o S-
(jl , for if it have the meaning of the simple present tense,
of
and ^J\ points out nothing more than a certain event, contem- porary with the preceding verb, it remains in its first state, and
^ ^^ t -.'of
does not take antithesis ; |*j^_ ^ -J.^ 1 / know that he sleeps ;
though in such a case, to avoid all ambiguity, the use of ^ \ is to be preferred. After verbs of doubting or thinking, as
iJ^ } J^ ? ^^^ such like, the antithesis is not necessary, but it is sometimes found.
o ■'
J . This is a more emphatic denial of the future, and
' f t-^
being composed of ^ and i^\ , always requires antithesis, as ^J
— o'~
Jj«j he will not do if (I do not believe that he will do it.) J . This preposition, placed before the verb, becomes a
conjunction, denoting the end or purpose of the action (Gr. 'iva,)
240 SYNTAX.
whence it always requires the antithesis, as indicative of a sub-
o
junctive sense; as tjjyiijj (.Joy It they conie to you that they
may testify; &muiS\ sSj^ Jc« he stretched out his hand that he might strike him. Observe particularly this form of speech, Axi^ c:^^ U / am not he that I can do it, that is, I do not
wish to do this. *^J lL^JJ ^^ J thou wert not he who wished to lead them astray. If however a negation occurs, the particle J does not immediately join, ^ being always interposed, whence
■Sji ^ o j:
comes the negative 1x1 (^^^J)-
Of the same meaning is the conjunction ^ that (Gr. otto;?) and its compounds ^^ , \^ , ib^ .
The verb bearing antithesis is subjoined to certain other particles, when, from the whole tendency and connection of the discourse, the action which that verb expresses, stands as if depending on the first. The particles are then placed imme- diately preceding, and the meaning of the verb subjected to them, points out the peculiar idea belonging to the whole sentence.
i^As*. . This conjunction signifying, that, in order to, denotes the end or continuation of the action, until that which is
wished is obtained, as <dll *K ^-'♦-wuj i<^ ^j^^ protect him
wntil he hears the word of God, (in order that he may hear). It may also indicate the defemng of an action, not to be done
until something preceding is accomplished ; ji^ li"^' I^U-JJ ^
SYNTAX. 241
•dftil Lc LJu*J J IjAyjULyJ (J^ i*^"^ ^^ ^^^ enter houses^ except your houses, until you ash permission, and salute its in-
habitants ; ^ *— VV. li^ ^Is^ ^ jlj ^1 iJL* 1 Jj^-^^ j-Jt*
^ A^ forbade any woman entering the palace of the Khalif
until he knew who she was.
( j . This conjunction usually joins two propositions, indi- cating, in the second, an immediate dependance on the first, of which it is a consequence, and requires to be followed by
antithesis ; as ij^ \ J*-jli ^j l» ^^M-^ pardon one, 0 Lord !
^/ia^ / may enter paradise; ^J^\ ,<-i«li jljJ ^ ^ J^J Jjb «s
Zaid in his house, that I may go to him? After a negative imperative, it answers to the Latin ne, and the English lest,
as t_3l& \j J Jo-ly i! punish me not, lest I perish.
From a similar connection of ideas, the antithetical form
^ -'
of the indefinite follows the particle \d\ or ^J\ , if it describes
a consequence immediately following the antecedent, as in the case of any movement or intention of the mind ; as if any one were to say, / will visit you to-morrow, the answer might be, then I will honor yoUy that is, / will receive you with honor.
The difference between t_5 and ^d\ is, that (^ denotes a closer connection, and ^c^ a connection less immediate.
J. The difference between this conjunction and (_J is, that the latter, besides the simple connection, expresses also the
order of things which ^ does not, but merely an intention, sub- 16
•242 SVNTAX.
ordinate to the first, and something to be done at the same
o
time ; as ^slLo ^"Uj Jji-s: ^ ^ ^" ^ c?o «o^ condemn a temper
ano? M^TJ sA^zo ^^e saw^g ,• ^jd] ^ <-rVi*J' j (_X*aJ \ J^Ij Jj) <^ yoM eat fish and at the same time drink milk f
jl . This conjunction, which properly signifies or, or else, receives also the meaning of, in order that, until that, unless
that ; tSJ^AJ j\ l^ Jj^ ^'^ ^'^'^^ regain the empire unless we
die. In such cases it always requires the antithesis of the inde- finite. This conjunction has the same efiect on the indefinite,
when it is repeated, then signifying whether, as J^ \ j \ Jjo \ i!
JIj^ _j1 / ««27^ wo^ speak, whether I conquer, or am killed.
From what has been said, it will appear that, properly
speaking, it is only the conjunctions ^\ and ^, either ex- pressed, or understood, which affect the indefinite tense with
antithesis ; for the other words, such as ^Jo- > J > t— ' 5 &c.
more or less, contain the same signification as those two par- ticles, and are equivalent to the word that.
The jazmated form of the indefinite, or apocope, takes place when two propositions are conditionally connected, whether this
connection be pointed out by the conjunction ^ if; or by one of these words ; ^ lohoever ; U that which, and its compounds,
Ui^ all that ; UK emry time that ; U^ whatever it be that ; ^\ , ^\, UJjI, UX>oi- wherever it be; ^\.\\ and Ujjl ivhen;
SYNTAX. 243
^JU and U^Jlo ichen^ at whatever time tltat ; *^Ju^ and UiJ^
in whaiever way that ; ^\ and ^^^j \ lohoever.
It is the same if one of the two propositions be in the imperative, and that the other depend conditionally upon it ; as, if you do well you will he rewarded.
The particle J also requires apocope, but when there are several indefinite tenses depending on each other, that which
immediately follows the particle J is the only one affected by
it ; as ^Juu.' cJ/c ^^i^ J he did not know how to swim. It
is the same with the particle Ul n^t yet.
After the prepositions ^ or J , giving to the indefinite an imperative meaning, apocope also takes place ; as J*aj ^ let him not do it ! Jj^wJ let him do it .'
The indefinite takes the same shape after the negative ad- verb i!, when it carries dq)recative meaning, as ^x^ JIoa^j 1^
i»,-A.A) u-XJt* jJ^ ^J^^ ^JS J L5^''^J 4-?>^ lengthen not my life and my days, hut let me have a portion of thy felicity !
The use of the two forms of paragoge is subjected to no fixed rule ; they are employed to add force to the expression, whether in interrogating, in affirming with or without an oath, or when the indefinite carries an imperative or prohibitive sense.
Syntax of Particles.
All those relations of the subjoined noun, which cannot be expressed by the genitive, governed by the antecedent noun,
16 — 2
244 SYNTAX.
nor by the accusative, are pointed out by prepositions. This is their first, and most frequent use ; there is, however, an- other ; for as the Arabic language has no compound words, nor verbs compounded with prepositions, many prepositions, which in European languages coalesce with the verbs, whose meaning they complete and define, are in Arabic only found in apposition.
Active verbs for the most part govern the accusative, thus ^ — \^ ^j, he threw a stone. Yet such verbs often take the
genitive with a preposition, as j^-_ ^<j he threw with a stone ; this happens frequently, when the verb, by common use, indi- cates the object upon which it acts ; as ui->JO to send, which in common use means to send an ambassador, to delegate, this always takes ^_j of the thing with which the legate or messenger
is sent ; another cause of such anomalies may be found in the
new meaning which a verb may acquire ; thus jL2»^ in its first and original meaning, signifies to construct with clay, as a wall, a cottage, &c. ; from this is derived the metaphorical meaning, to build up a name, to raise to renown, which requires the pre-
position t— >, as ^jj d\Jlt\ he exalted his fame. So the verb
j_J^ , whose original meaning is to put, passes on to the kindred signification, to put down, and with the use of the preposition
_<, takes the meaning of to detract, to render contemptible,
ideas sjnonymous with the diminishing of praise or detracting from.
The brevity of speech to which the use of prepositions so much contributes may be particularly observed in verbs, which,
SYNTAX. 245
though intransitive, become transitive verb.^ by their assistance; thus ajJl Ja , rising, he proceeded to him. The poets take great freedoms with such modes of construction.
It happens frequently, however, that after an intransitive verb, the preposition which should point out the relation be- tween that verb and the word which it governs, is suppressed ; and the word governed by the verb appears in the accusative, as if the verb were a transitive one.
When the intransitive verb governs a complete proposition,
whether verbal or nominal, beginning by the conjunction ^ ,
■is-
or ^^1 , the preposition which ought to connect the intransitive verb with the following proposition may be dropped ; thus J
i_^J Jjtij ^jl jjJb instead of t_53j J*aj ^ ^_jlc jJJb J
' S- ' -*'- <iS- c- ^H--
he could not do that; Jo-^ jjjb 'i\ <uJl >»jJij he ordered him
to grant permission to no one; instead of (^jb ^Ij the last ex- ample is particularly remarkable, as it is only by means of the preposition (^ that aJJu signifies to order.
In no case, however, must the preposition be omitted, if
J G ^
a doubtful meaning would result; thus it cannot be said c:^-J^
(_j3 j Jjtaj" ^ instead of t— ^<^ J*AJ" ^ J ^'^^-^j •> ^ desire that you would do that ; for if the preposition were left out, it might be supposed that the sense was Jjuj" ^ u; '■jl.'^j
c^i / am averse from your doing that.
246 SYNTAX.
On the one hand, however, as there are verbs having an unrestricted power in this respect, so there are others with which the suppression of the preposition is a mere poetical licence to be used only in cases of necessity.
What has been just said of intransitive, applies equally to transitive verbs, with regard to their government of words requiring the interposition of a particle ; this particle is often left out, and the noun, or rather the pronoun which represents it, subjoined immediately to the verb, which then governs it
virtually in the accusative case ; as dji2i I thanked liim^ for
^ s^LiiJ^ I gam thanJcs to Mm ; dlsr^ I gave him good advice,
J- J o " ^
for <^1 ^^'•s^ / gave good advice to Mm.
It sometimes happens, though but rarely, that the pre- position being suppressed, the word wliich it governs remains yet in the genitive case. This is a pure ellipsis :
^ ^ - ^ -Si .«<3 «, jt ^ ^
>
.j_^Un ujJ^^V .-^jJ^ c:JjU
When it is asked which among men is a wicked tribe ^ The fingers of the hand point to Kulaih.
It will be observed that the word t-^jJ^ is an ellipsis for
The particle U is sometimes used between a preposition, and the word which it governs, without changing the influence
of the preposition on that word. This particle U is then
SYNTAX. 247
merely expletive Juc^j Uj , and Jjiij U^ instead of <U»yj ,
and Jjsjjl X .
The preposition -= sometimes follows immediately the pre- position ^, as ^jJ-«j ^ ^ from the right side.
The prepositions c— j and ^ are sometimes employed pleo-
nastically, or seemingly so ; but they always preserve their grammatical influence over the word which they govern.
The words employed by the Arabians as exceptives, are
^1 if not ; composed of the conjunction J if and of the nega-
tive adverb 1' not ; _xi , Juo , j_£»-j , 4_^»-j and ? \ w which are
all properly nouns, signifying difference ; LiU- , )I»- , and \ds. except; words, which, though considered as prepositions, were
originally verbs, and Ujw; ^ an expression signifying above all.
The noun expressing the thing excepted, appears in Arabic, sometimes in the nominative and sometimes in the accusative, or genitive.
1. ill. The general subject from w^hich a thing is ex-
cepted being expressed, if the proposition be negative, the noun expressing the thing excepted may agree with the noun ex- pressing the general subject ; or may be put in the accusative,
as \S)\ ^\ Ss-A J<^ U; or jjj ^1 no one has spoken to me
except Zaid, ^, \y^\ ^^ c-^^I^ b (,::^-j01 U , or ^\jy^ \ I have not brought the books except the Pentateuch.
248 SYNTAX.
If the proposition be affirmative, the noun expressing the
thing excepted must be in the accusative, as il\ ^jo^Ul \ ^jj-*^
> -
\sj\ the men came to me except Zaid.
If the general subject from which the exception is made, be not expressed, but understood, the noun of the thing ex- cepted must be in the same case as would have been the subject understood. The principal proposition is then always
negative. As ^a**- ^\ i^^^ ^ ^^^ <^^^^ came to me hut J afar ; /Jt^- ^^ c:-?;-< U / passed by no one hut J afar ; i^j>J\ J
\jBjts>^ ill / have struck no one hut J afar.
In the first of these examples Jafar is in the nominative
s -- t
in agreement with Jo-1 one., understood, in the second the word
- 1 i^ -1.
understood is Jo-b , and in the third loo-l .
If the word preceding ilU be the subject, and that which follows it the predicate of a proposition, the two words must be in the nominative, as t_jjK Vs ri*>- U Jafar is not hut a
liar (Jafar is nothing but a liar) ^j^j^Lc ^1 uV^ ^ U^ verily t/te unbelievers are but cursed.
If the thing expected be not of the nature of that com-
prised in the general subject, the noun following ill must be
^— ^ s -i in the accusative Ly V\ Jc^l is^^^ ^ *^ ^^ cams to me
except a horse.
Among negative propositions, must be comprised those which
SYNTAX. 249
are so in their sense, though not by their form ; such are pro- hibitive propositions, or interrogatives expressing negation.
The words jxi , Joj , f \y^ , ^y^ and ,_^ , which are
also exceptives, govern the noun of the thing excepted, in the genitive ; and are themselves always in the same case in which
the noun of the thing excepted would be, if the particle ^1 were used ; thus JoJ -xi Jo- \ ^J*^ U , or Ju j jxi no one
has spoken to me except Zaid ; ^jy^ \ j^ ^-^^^^ Ij c:-^" ^ to , or iijy^ ^ rJ^ / have not brought the books except the Pentateuch ;
*io J _)^ ^^wU] 1 ^^ U- ^Ag wzere cam^ ^0 me except Zaid ; U ^ -
^&«:>- -xi ^ ^ U- no one came to me except Jafar ; (-^jj^ U
^OXo^ OO^OX
^Ax>- -Kxj / have passed by no one except Jafar ; c_^ \ J
xOxxox S ^S. -X
^A*»- -xc / Aaw struck no one except Jafar; Jo-! , <JiW U
XX xC X
(jwj -x£ wo owe came to me except a horse.
The two words ^y^ and t^y^ , being among those whose three cases are alike, they only follow the preceding rule virtually.
After the words LiU- , Li- and \s£. , the noun of the thing excepted, may be either in the genitive, accusative, or even
nominative. When, however, li- U or \^ U is used, the noun of the thing excepted must be in the accusative, because
iU- and \ds. then preserve the nature of verbs.
Ujuj j! . This literally signifies, not equal to^ but is used in the sense, above all, principally. The noun following may be
250 SYNTAX.
either in the nominative or genitive, as Lo--: 'i ^jwU!^ ^Ju^sr^l
<AjJ or Jk.|j ^j^-j ^' ^^^ wi^» ^a«^ enchanted me, above all Zaid.
The genitive is then viewed as being governed by ^ , syno-
nymous with JJU , and U as a mere expletive without influence.
If on the contrary the nominative is used, U is considered as the conjunctive noun, signifying that which, and an ellipsis is
supposed of the pronoun ^ , between U and the following noun. It results from this, that the case of the noun follow-
ing Ujw-j ^ , and which noun expresses the thing excepted,
depends in no manner upon the case of the noun expressing the general subject, from which the thing excepted is subtracted.
After ^ \ , j^ , and Juo , a complete proposition may fol-
low ; ^ \ has then no influence over the proposition, and after
jsi. and \^ , which are adverbially put in the accusative, the
■it
conjunction ^\ is used.
When )i\ is repeated, forming fresh exceptions, and not
merely used for the purpose of greater energy, the general sub- ject being understood, and not expressed, the noun shewing the first thing excepted, takes the nominative case, and the others
the accusative; l4X*.sr* ^M ^Ja*-: 'i\ Jixs^ 'i\ fXs U wo one
stood lip except Jafar, except Said, except Muhammad.
If the general idea be expressed, and the proposition an
affirmative, all the exceptions are in the accusative ; ^yi] \ JJkJj
SYNTAX. 251
\jA£- IS jAS. i!] \sij ^1 all the people were killed except Zaid,
except Omar, except Amru. If the general idea is expressed, and the proposition negative, and that there be an inversion,
it is the same ; Jo-I Jk,*.*-^ i! 1 \;i*^ ^ ^ Is: U ;io one escaped
except Jafar, except Ahmad.
If there be not an inversion, one of the nouns will be in
the case in which would be the noun following V\ , if there
were but one exception, and all the others will be in the ac-
cusative; \j^ li\ Jo J li\ Jo-1 ^aj> J wo owe ^«s escaped except
Zaid, except Amru.
(j»^ iJ , or the negative verb ^j^ , is sometimes used to convey exception, the noun of the thing excepted is then in
the accusative, Iju ; ^^ ^ l^Ujj or Ijoj ^^1 ^/^gy ^a»e 6ee/i ^iY/ec? except Zaid.
It has been before observed, that the negative adverbs i! and U govern, in certain circumstances, the predicate of a pro- position in the accusative case, and that il , when used to deny the very existence of a thing, governs the noun in the accu- sative case, but without nunnation.
To give these negative adverbs the power of governing in
the accusative, as when we say iylj VdJb U this is not a man, it is necessary, first, that the attribute, or predicate, should follow the subject.
2nd. That the particle of exception il! , do not come be- tween the subject and its attribute.
252 SYNTAX.
3rd. That if the negation U be used, the negative particle (^1 must not be added to it.
4th. That if the negative i! is used, the subject must be an appellative noun indefinite; in all other cases these negative adverbs lose their influence on the predicate, which must then
be in the nominative, according to the general rule ; thus U sjj *j 15 Zaid is not standing up ; <_^ jl^ ^ \ joj U Zaid is
nothing kit a liar ; *j l3 Xi^ ^Ji U Muhammad does not sleep ; *^jj ^1j JJJ^ \ cjjjuu^ i! the secret trusted to them is not be- trayed; ;^^ iX>.j ^ -2^a^W 26^ ?io< ill. With an indefinite noim, thus, \fs\j i^luJ^ iJ ^A^re is no man immortal.
After U , as well as after ^j^ , and ^ , the predicate of a nominal proposition often takes the preposition c_^ , as U,
JiUj aJJ 1 God is not negligent. i> -
When the negative adverb iJ denies existence, the noun
ends in Fathah without nunnation, as j^jJ ! ^ jo^^ ^ ^A^r^ is no man in the house.
In order to have this effect the noun must be wholly indefi- nite, and must immediately follow the negation.
If after this particle there are two nouns joined by a con- junction, and to each of which the negation equally belongs, the second noun may either be in the nominative, or in the
same state as the first, as jUl 1 J if|^l j J^ il or J^ "i
SYNTAX.
253
i\j^ \ J there is not man or woman in the house. The negation however is usually repeated.
If the negative adverb be repeated, it may operate upon the two nouns, or only upon either of them.
there is no strength nor power but ' in God.
4iiv ill ^y i) J J^ i)
^b ill *y 5) J J^ iJ
- -5- V
If the subject of which the existence is denied, be quali- fied by an adjective, the adjective may be pronounced in three different ways ; as
^S-f^- - J ' -
j\^ \ j\a,\^ ^j'i
I there is no man sleeping in the house.
^^\
J,^ , ^ j^ U ^J=^J
u J.
If after the negative adverb "^ denying existence, there be
a noun definite, it appears in the nominative, iIj^M ^ SjJ il Zaid is not in the house.
The negative and conditional particle il^ has no gramma- tical influence on the subject of the proposition which follows it. This proposition in general wants its predicate, or attri- bute ; thus (— ^J )p <^j il^ if it were not Zaid, I would visit you, that is, if Zaid did not exist, or made no obstacle.
254> SYNTAX.
The subject of the proposition following this particle, may
be represented by an affixed pronoun, as UjJ^l 1 ^jjsz J s^A
/»iX*J 1 ^ ?*/" it had not been for him the world would not have come out of nothing. The detached personal pronoun may also
be employed, as ^J^^^■oyo U^ Jol 3^ */* it had not been for you we should have been believers.
The various emotions of the mind are interjectionally ex- pressed, sometimes by nouns in their simple state, as uJvAc *Lj
peace be to thee I or < ^j <)dl may your abundance be with God I
a form of benediction ; aj t_$jsjilj may you be contented I {may
^■^^ - - - it suffice you) ix^ U t-i^^ w^ay this disgrace be sufficient to
you !
If, however, the interjection is expressed by a single word,
abruptly uttered, it appears in the accusative, elliptically, as
VcL^ peace ; <d lisr* distance be to him ! that is, let him be
gone ! ^_^L*.^ ^ touch not !
The same word is often repeated interjectionally, expressing
alarm, and to give warning ; JuJ) \ <^^ \ the lion ! the lion !
that is, beware of the lion! i\s^\ s-\s^\ j tXs 1 Jcs 1 dili- gence^ diligence, safety, safety, {be diligent and you will succeed)
t_^ \ s.\s^\ flight ! flight !
In a similar way an urgent address, or warning to another, is conveyed by the use of the affixed pronoun of the second
SYNTAX. 255
person, and the accusative case of the thing to be avoided; a conjunction coming between the two words, as ^ j (_5M ^_^<£iil \ thee, and vehemence of anger ! that is, beware thou of preat anger! *^\lo\ \y^ ij\ *^U beware that you he not the
same ! ^,J^1 \ j ^JiJ] \ j uJ'VJ <— ^VJ b^'^are I beware ! that you injure not the Kuran and the faith.
o —
Among the particles of affirmation, and of answering, ^j
O ' '
yes^ well done ! be it so ! is of very common use ; Jjer^ is some- times used among ancient authors in the same sense as the
o - i preceding ; it properly means enough. J^l simply affirms, and
is generally used in assenting to a preceding proposition whe-
'■a ojj ">
ther affirmative or negative, as UIj \j (^l^ ^ \ ♦^As:'. <ul3! fjjs-] I think he tells you that he is innocent, they answered yes.
o ' c
Jo- certainly! this is much like the preceding. ^\ this is only used before a form of swearing.
PROVERBS
SELECTED FROM THE COLLECTION OF
ABU' L FADL AHMAD IBNU MUHAMMAD AL MAIDANI.
'O **o o ^ -o
7%0M caws^ not gather grapes from thorns.
'O-C o ,-o -> vi^
2. .^^yul^ (•j^^ Jj^
7%e beginning of determination is deliberation.
- -o^ " -» " " o" uS- ' ' ■Si
Beware that thy tongue does not cut thy neck.
o J, .<3 -a
Verily beauty is a misery.
7/" thou deceivest him whom thou seest, he whom thou dost not see., will deceive thee.
<? J ^ O J ,- ^
If thou art a liar be of good memory. 17
258 PROVERBS.
■7- ^\ lJ^.^ ^^^\ J
Love is the companion of blindness.
o - % - -t
8. . ^j^ j^\ \^'^
He punished me for the fault of another.
9. . iI^iT jL^ J
Verily walls have ears.
s^S 'o- jjo^ i-^o
When the madman says I will throw at thee, prepare a plaister.
•J "o.^ — ""o.«o
TFA^yi the Jew grows poor he looks into his old accounts.
■o i --6-0 •» o^
12. • «>i*J cT* e^^ J^ ^ «>^ /S'owi^ misfortunes are lighter than others.
13. • ,^^5 ^ JjoL> XjJjJ^ ^ 77^^ c/w7</ is kissed for the sake of its nurse.
14. .^olAsil J^ ZJUW ^j^> Thou comparest angels with jailers.
15. . c-'j'^^ ^ S-^ u^^^ "^ ^
The heart of a wolf under the skin of a sheep.
PROVERBS. 259
Be kindred hy love and put no trust in Mn.
O-'O,^ JO •» OS>«<3
.17. . dJLSXA^ \ ;_f.-> ^JOuU) 1
Good management is the half of a livelihood.
18. .ciJUll <-^^*'^ V^ 7%^ fruit of self-love is hatred.
19. .j^^ ^ J ^j^ ^ ^^.sd \ 'ij^ The fruit of timidity is neither gain nor loss.
20. . JJyS^ ^ L5^ -J^ -? iji,'^ ^ ^ ^^ Adhere to your friend though he be in the flames.
21. . .^a 1 <W.^ 1^) • j^*- jS. 1
The freeman is free though misfortune assail him.
22. .*j-> ^jJ^ J\ i^, ^j^\ j^
The heat of the sum makes us sit down in a had place.
23. SJn ^ -iuiT
- i> -
Modesty is a part of religion.
24. • ^U4 ^ '^'.^ u='j^ ^
Avarice is the leader of disappointment.
17—2
260 PROVERBS.
. V ^ ^ ' O^
25. . uJU^ \j tjJu^ \ P liij (•J^ I The wise man contents himself with a sufficiency.
^ ^ ^ — ^ ^ o ^o-^ " ^ ^ '^ -So' '^ \ '^
26. . j-AJJ Ut js,. jox] 1 J j_^ Ul Ju^ ysil
7%^ freeman when desirous of any thing is a slave^ and the slave when contented is free.
27. .Jji u ^ JiT
Truth is the best that can ever be said.
28. .ijc- il fb Julif ^w?;?/ ^s a disease that can never be cured.
^i. O J^O ' Oo
29. '^1> Sj^ Jj\j^
The best among you is he who is best to his family.
7%6i Jg5^ of men is he who rejoices in the good of others.
31. .xiij) <_51y& uJll^
Constrain your inclinations, and you v:ill be conducted well.
32. . <)d] 1 jJc^< Uw ^^ 1 Good is in that which God does.
33. ■ ^y^j ^-\A\ J'Jtc fj^ ^ Submission to necessity is the duty of man.
PROVERBS. 261
34. .u^Kll ^ JJ^\ ^^\ iUj
The blood of Icings cures the madness of dogs.
■ o J -»^ oj: JO -ci -o
35. . JUUW>.<: Jjjl jJijJ'
jTtm^ ^0^5 so/V/y aw^ finishes all things.
S- t3
36. . ;_C=^ ^oJj' J L-5^1 '-^ <-r^
Sometimes he is your brother whom your mother did not hear.
37. . (•lUl \ jyi^ ^^ ^ :^jj:l\\ ^\j
The counsel of an old man is better than the presence of a young one.
i^O*" -»
38. . Iwj s^y '3^ <— ^ Speed sometimes makes delay.
39. .uiT ^j^ j-i J*3^ C'j
J. slipper is sometimes worse than a naked foot.
Silence is often an answer.
41. . <ujy 1 J ^J^ J-^^
Send a wise messenger and give him no orders.
42. .^ i! J iu ^j\
I see a heavy cloud but there is no rain.
262 PROVERBS.
^-C o '^ i<-»
43. • Ltju ijL,..jLi li\^ i-jj A single word sometimes destroys fator.
44. . jjLuS ^j^ -iwial <— ^ '-r^
-A glance of the eye sometimes says more than the tongue.
45. -j-aJs J\ u^a^. ^ c^j
^ ^ ' ^
-4«/ance sometimes leads to disgrace.
46. .4—5^ uJ-*^ 4_^A:^S1 jIj^ Ujj 7%e fool who wishes to serve you, often injures you.
47. • S\y^ A-jW <Uji.Al ^j\j C_-^
5e o/i5ew so^05 for himself while another reaps.
48. .j-iJ^ ^ iUl jjj
The goodness of God not your labour.
-,= ^ i-
49. . ij^ ^ ^^:JJ ^ ij^\j
Knowledge is the head of religion.
TFar is o/iJew kindled hy a single word.
--o "' ■Si-'
51. . I— Jl? C>«sl t^.'skf. <_^
There is sometimes ruin under ichat ice seek.
PROVERBS. 263
^- - - -
In the eye of his father the son is always handsome.
53.
Visit seldom you will increase love.
54. . Sjski ^^ ^ JuucJ \
He is happy who is taught by the example of another.
55. . U1jc*.j ^y^j" liljJii l^j^\
Quickly seek you will quickly find.
^ \ti ^ ^
56. '^^^^- ^ ^S^ c>U
He who asks of God will tiot be deceived.
57. . U-i. Jlk^^ 1 ^^^ jyuult
^ woisy cat catches no mice.
58. -r!/^^ ^i>^^ V^^^
Dovht is sister of the unlawful.
59. . ^ 1 ^y^- u;:'.'^^ ^ •— ^ ' L5' J-^^
Consult in your affairs those who fear God.
77i^ wors# o/ men is he who does not heed men seeing his vnckedness.
264 PROVERBS.
O-iO -*> **''
61. .^\ i^ji ^y>^ lJ^\ Youth is a madness, old age is its cure.
62. .<uj iS^, ^ J^^^ The devil does not destroy Ms own vineyard.
63. .l)^\ Ai!>\ ^~r^. c:--*^^^ Silence procures love for those icho keep it.
64. . <rya>' t__>^(iv_JJ^ J j£ ^jd^\ Truth is honor and falsehood vileness.
65. . r/S^ ^ ^Iaxo jxA \ Patience is the hey of pleasure.
66. .^H!^ ^^ ^U^ uJ^l ^J XcUJ\ ^r# in the hand is safety from poverty.
67. • J^^T ^^ JJ^\ J> 7%e ^gw^#/i of the tongue shortens life.
68. • iLu*.*U- <x*JjJ? *oUl t
Custom is a fifth nature.
69. . ^J \ J^ jUxxl
The anger of lovers is like a spring rain.
PROVERBS. 265
70. . <iiw ^ JjUI \ U;--^ ^ "^y ^ <-^W^ ^ C_-V^
7%^ wrath of the fool in words, and the anger of the wise in deeds.
71. . ^\}ax\ \ ^Jy^j ^ j^ J-^ \ J^
The dust of labour is letter than the saffron of idleness.
72. . ^U ^Uj ^Ji J^
- - ■ - V
Every dog harJcs at his own door.
73. . aj ^_^^ to <uj ^ t^^ ^ J^ /k e»^ry maw there is what may he attacked.
74. . Jdj" ^_jO" U^ As you 'pay so you shall be paid.
75. . ^b 1^ ^ .^joj ^ t_Jj^l t J'i^e dfo^ does not hark at one in his house.
76. . Jul ^(L j£s Every place has its speech.
77. . c-4-^. -'Xi^ ^y.lT Jx' ,^5 iVb c^OM(? ^«<^« the light of the sun.
78. .c-^KlT^bu M^^T^. iJ 7%e harking of dogs does not injure the clouds.
266 proverbs.
79. .^^ ^ Uj ^_5^; ^
Praise not that which you knoio not.
/ will not do this till a camel goes through the eye of a needle.
81. . jJiT ^^ j\j j^ j\j 1
There is no rest when the lion roars.
82. . Sas. ^ ^^^- t"^- ^ Two swords cannot he in one sheath.
83. . JuJ^T l\ JojilT ji[ i! /row 25 ow?y C2^if hy iron.
Z)o %o^ ifAw^ yoM are safe from a fool while he has a sword in his hand.
~o i o-
85. .a) ^ p\ ^ ^jU \ JLj ^
Z)o %o^ qiiestion one who wants help, but look to his condition.
86. .j>\i ^ j^s»- ^i-v. ^ Caution is vain against the decree of God.
87. . ^J.^■ ^ J ^;^'^t-^" ^ Neither lie nor he like one tcho lies.
PROVERBS. 267
■$ *»o -^ ■^ «C
88. . ^W ^ J <d) ! ^^ i^jx\ \ c»^j^jJ i! Benevolence passes not away between God and man.
89. .^.j^ll cJC^ 1^^ ^^^ ^^ ^
Z)o wo^ ^Aiw^ you are safe from the prince when the Vazir hates you.
^e 2cAo is not afflicted hy what he loses keeps his mind tranquil.
91. . l^ jJj l\yi^ jA^ ^ He who digs a pit falls into it.
o
92. . «U3 lii; ^o Jk) ^ ^^ w^o «70a/'s a long shirt treads upon it.
93. .Ul^ j^l ^^j^n ^_^ ^^ ^(3 who fears the wolf procures a dog.
94. . <5J JJo (^_^1 ! *— 2:^-^ J-' ^j^
^e wAo draws the sword of injustice shall he killed by it.
95. . J^ <^\j) ^:^\ ^J^ He who admires his own council errs.
96. . Jj <ui*j i5.**J^ ^ ^r*
ZTg who is content with his own knowledge falls.
268 PROVERBS.
97. . ^Xj tc »-/♦-: «w*juJ ij^
/fig who listens hears what displeases him.
98. .jJd jj J cJ^ c^v.*^. (J J J^^ liT*
iETf? w^o spends and does not reckon, loses and does not know.
99. .^iU.i!i ^]; I^l3 ^^ i?^ who sleeps sees dreams.
100. .yCuJ ^ (.Va"*- (_Jj Jt^l 1 CjJ j^
.5(3 wAo SOWS benevolence reaps thanks.
The following Extracts have been chosen as Examples of the plain and simple style, in which the Arabian Chronicles are usually written, and are printed without the vowel- points, to supply which will be a useful exercise to the learner.
.->- '^ • — -^ I ■
^Zsf ^^ *^^f^^ V <-)^- '^-j^- ^^^ ^.^^^ ^\S^ ^-^ -? j^l (^ (jwU!^ ^'^ t^*^ J j^V eJ^^^^^ J cT^^'^*^^^
701;. ^t*>l
....AC
v_y*J^ cUcwJ Ji^ CU^ (_^ly ^ ;j.,^A^n ui^^s^h J^J>^\ ^
270 EXTRACTS.
^ ^^^yj^ J.*sr <• t^LiDJ Xajlsi^ ^-^^ _j ^ U>M y& bli
^lUJl J ^^J\j ^.ys^l (jUU5\ L_ijj J I I— flj\j J *-r^b c;:^^ J\ axjuj lyl^ J (^!J^ U^:^^^ ^\'^\ lJsj j Jl^ls^l (»iij . t J»-.-\ t_J^^ ^'^ J U^^ (♦'^^ '— '^-^^ ^J^ l**^^
ci^-aaII j (. v_^>£»-Us. ^_U*ju<j "i^J^^J^- (*^ J u-^5 j*^ t—jls?'!
JjuJ L^- ^;1-: lill ^.fJ^vJj J <LjUo ^Afr AiiijV*.!^ j^LJl iJ^jl^ ^_ jiLc J M^-*^^ lUuull (C^l^ J (LUyUA^ J Ull ^,*yai ^^1 ^U&JU)
EXTRACTS. 271
J ■<'«>£^^ cf;*'*^^ ^J^^^ ^J^. ^^'♦^^ ^^ j^^ ^y ^^ J
J «_mJ &X^ jIjoc Ji^j J . I^Li) by! Ullc ^ J ^ if*^^
272 EXTRACTS.
J^ l^ Jiu:l ^ ^L Jj!>^ ^ ij.!\j ^\^ J ^J^\ 11^- ^^
i>yij i'1^1 f-j5JJ' J ^tcUJ\ j_j-AX< 1^ 03 jT^o^J^ (♦V.^ (^ Ijlsr^ .j^i^j ^ (jM^^ JU^l j^^^/K^i. ^^ ^ , <VjJ cr^ '^1?'^^ cJ^j
EXTRACTS. 273
*~r''*^ iJif iiT* Cv ^^ iij;^^*^'*^ J ^. Li/^. ^^ 7^ llT* vJjLcj
c_^vlai t)lc J ^}^'\ \^. ^J, ^_J^^ \pi\ i^ ^5 aJ ^j^j^^ ^
IjjJiij Uli ; Itlto ^>^ by? u-^JJ ;^U1! j^^^-oJ ^Jiji\ ^J
ill <ui J,»j«j e^^l e^jl^ Ui ciJu: iutLjj ^^ y^ls? alia] jjij
L^jU *];^l ^* ^^j^ u^ j^^^ ^^ ^^i-^ J ^_5^
* From— ^i 18
274 EXTRACTS.
J ^\j^^ (*iA^ f;!/^^ cA*^ cT* u^ ^ '— ^'^ cJ^ ' ^^^
J^ ^> ,X4o^l ^> XKS^ (-4^^^' ^-^^ Jv'-V^ "^J^' cT*
^t aa«w* J Jli .. ^^jJl JV ^-^^ ^'^ ^r^^ i^-^i^^
EXTRACTS. 275
pyU- i^jU ^c ^ . (yl> JcR.' lyli Jj) ^jli ^ ^li .LkjUr'l
t j4^1 J ^l_) yJl ^ UA/'J-V^^ ^ J ' c;>i'^ l5^*^- t*^J^ ^>"^ J J^'^ i (^^'^^:^*^ 1*^^ ""^^ CJ:^^ t-5jl< y (^ J ^ J^ U^i^ >r^^' <■ ^^^ J^j^ ^ tJJ J^
(^ '^^ J U^ lT'J^ V^-jj K:^^^ L5*^' vT^^^ o'^^ J c>^
l^Wli , U^"js«^u^ ^ i^^y^^ j^*" jjk^. iuliio ^1 ^\
^^\ ^^1 ^U:!l Jl ^^1 ^^..\ Uli .J_^./i^l ^131^1
^M ^U J^ /3l J y^s^\ 3 ^U/1^ ^y ^ilj^ ^U
r^^ J u^ u^^ ^^ l*^ ^^^'^ ^.-r- ^* ^^^ ^^
18—2
276 RXTRACTS.
J t lJ3j 1^1 *^V^ <• '^V^ L/^ Li^ ^.^^. U^ 3 -^svLall
jU J ttUa J ^U ^jj ^- J ^U ^ ^j^A J e;^:i^
J <. ^ILc^ ^sr? J^t^ ^^^jl-^ ajjo j^ <r-^^ ^^ J >\^.ac:«
EXTRACTS. 277
-sLiJi u-^"l^ j^jixLaJ ^^11 J>V^ f'^'-J^ {J^ -J ••'' lOrl*^^ J%" J ^^ (C,.^ ^ ^ J,^\ aAJUH j^ytJuJ^ ,^^*uJJl ^^jJl JiU-
ajlJi Jac jjlu^' ^ ^.♦.js?' ^ULxJj^j:^ ^J\ j^'^\ j^^mJuil 4XKsr*
^ 2^li> ^jl ^^d\\ (.«^^L5 yjJj J1 (j^J^jtc J li)^!/*" J (VJ^y" l^y J J^l it^ ^ <C_^ u:^j ^\ ^ J t i(4>yc Jj <d*5-
j\ytl^ ^y J c ^^J^^ c:^^J^' <^ J i(ll^" ij^jJl '-^^ *^j
278 EXTRACTS.
J .c:^y f*^. Jj^ ^ Vj^/^- ^ c;:^>r^ -J "^ «-H" J
^^ ^J^ ^jy* i.::--^ c:->j\^ j <■ uJ^*^. ^y cr* ^ i^
Ljj^ ^Li> >ia*j t uJ^vJl ^^ uX«*^. JtI^^ u^^ c^" ''^"'^^Ij
i— fl^aJuu c^Jo J [^j J ^U^ CUIj i^i^li J g ''>i:A*~ 'V**'^ *^ UU) Joe J JJull j^ i)>**^ C>ol^ J Jllal\ ^ AjUsuil
EXTRACTS. 279
c:^.4«aL:1 ^.Jk^lcj I ^^^IWl -sluJ ^^ ^\^" jJl ^^jJl J bjjJt
JjSJ ^ J^^3^ ^-^ ^^^ J^ (^ (Jjd\j^ SjUjS. j.^3»^i aUiuJ JOi
Jujo- <il i-::^^^ ^^^ J <. ^.J^^:*^ Jj^ ,^_;J O^ ^S'^ uj^.
280 EXTRACTS.
<UjJJy iU^ J=^l t-^i (Jj^ <■ t:^^^>^^ "-r^. ciT* cA'. (^ J SUi\ ^J%\J Lclc Jj^XmW J ^J:>^^ J^ tj^:'. U^ J '"^^
^jjI <u11?1 to j-j^'^ ^_5-i«l ^jy.jJl JV ^^ [Jy ^ <• J^r^^^ J (ji;>jU)^ 4^ ^^ ty.s:* ^^,jJl j_;*-«-i ^iiu-i J il\A\ uJ3j
t 40 i^^ U HdJiC ^ J J I ^^^!^\ AtXJU j_^_ii*n <-r^/i^ . ^IJ^^ Lv)!'^^^^. ^^^-^-ii^ J L/^^^ i-ijl«< u^^ '''^V (J^
^_^^ JV MjV -^^^ ji J ^1 ^^ c_y> jj j*j^!y. J!
EXTRACTS. 281
^^ ^\ J Uj^ ^.jJl JiU Jj . ^\ \^ JU J ^:>^\
^.jJl JiU ^\ jj . byi J L^:U*11 jjly ^ ILJl ;^.ls:r _« ^ ^ i^_J>!l JLv. ^^1 ^^^^ J ij|^ 1\as>. J^ uJill
jLJ^ c-i3j Jji.1 ^ J <UAj J j^>jJl JL- ^5^ ^ ,^jj\
282 EXTRACTS.
J i^rnU>>- ^>>l^ *^*.' J jUj^ c_;lSj ^^.^^ J*;^ uJ!^^ <X*Jj^
iUUi Jl i^ijJ^ ^ M Jiii ^.J.11 JV J j*^ <■ Jj^ ^^. J^y^ Sj^SA!i\ h>\j ^ jjSW ^y^\ ^ J i ^ ^'^ _} ^J^<^J^ p^ls , Hjxi \^js. ^_ ^^ ^ \'s^ ^ , i^j>\ J i^jAjJ
o ^ c ^
(•j« , ^j^. jjj , JjW^ i_^U]l ^^ lJ/.^1 ^5l«J^ Jos^
«JaAj J (jwU^ j^jti ^U:^ \J^ Js^ _. aLU^ t_Aj" ^-^ J ^jj^ t c-jU^ ^^o <ii^ ^ ^ iUi j»y^ ^ ^ ^ 3
EXTRACTS. 283
Ji3L^. »-^^^' ^ '^^ ij^;^J iiT*"^^ ^^■'^ J^ J '>r^^ Juai J U^J^ t— j^l "^J^ rl'^" ^^J^ J Xu^s'l ij^ ^U>>-
^^ ^^.^j.!^ J^ jyJl Ul J , ^-J^ UU Jy-^^ J c)^^^ ^Ji i^jU jjJO*!^ ^-'^ ^^ ^:;:^i.'^^* ti/ ^r* ^'^'-^ l5^^ J^
^]/1 aj J t_5'vAi) Jjc^ J^ ^^jJ^ JL- c-^i I I'.yiSi
AJ^»- ajCo J tJ'^ (^/^i-S!^ J*^^ ' (__$lAJi» id U jLLs-^ iS}^^ lJ^
AGj (^l^ _j .. ^^UxH J ^llJl |^_^ l^^j^ ^y-i-jl ^i^\ Jl>- ^\^ U J.^ ^^^ ^^aL^ ^X>]J\ e^vlC; ^L^ ^. .. U\ Lw,U!b
284 EXTRACTS.
AjJ\ uil^ ,^1 S"^. (J^ J t ^'^^ ^^ ^=^ «j^^ '^ (^
Jwtf^^ (---r^L. c-^'lS' 1 Jl ,^\^ J <. i^Jc-j <!dJl ^ L^l ''^J^l^' yi^ J^ J ^ ^^\ -^^^^ ^'^^ U^ J J^ J J\ ^.<^\
Extracts from the Chronicle of the Sultan Al Malik As Sdlih Imdd ud din Abii 7 Fadd Ismail.
And in this, I mean the year 180, and it is said the year 177, died Sibuyah the grammarian, in a village called Baidha, one of the villages near Shiraz. And l^s name was Sibuyah Anu*u ibn Othman ibn Kmibar; he was more learned in gram- mar than any who have preceded, or followed him, and all the books of men upon grammar, are nothing to the book of Sibuyah. He studied in the school of Khalil ibn Ahmad. And when he died his age was more than 40 years. It is also said that he died at Basrah in the year 161. Abu'l Faraj al Juzi however relates that Sibuyah died in the year 194, and that he was 32 years old ; and that he died in the city of Sawah. Khalib Baghdad relates, on the authority of Ibn Duraid, that Sibuyah died at Shiraz, and that his tomb is there. Sibuyah was his cognomen; this is a Persian word, and its meaning in Arabic is, "the odour of apples;" and it is said, that he was so called, because he was handsome of countenance, and as if his two cheeks were two apples. Between him and Kasai was the well-known dispute on the words, " I thought the sting of a scorpion worse than the sting of a wasp." Sibuyah maintained that this (the
word sting) was in the nominative (,<^)j and Kasai maintained
that it was in the accusative (l&VJ)j and the Khahf decided in
favor of Kasai, and Sibuyah bore great distress from this, and he left Irak, and travelled to the neighbourhood of Shiraz, and died there.
286 EXTRACTS.
And in this (year) came ambassadors from the King of Rum to Baghdad ; and when they were presented, the army was drawn out, and the palace was decorated with armour, and arms, and various ornaments ; and the whole army was drawn up in the order of battle. There were then 160,000 cavalry and infantry; and the pages of the palace were drawn out, splendidly dressed, and wearing costly girdles ; and the eunuchs were drawn up in the same way, and of these there were 7000 ; 4000 white and 3000 black, and the chamberlains in attendance were 700 ; and there were vessels and boats on the Tigris, splendidly decorated ; and the palace of the Khalif was riclJy ornamented. There were 38,000 veils (or pieces of tapestry) suspended; 12,600 of these were interwoven with gold ; and there were 22,000 rich carpets laid down. And there were there 100 lions, with their 100 keepers. But among the ornaments there was a tree of gold and silver, containing 18 branches, and on the branches and twigs, were birds of various sorts of gold and silver ; the leaves were also of gold and silver ; and the branches waved by certain springs, and the birds sang by springs disposed there also ; and the ambassador testified his astonishment at the magnificence that was displayed ; and he was presented to the (Khalif) Muktadir, and the vazir interpreted his words to the Khalif, and retiu-ned him the Khalif 's answer.
And in this (year) died Abu'l Ola Ahmad ibn Sulaiman al Moarri the blind. He was about 86 years old. There is a dif- ference about his blindness; but the truth is, tliat he became blind in his childhood from the small pox ; he was then a child of three years old. The other report is, that he was born blind. He was most learned in philology and poetry. And he entered Baghdad in the year 399 ; and resided there one year and seven
EXTRACTS. 287
months ; and he associated with the learned, but Abul Ola did not become the disciple of any one in particular. Then he re- turned to Moarra, and resided in his own house, while the world proclaimed his glor}', and liis poems and sayings \\ere repeated eveiywhere ; by these is known the coiTuption of his faith ; and his perversion to the sect of the Hindus is kno^^■n by his ab- staining for 45 years from the eating of meat or eggs, and the drinking of milk; he held it imlawfiU to injure any li\ing thing; his wi'itings were very numerous, and his infidehty appears in them ; but he pretended that there was a secret sense in his writings, and that he was spiritually a Muslim.
And in this (year) died the Shaikh ar Raiis ibn Ali Alhu- sain ibn Abdallah ibn Sina al Bukhari. His father was a native of Balkh, who removed from thence to Bukhara in the time of the Amir Nuh ibn Mansur as-Samani ; he then married a woman of the village of Afsanah, and resided there, and the Shaikh Ar Eaiis was born there, as well as his brother, and the Eaiis read through the Koran when he was a boy of 10 years old. And he studied the pliilosophy of Ali ibn AbdaUah an-Natuli, and he went tln-ough Euclid, and the Almagest, and applied liimself to medicine, and completed all these studies when he was a youth of 18, and was still at Bukhara ; then he removed from thence to Km-kanj, and this in Arabic is Jm-janiyah ; then he journeyed hither and thither, till he came to Jurjan ; then Ibn Abdallah Al Jurjam attached himself to him, and was the greatest of the companions of the said Shaikh ar Eaiis. Then he removed to Rai and entered the service of Majd ad daulali ibn Falikr ad daulah ibn Ihusain Ali ibn Eukn ad daulah ibn Buyah. Then he was in the service of Shams al Maali Kabus ibn Waslunagir.
288 EXTRACTS.
He then left him, and went to Ala ad daulah ibn Kawih at Isfahan, and was much preferred by him. Then the said Raiis became ill with the epilepsy and cholic, and he neglected medi- cine, and he went to Hamadan, and became ill and died there. He was 58 years old ; his writings and great accomplishments are well known. AI Ghazali accuses Ibn Sina of infidelity, and openly charges him with it in his book called The Deliverer from Error. In the same way he charges with infidelity Abu Nasr al Farabi; some however believe, that Ibn Sina returned to the true faith. The Raiis Abu Ali aforesaid, in the first part of the fifth section of his book Of the Nature of Medicines^ writes thus. Among the events that came to my knowledge, in the country of Jurjan in our time, was that of a substance weigh- ing perhaps 150 mina, w-hicli fell from the air, and struck into the ground, then rebounded hke a ball repelled by a wall ; it then returned and fixed in the ground. Some people on the spot hearing at the same time a loud and terrible sound, and when they sought to find out its nature they were unable to do so, and they carried it to the Governor of Jurjan, and the Sultan of Khurasan Mahmud ibn Sabaktagin wrote to liim, that he should send it to him, or should send a portion of it; and he excused himself from sending it on account of its weight ; and they sought the breaking of a portion from it, and there was no diminution made in it but with great labor, and all the imple- ments that were used upon it were broken ; but they divided, at last, a piece from it, and sent it to him, and he desired that a sword should be made of it, which was done with great difiiculty ; and it is related that the whole of this substance was composed of little round particles like millet, adhering together; and Al Fakili Abd al Wahid al Jurjam, my companion, was the wit- ness of this.
EXTRACTS. 289
History of the Invasion of the Tatars.
In this year the Tatar invasion occurred, and their attack of the Muslims, who never indured greater distress than what they suffered this year ; for at that time it was that the Franks accom- pHshed the conquest of Damietta, with the slaughter and captivity of its inhabitants.
But the greatest affliction was the invasion of the Tatars, and their conquest in a short space of time, of the greatest por- tion of the territories of the Muslims, the spilling of their blood, and the taking captive their females and their childi'en. The Mushms never suffered from the first rise of Islam such di-eadful adversity.
It was in this year that they marched against Ala ad din Muhammad * Khwarizmshah ibn Takash, and they crossed the river Sihun, and with them was their king Jangizkhan, May the most high God curse him ! and they took Bukhara by capitula- tion, on the 4th of Dzul hijjah of this year, but the citadel held out, and they besieged and took it, and they slew eveiy one that was in it. Then they butchered the people of the surrounding territories, unto the very last of them.
Extract from the History of the Invasion of the Tatars;
the ivork of Muhammad ibn Ahmad ibn Ali al Munshi^ an Nasawi Secretary of Jaldl ad din. He says thus.
The kingdom of China is of vast extent; its circmnference a six month's journey. From ancient times it has been divided into
* Pronounce " Karizm," as in the Persian word " Khwajah,' commonly written "Coja," a merchant.
19
290 EXTRACTS.
six parts, each part a month's journey in extent, and each is governed by a Khan (which in their language means a king,) in turn governed by the great Khan, And the great Khan, with whom Khwarizmshah Muhammad ibn Takash was cotemporary, was called Altun Khan, he had inherited the power of Khan by hereditar}- right, great prince after great prince ; (verily infidel after infidel) and the usual abode of the Klian was at Tughaj, which is in the centre of China. And among them (the Khans) at the time aforesaid, was a person named Tushi Khan; and he was one of the Khans, ruler of one of the six divisions. And he had married the aunt of Jangizklian the accursed. And the tribe of Jangizklian, the accursed, was the well known tribe Tamargai, inhabiting the deserts, and their winter quarters were a place called Arghun. And they were well known among the Tatai-s for their wickedness and perfidy. And the kings of China did not relax the reins of their bridle on account of their per\'er- sity. And it happened that Tushi Khan who had married the aunt of Jangizklian died, and Jangizkhan went to his aunt visiting, and consoling. And there were two Khans residing near the pro- vince of the aforesaid Tushi Khan deceased on either side. And the widow of Tushi Khan sent an ambassador to KaslJu Khan and the other Khan, announcing the death of her husband Tushi Khan, and that he had left no son, reminding them how good a neighbour he had been to them, and that she wished to put her brother's son Jangizklian in his place, that he might occupy the seat of the deceased by their assistance. And the two Khans aforesaid agreed to this ; and when this news came to the great Khan Altun Khan, he disapproved the appointment of Jangizldian to the government, and despised him, and disapproved the con- duct of the two Khans ; and when that news came to them, they threw off obedience to Altun Khan, and every member of tJieir
EXTRACTS. 291
tribes was collected around them, and they fought with Altun Khan. And he turned his back and fled, and they took pos- session of his territories. Then Altun Khrin sent an ambassador and requested peace, and that they would leave him a portion of his territories, and they consented to that ; and Jangizkhan, and the two other Khans, remained associated together in alliance. And the death of one Khan happened ; and Jangizklian and Kashlu Khan remained in greater power. Then Kaslilu Khan died, and his son (and he was also named Kashlu Khan) occu- pied his place, and Jangizkhan conceived that the government of Kashlu Khan ibn Kaslilu Khan was weak on account of his childhood, and the youth of his age, and he violated the treaties which had been established between him and the father of Kashlu Khan. And Kashlu Khan was left alone to oppose Jangizldian. And Jangizkhan, with his son Tushi Khan ibn Jangizkhan di-ew out his army, and Kashlu Khan fled, and Tushi Khan pm'sued him, and slew him, and returned to Jangizklian with his head. And Jangizkhan was now alone in power. Then he sent an ambassador to Khwarizmshah Muhammad ibn Takash, but they disagreed, and Jangizkhan collected his armies, and marched against Khwarizmshah Muhammad, and Khwarizmshah was de- feated, and Jangizkhan conquered the coimtries of Mawara annalu* ; then he pursued Khwarizmshah, who fled from before him, until he embarked upon the sea of Tabai-istan (the Caspian sea,) and Jangizkhan subdued all those countries. Then happened between Khwarizmshah and Jangizklian that which we ^vill relate, if it please the most high God.
19 — 2
292 EXTRACTS.
Account of the day'iug of Jaldl ad din.
And when the Tatars had subdued Azarbijjin Jalal ad din went to Diyar bakr, that he might joiu*ney to the Khahf, that he might take refuge ^^^th him, and might implore help against the Tatars from the kings of those parts, and that he might alarm them with the probable termination of their command. And he encamped in the neighbourhood of Amid ; but he made no alliance*, and the Tatars attacked him by night, and penetrated his camp, and Jalal ad din fled. And all this is extracted from the history of the invasion of the Tatars, the work of An Nasawi, the secretary of Jalal ad din, under the date of the year 616. Whatever we have selected and have learned of the history of Khwarizm shah Muhammad, and his son Jalal ad din (is from that work,) and the said secretary was with liim, and on this account no one was better informed than he, on all concerning the affairs of Jalal ad din. And the aforesaid Muhammad al Munshi says, that Khwarizmshah Muliammad ibn Takash, was of great power, and his kingdom of vast extent ; and he had four sons, among whom he divided his teiTitories. The eldest of them was Jalal ad din Mankbami, and he gave to him the kingdom
* This line JuJ.^ l^UU j IjJ ^y^ y2\ ^ i\ y«^. J j
appears to be corrupted ; I hesitate, however, to change a text which has passed under the eye of so great a scholar, and acute a critic, as Reiske ; those who are acquainted with his editions of the " Oratores Graeci," and "Dionysius Halicarnassensis," are aware, that he was by no means timid in his emendations ; his translation here, of what appears to me to be somewhat obscure, is this. " Interea vero dum haec consiliis versat et molitur, opprimebant ipsum Tatari de nocte derepente in castra penetrantes."
EXTRACTS. 293
of Ghaznah, and Bamian, and Ghur, and Bost, and Takabad, and Zamirdawir, and the adjoining parts of India ; and he gave Khwarizm, and Khurasan, and Mazandaran, to his son Kutb ad dm XJzlagh shah, and appointed him the heir of his empire ; then at a later time he removed him from the succession to the empire, and gave it to Jah'd ad din Mankbarni ; and he gave Karman, and Kish, and Makran, to his son Ghayat ad din Tatarshah, whose history has been given before ; and he gave Irak to his son Rukn ad din Ghiirshah Yahya, and he was the fairest of all his sons, both in person and disposition ; and the Tatars slew him after the death of his father. And the *Naubat was beaten for each of them at the five hours of prayer, according to the custom of the Saljukian kings ; and their father Khwarizmshah Muhammad reserved for himself, as his Naubat, the march of Dzu '1 karnain (t Alexander the Great) which was played twice, that is, at sun- rise and sun-set, and there were twenty-seven drums of gold set with jewels. Such was the order of the Naubat. And twenty-seven kings played in the band, when the Naubat was beaten at the beginning of the day ; and they were great kings, sons of Sultans, among them was Tughril ibn Arslan the Saljukain ; and the sons of Ghayat ad din, the prince of Ghiir ; and Al Malik Ala ad din, the prince of Bamian ; and Al Malik Taj ad din, the prince of Balkh, and his son Al Malik al Aazim, the prince of Tarmad ; and Al Malik Sanjar, prince of Bukhara, and others like them. And the mother of Khwarizmshah Muhammad was Turkan Khatun,
* The " Naubat" is the music played at the five hours of prayer, at the gates of the palaces of Eastern Princes.
+ Dzu '1 Karnain, or " with the two horns", is the title given to Alexander the Great : no doubt from his effigies upon the Greek medals appearing with the horns of Jupiter Ammon.
294 EXTRACTS.
of the tribe of Babawut, which is one of the tribes of Yamsak ; she was the daughter of one of their kings, and Takash ibn Arslan ibn Atsiz ibn Muhammad ibn Anushtagmi Ghurshah married her ; and ^^ hen the kingdom came to her son Muhammad ibn Takash, the tribes of Yamsak among the Tm-ks obeyed Turkan Khatun, and the state of her son Sultan Muhammad was much increased in power by them, and her son never conquered any territory without setting apart a fair portion of it as her private estate ; and she was much revered and of great wisdom; and she dealt out strict justice to the injured against the unjust, and was very severe ; and her power was so great, that wherever two letters came, one from her, and one from her son the Sultan Muhammad, their date was examined, and the orders in the last of the two were performed. And the superscription of her letters was " The refuge of the World and of the Faith, Olagh TurJcdn, the Queen of created women,'''' and her motto was " M^ refuge is in God alone.'''' And the afore- said author says, that then Khwarizmshah Muhammad fled from the Tatars to Ma wara annahr, and crossed the Jaihun, and went to Khurasan ; and the Tatars pursued him, and he fled from thence to Irak al Ajam, and he stopped at Bistam ; he brought with him ten chests, which he said were filled %vith jewels, whose value was unknown ; and he pointed to two of them, which he said contained what was equal to a year''s income of the whole world. He com- manded that they should be earned to the castle of Azdahan, which is among the most impregnable castles of the world, and that a receipt should be taken from the governor of it, for the arrival of the said chests, with their seals unbroken. The Tatars how- ever followed the Sultan Muhammad, and he went on board a boat (on the Caspian sea,) and the Tatars came up, and shot their arrows after him ; and he escaped from them, but sickness came on him, and he was attacked with the pleurisy. And he
EXTRACTS. 295
came to an island in that sea, and remained there a solitary exile destitute of all ; and his ilhiess increased, and some of the people of Mazandaran brought him provisions, and what he was in want of. And one day he said, '• I wish tliat I had a horse which could feed round my tent," for they had pitched a small tent for him ; and they brought him a bay horse. And this Sultan Muhammad liad once had tliirty thousand studs of hoi*ses. And while in this state, for whatever was brought to him of pronsions or such hke, he gave something in return, but he had no one with him who could write for him, and he made the man who brought him any tiling write a deed of gif^, and he gave, as if things of no consequence, his signatm-e to the gift of countries and great wealth ; and when his son Jalal ad din obtained power, he confirmed all that his father had given by deeds or by seals. AVhile in this condition in the island, death seized the Sultan, and the Chaush Shams ad din Malmiud ibn Balagh, and Mukarrab ad din, the chief of the seiTants of the bedchamber, washed the corpse ; and they had no winding sheet ; and its place was sup- plied by his shirt.; and he was bm-ied in the island in the year 617. He whose gate had been the refuge of the kings of the earth, the great ones of which had served in his palace courts, and had been proud to kiss the ground before him ; and manv who had been his servants or attendants arrived at royal dignity.
Thex Jalal ad din, after the death of his father the Sultan Muhammad, in the island, went to Khwarizm still fleeing from the Tatars ; he went to Ghaznah, and from thence to India, and Janorizkhan overtook him at the river Indus; and a battle was fought on .Wednesday morning the 8tli of the month of Shawr^al of the year 61 8 : and at first the battle went against Jangizkhan,
296 EXTRACTS.
but then turned against Jalal ad din, and night came over them ; and Jalal ad din fled, and his son, a child of seven or eight years old, was taken captive, and he was mm'dered in cold blood in the presence of Jangizkhan. And ^^'hen Jalal ad din fled to the banks of the river Indus, he saw his mother but not his son. And all the females of his haram cried out, "-//i the name of God! In the name of God! Mil us, or save us from captivity.'''' And he commanded, and they were dro\^■ned. This was one of the wonders of afiliction, and one of the most overwhelming of misfortimes and sorrows ! And Jalal ad din and his army plunged into this great river, and about four thousand escaped to the other side, naked and shoeless. And the waves threw Jalal ad din, together with three of his private attendants, on a distant spot ; and his friends sought him for three days, and continued wandering in search of him, and straying in the desert of anxiety, till Jalal ad din joined them : then he went forth and there were battles between him and the people of those countries, and Jalal ad din conquered, and reached Labor in India. And when he proposed to return to Irak, he appointed Pahlawan Uzbak to govern his territories in India ; and along with him he appointed Hasan Karak, and gave him the title of Wafa al Mulk. And in the year 627 Wafa al Mulk expelled Pahlawan Uzbak, and made himself master of all those parts of India that Pahlawan governed. Jalal ad din went to Karman in the year 621, and he and his army suffered great dis- tress in the deserts lying between Karman and India, and there were with him four thousand men, some mounted upon oxen, and some upon asses ; then he marched to Khuzistan, and conquered it, as well as the neighbouring districts of Iran. He then removed the body of his father from the island to the castle of Azdahan, and buried him there ; and \\ hen the Tatars took that castle, they dug up the body and burnt it ; this was what they did to every
EXTRACTS. 297
hostile prince whose grave they knew ; and in the same way they dug up the body of Mahmud ibn Sabaktagin at Ghazna, and burnt his bones.
Then is related what has preceded, and to which I refer for an account of the conquest by Jalal ad din of Khalat, and other places, and his encamping near a bridge in the neighbourhood of Amid ; and of his sending to request assistance from Al Malik ibn Al Malik al Aadil ; but he did not assist him ; then Jalal ad din meditated a journey to Isfahan, but changed his design, and he passed a night in a certain place, and he drank the whole of that night and became intoxicated, and the sickness of drunk- enness is the swimming of the head, and weakening of the mind; and the Tatars surrounded him and his army in the morning.
'Tis evening, and their bed is of silk, and when morning comes their bed
is the earth. And he in whose hand is the lance, is like him in whose hand is the paint
for the face.
And they who were in pursuit of him surrounded the tent* of Jalal ad din, who was sleeping intoxicated ; and one of his army, whose name was Urkhan, made an attack upon, and repulsed the Tatars from the tent ; and some of his servants entered and took Jalal ad din by the hand, and wakened him ; and he had on nothing but a white vest ; and they placed him on a horse, and Urkhan fought with the Tatars who pursued him; and Jalal ad din said to Urkhan, separate yourself from me, so that the Tatars may be occupied in following your troops ; but this was an error of his, for Urkhan who was followed by all the soldiers, being about four thousand cavalry, reached Isfahan, and remained
Khargah, Turkish and Persian for a tent, or pavilion.
298 EXTRACTS.
master of it for some time. And when Jalal ad din was alone, he rode to Amid but could not obtain entrance, and he went to one of the Villages of Mifarikin seeking Shahab ud din Ghazi ibn al Malik al Aadil prince of Mifarikin, and the Tatars over- took him in this village, and he fled to a mountain which was there, and which was inhabited by Kurds, and they took and plundered him, and were about to kill him, and he said to one of them, " / am the Sultan ; preserve my life and I imll tnaJce thee a king ," and the Kiu-d took him to his wife, and then went away to the mountain, to his companions who were there. And there came a certain Kurd holding a short spear, and he said to the woman, " Why do you not kill this KhwarizmianT'' and she said, " That would not he rights my husband has taken him uiider protection. '''' And the Kurd replied, " This is the Sultan who when at Khalat, killed a hr oilier of mine who teas a better man than he.''"' And he struck the Sultan with the spear, and killed hifti. And Jalal ad din was of dark complexion, short of stature, and Tm-kish, both in appearance and speech ; though he spoke Persian also. In the beginning of his reign, when he wrote to the Khalif, he subscribed himself " his most humble servant Mank- harniC but after he had taken Khalat, he subscribed himself only '■'his servant;''"' when uTiting to the kings of Rum, or to the kings of Eg}7)t or Syria, he wrote merely his name and the name of his Father; and never chose to %vi-ite to any one of them with the epithet of servant, or brother, or any thing of that kind ; and the inscription upon his letters was this, " Help is from God alone ;" and when he wrote to the prince of Mausel, or such as he, he used this inscription, not condescending to make use of his name ; and he wrote this with a large reed ; and he was himself styled Khuddwand i Aalam; that is. Lord of the World ; and the time of his death was - the middle of
EXTRACTS. 299
Shawwal of this year; I mean 628. And this is what I have extracted from the clironicle of Muhammad al Munshi, who was in the service of Jalal ad din, mitil he was killed ; he was his private secretary, and was much favoured and preferred by him.
It will be observed in these extracts, that the final vowels are always discarded, thus Jalal ad din for Jalalu ''1, or ud dini. This is in conformity to constant practice ; those vowels never being pronounced in conversation. It has even been questioned whether they were ever any thing more than a grammatical refinement ; but there is sufficient evidence, that anciently, they were in common use, though now only employed in poetry, and books of elevated style.
300
The chief attention of the student of Arabic Grammar should be given to the rules of Permutation, upon which depend all the irregularities of the Verb : and it will be seen, that they require only a little application, presenting in themselves no difficulty whatever. The many forms which the Plural assumes, will prove but a slight obstacle, as those in most common use are but few, and practice in reading ^\^ll soon render them familiar. In the SjTitax, it will also be found that the forms of speech which are most opposed to what may be considered the natural con- struction of a sentence, are of rare occurrence, so much so, that although the examples given in the preceding Grammar, of such inversions, are not numerous ; some of these even, are but seldom met with. The many quotations of such examples which are to be found in more voluminous Grammars, are chiefly taken from Arabian Lexicographers and Grammarians, and it may perhaps be doubted whether like constructions are always to be consi- dered as authorized by the genius of the language.
I subjoin a list of a few of the most useful books, in the order in which I think they may be read to most advantage by the student. If I may be allowed, in such a case, to follow the example of the late Mr Cobbett in recommending my owti writ- ings, I would say that the learner should first make himself a thorough master of this book, and if disposed to study the Arabian Commentators and Grammarians, he should preface that study by the careful and repeated perusal of the Grammar of M. de Sacy. For liim, however, who has no such intention, the perusal of the " Chrestomathie," followed by the " Kalilah wa Diranah," will be sufficient, and enable him to read with ease the life of Timur.
301
The Makamat of Hariri, with the Commentary of M. de Sacy, are adapted only to the use of those who desire to become pro- found Arabic scholars.
I have not taken any notice of the prosody and metre of the Arabs ; M. de Sacy and M. Ewald have each, though upon different principles, given a short treatise upon these subjects, it is my own intention, should I meet any encouragement, to pub- lish a Translation of the '■'■ Darstelluncf der Araiischen Verskunsf of M, Freytag, where they are discussed in the most complete manner.
THE END.
802
GoLii, Lexicon Arabico-Latinum, folio, Ltigd. Bat. 1653. Freytag, Lexicon Arabico-Latinum, 4 vols. 4to. Halce, 1830.
This, which is the best Arabic Dictionary, will very well admit of being bound in two vols., which will render it more convenient for constant use.
De Sacy, Grammaire Arabe, 2nd edit. 2 vols. 8vo. Paris, 1831.
Chrestomathie Arabe, 2nd edit. 3 vols, 8vo. Paris, 1827.
Anthologie Grammaticale Arabe, Svo.
Calila et Dimna en Arabe, 4to. Paris, 18l6.
Of this there is an English translation by the Rev. E. Knatchbull.
Ahmadis Arabsiadis Vita Timuri a Manger, 3 vols. 4to. Leovard, 1767.
Of this work there is an edition by Golius, but it is the Arabic text only; of which there is an edition also printed at Calcutta.
De Sacy, Les Seances de Hariri en Arabe avec un Commentaire, folio, Paris, 1821.
The peculiar style of this work, in which all the eloquence of the Arabic Language is displayed, makes it almost incapable of being translated ; should the student, however, wish to have the aid of a translation, he may use a Latin version which was published by M. Peiper, in 4to. at Hirschberg in 1832.
The following hooks will also be found of great use.
Arabum Proverbia, a G. G. Freytag, 2 vols. Svo. Bounce, 1838.
Fakihat al Khulafa, a Freytag, 4to. Bounce, 1832.
Alf Lailah wa Lailah, or the Thousand and One Nights. Arabic text by W. H. Macnaghten, Esq. 4 vols. 8vo. Calcutta.
CAMBRIDGE, PRINTED AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS.
/>> Z^^-^-
PARKER'S LIST
OP
NEW WORKS AND NEW EDITIONS. No. II.
November, 1842.
A TRANSLATION OF THE BOOK OF PSALMS, by
WILLIAM FRLXCH, D.D., lALister of Jesus Collo'-e, Cainbridrre, and Canon of Ely; and Rev. GEORGE SKINNER, M.A., late Fellow an<l Tutor of Jesus College. A New Edition, Revised, with Critical and Philological Notes. Octavo, 12s.
PRIMITIVE CHRISTIANITY, Exemplified and Illustrated by the ACTS of PRIMITIVE CHRISTIANS. By Rt. Rev. RICHARD MANT, D.D., Lord Bishop of Down and Connor. Octavo, 12s.
A MANUAL OF CHRISTIAN ANTIQUITIES; or. an
Account of the Constitution, Ministers, Worship, Discipline, and Customs of the Early Church. By the Rev. J, E. RIDDLE, M.A. 18s.
THE BIBLE CYCLOPAEDIA; a Comprehensive Digest of the
Civil and Natural History, Geography, Statistics, and General Literary Information connected with the Sacred Writings. Printed in small Folio, with several Hundred Illustrations. Volume I. 25s., bound in cloth. To be completed in Two Volumes, or in Thirty Monthly Numbers at Is. Gd. each.
BIBLE MAPS. A series of new and Accurate Maps', with
Explanatory Memoirs, and a copious Index of Scriptural and JModern Names, and forming a complete Historical and Descriptive Atlas of S-crip- ture Geography; the Ancient Authorities being verified and corrected up to the present time. By WILLIAM HUGHES, F.R.G.S. Uniform with the Bible Cyclopedia. 7*". 6(/.
LECTURES IN DIVINITY, delivered in the University of
Cambridge, by JOHN HEY, D.D., as Norrissian Professor, horn 1780 to 1795. A New Edition. Revised, in Two large Volumes. 30s.
GEIVIS of SACRED POETRY; A Collection of Beautiful
Poems from the Works of British Writers, between 1540 and 1840. Two handsome Pocket Volumes, bound and gilt. 8.^.
GEMS of SACRED LITERATURE; or, Choice Pieces from
the Works of celebrated Writers, from 1000 to 1840; with Select Passages from the Early Fathers, and an Introductory Essay on Sacred Literature. Uniformly with the above. Two Volumes. 8^.
THE CHURCHMAN'S GUIDE; a Copious Index of Sermons
and other Works, by eminent Church of England Divines. Digested and arranged accordinfr to their subjects, and brought down to the present dav. By the Rev. J. FORSTER, M.A., Incumbent of the Savoy Chapel 7s/
HISTORY of the CHURCH OF IRELAND; bv RICHARD
MANT, D.D., Lord Bishop of Down and Connor. Two large Vo- lumes, 17f. each.
^ A SELECTED LIST OF BOOKS,
THE CIVIL HISTORY of the JEWS, from Josliiia to
Adrian ; witli N()tic(^s of IMaiinors nnd Customs, Geography and Antiqui- ties. By the Rev. O. COCKAYNE, M.A., King's College, London. 4.,-. 6d.
THE EARLY CHRISTIANS; their Manners, Customs, Trials,
and Sufferings. By the Rev. W. PRIDDEN, M.A. Third Edition. 4*.
HISTORY OF THE CHRISTIAN CHURCH, from the
Ascension of Jesus Christ to the Conversion of Constantine. By the late EDWARD BURTON, D.D. Fourth Edition. 6s. 6d.
THE BOOK OF THE FATHERS of the Christian Church,
and the Spirit of their Writings. 9*. 6d.
HISTORY OF THE CHURCH OF ENGLAND, to the Revo- lution, in 1688; By THOMAS VOWLER SHORT, D.D., Lord Bishop Sudor and Man, Third Edition. 16$.
ELIZABETHAN RELIGIOUS HISTORY. Bv HENRY
SOAMES, M.A. ' 16s.
MEMOIRS of BISHOP BUTLER. By T. BARTLETT, M.A.,
one of the Preachers of Canterbury Cathedral, and Rector of Kingstone. 12s.
LIFE of ARCHBISHOP SANCROFT. By Dr. D'OYLY,
F.R.S,, Rector of Lambeth. New Edition, Revised. 9s.
*LIVES OF EMINENT CHRISTIANS. By R. B. HONE,
M.A., V'icar of Hales Owen. New Edition. Three Volumes, 4^. 6d. each.
*LIVES of BRITISH SACRED POETS. ByR.A.WILL-
MOTT, B.A., Trin. Coll. Cam. Two Volumes, 4s. 6d. each. The First Series contains an Historical Sketch of Sacred Poetry, and the Lives of the
English Sacred Poets preceding Milton. The Second Series commences with Milton, and brings down the Lives to that of Bishop
Heiser inclusive.
THE EVIDENCE of PROFANE HISTORY to the TRUTH
of REVELATION. With numerous Graphic Illustrations. Dedicated, hi/ permission, to her Majestij the Queen. 10s. 6d
^ORIGINAL FAMILY SERMONS ; by ONE HUNDRED
AND FIFTY CONTEMPORARY DIVINES OF THE ESTA- BLISHED CHURCH. Five Volumes, at 6s. 6d. each.
THE DISTRICT VISITOR'S MANUAL; a Compendium
of Practical Information for the Guidance of District Visitors, and a Library of interesting matter for the objects of their care. With a Preface, by Rev. T. DALE, and a Sermon, by Rev. C. BENSON. 4*. 6d.
THE SCRIPTURAL CHARACTER of the ENGLISH CHURCH. By DERWENT COLERIDGE, M.A. 12s.6d.
ECCLESI^ ANGLICANS VINDEX CATHOLICUS sive
Articuloruin EcclesijB Anglican? cuin Scriptis SS. Patrum nova collatio cura GULIELMI WIGAN H \RVEY, A.xM., Collegii Rcgalis Socii. Tom. I. In Toniis III. absolvetiir ()])us. 18s.
{
PUBLISHED BY JOHN' W. PARKER. o
LECTURES on the LITURGY, addressed to his Pupils. Bv
the Rev. JOHN BENT ALL, M.A., one of the Ushers of Westminster School. 5s. Gd.
THE RITUAL of the CHURCH ILLUSTRATED; with
occasional Reference to the Objections of Dissenters. Bv the Rev. GERALD WENSLEY TYRRELL, A.M., Secretary of the Down and Connor Church Education Society. Demy 12mo. 6s.
LUTHER and HIS TIMES; a History of the Rise and Progress
of the German Reformation. By the Rev. J. E. RIDDLE, M.A. 5s.
A HISTORY OF POPERY : Origin, Growth, and Progress of
the Papal Power; its Political Influence, and its Eifects on the Progress of Civilization; Present State of the Romish Church in Ireland; History of the Inquisition; Monkish Leojouds. 9s. 6d.
SCRIPTURAL GROUNDS OF UNION; Five Sermons
preached before the University of Cambridtre. By the Rev. JAMES SCHOLEFIELD, M.A., Regius Professor of Greek. 3*. 6d.
THE BETTER PROSPECTS of the CHURCPI; a Charge to
the Clercrv of the Archdeaconry of Lewes. By JULIUS CHARLES HARE, M.A. Second Edition. " Octavo, 3^.
ON THE EARLY FATHERS: an Introductory Lecture, by
the Rev. J- J. BLUNT, B.D., Lady Margaret's Professor of Divinity in the University of Cambridge. Octavo, 25.
DISCOURSES UPON THE POWERS OF THE CLERGY,
PRAYERS for the DEAD, and the LORD'S SUPPER, preached at the Temple Church ; By C. BENSON, A.M., Master of the Temple. 6*.
DISCOURSES ON TRADITION AND EPISCOPACY;
By the Same. Third Edition. 4.s.
TRADITION UNVEILED; a candid Inquiry into the Ten-
dency of the Doctrines advocated in the Oxford Tracts. By the Rev. BADEN POWELL, M.A., Savilian Professor of Geometry in the Uni- versity of Oxford. 35.; and
A SUPPLEiSIENT to Tradition Unveiled. 2s.
THE CONNEXION of NATURAL and DIVINE TRUTH ;
or, the Principles of the Inductive Philosophy, and the Study of Secondary Causes, considered as subservient to the Proof of a First Cause and the Evidences of Religion. By the Author of the above. Octavo, 9s.
STATE EDUCATION, considered with special Reference to
some Prevalent Misconceptions. By the Same Author. 3*.
THE HANDMAID, or the Pursuits of Literature and Philo- sophy, considered as sub.scrvient to the Interests of Morality and Religion. By the Rev. JOHN DA VIES, B. D., Author of uu "Estimate of the Human Mind." 4s.
4 A SELECTED LIST OF BOOKS,
PASTORAL ADDRESSES, by WILLIAM OTTER, D.D.,
late Lord Bishop of Chichester. Octavo. 6s. Gd.
PARISH SERINIONS. By JULIUS CHARLES HARE,
AI.A., Archdeacon of Lewes. Octavo, 126-.
THE VICTORY of FAITH. By the Same. Octavo, lO.^. (jd. NOTES oil the PARABLES of Our LORD. By RICHARD
CHEXEVIX TREXCH, M.A., Perpetual Curate of Curdridcre. 12s.
THE WORKS OF DOCTOR DONNE : with a Memoir of his Life. By HENRY ALFORD, M.A., Vicar of Wymeswold. Six Volumes Octavo, with a fine Portrait, after Vandyke. 3^. 12s.
CUD WORTH ON FREEWILL; now first Edited from the
Original MS., and with Notes, by JOHN ALLEN, 31. A., Chaplain of King's College, London; Inspector of Schools aided by Public Grants. 3s.
AN ILLUSTRATION of the IMETHOD of EXPLAINING
the NET\^ TESTAMENT bv the Earlv Opinions of -Jews and Christians concerning Christ. By WILLIAM AVILSON, B.D., late Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge. A New Edition, carefully revised. 8*.
ARCHBISHOP USHER'S ANSWER TO A JESUIT,
with other Tracts on Popery. 13s. 6d.
EIGHT SER:\I0NS on the ELEVENTH CHAPTER of ST. MATTHEW'S GOSPEL. By the late E. T. VAUGHAN, M.A.,
Vicar of St. ^Martin's, Leicester. Preached in 1828 and 1829. 7«- 6(/.
DISCOURSES ON REPENTANCE. By T. AINGER,
M.A., Perpetual Curate of Hampstead. 2s. 6(1.
THE CONSTITUTION of the VISIBLE CHURCH of
CHRIST, considered in Eight Discourses, preached before the University of Cambridge. By the Rev. RICHARD PARKINSON, B.D., Fellow of Christ's College, in Manchester. Octavo, 9s. 6d.
GARRICK'S INSTRUCTIONS for READING the LI- TURGY. With Notes, and a Discourse on Public Reading, by RICH ARD CULL, Tutor in Elocution. Octavo, as. Qd.
THE BOOK OF COMMON PRAYER ILLUSTRATED,
so as to show its various Modifications, the Date of its several Parts, and the Authority on which thev rest. With an Appendix of important Docu- ments. By WILLIAM KEATING CLAY, B.D., Minor Canon of Ely. 7*'- 6d.
NOTES on the PRAYER-BOOK VERSION of the PSALMS,
with copious Marginal References. By the Same. 7^. 6d.
PUBLISHED BY JOHN W. PARKER. 5
THE HYMNS of the CHURCH, Mostly Primitive, Collected,
Translated, jind arran^red for Public Use. By the Rev. J. CHANDLER, M A., Vicar of Witley. ]«. dd.
PORTIONS of the PSALMS, in Eno-lish Verse, selected for Public Worship. By JULIUS CHARLES HARE, M.A., Archdeacon of Lewes. 2s. 6d.
PSALMS and HYIMNS for PUBLIC WORSHIP; Selected
and Revised by the Rev. -J. E. RIDDLE, M.A. Is.
THE MINISTRATION of PUBLIC BAPTISM of IN-
FANTS, and the form of receivinor Children who have been privately baptized into Christ's flock, arranged as one service. Is. 6d.
OFFICE FOR THE VISITATION OF THE SICK; with
Notes and Explanations, by the late Archdeacon COXE. Is. 6d.
SCRIPTURAL BREVIATES; or, Short Compendiums of Faith
and Practice, for the use of the Sick; Nos. 1 to 50; Price Is. per Set, or 2s. per 100 co])ies of any selected number ; or, a set, bound in a Volume, 2s-.
FULLER'S HISTORY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CAM- BRIDGE. Edited, with Notes, bv the late Rev. M. PRICKETT, M.A., and T. WRIGHT, M.A., Trinity College, Cambridge. 12s.
LETTERS, STATUTES, and other DOCUJMENTS, illustrative
of the History of the University of Cambridge, during the time of the Reformation. By JOHN LAMB, D.D., Dean of Bristol. 10s. 6d.
ON THE STATUTES OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CAM- BRIDGE. By GEORGE PEACOCK, D.D., V.P.R.S., Dean of Ely, and Lowndes's Professor of Astronomy in the L'niversity. 9s. 6d.
A DISCOURSE on the STUDIES of the UNIVERSITY of CAMBRIDGE. By PROFESSOR SEDGWICK. Fourth Edit. 4s.
PRINCIPLES of ENGLISH UNIVERSITY EDUCATION.
By the Rev. PROFESSOR WHEWELL, F.R.S. Second Edition, 5s.
THE CAMBRIDGE PORTFOLIO; Papers illustrative of the
Scholastic and Social State, the History, Antiquities and Literature of the University. Contributed by Members. Edited by the Rev. J. J. SMITH, ^l.h... Fellow and Tutor of Caius College. Two handsome Vo- lumes, Royal Quarto, with numerous Illustrations. Al. As.
BISHOP HALLIFAX ON THE CIVIL LAW ; with AD-
DiTiONs, by Dr. GELD ART, Professor of the CivihLaw, Cambridge. 8s. bW,
UNIVERSAL MYTHOLOGY ; an Account of the most im- portant Mythological Systems, with Considerations on the Koran and the Talmud. By the Rev. H.CHRISTMAS, F.S.A., St. John's Coll., Camb. 7s.
ARUNDINES CAJNII, Sive Musarum Cantabrigiensium Lusus
Canori, coUegit atque edidit HENRICUS DRURY, M. A. Ornament- ally printed, 12s.
6 A SELECTED LIST OF BOOKS,
THL: public economy of ATIIENS, by Professor
BCECKH. Translated from tlie German by G. CORNEWALL I.EWIS, Esq., A.M., late Student of Christ Church ; one of the Translators of Muller's Dorians. New Edition, Revised. Octavo, 18s.
PINDAR'S EPINICIAN ODES AND THE FRAGMENTS
OF HIS LOST COMPOSITIONS. Revised and explained by the Rev. JOHN WILLIAM DONALDSON, M.A., Head Master of the Bury School. Octavo, J 6s.
A LIFE OF ARISTOTLE, including a Critical Discussion of
some Questions of Literary History connected with his "Works. By J. W. BLAKESLEY, M.A., Fellow of Trin. Coll., Cambridge. 8s. Qd.
TPIE CAMBRIDGE GREEK AND ENGLISH TESTA-
]\IENT; Stephens' Greek and the Authorized English Version, in Parallel Columns on the same Page. 8s. Qd.
THE GREEK TEXT of the ACTS OF THE APOSTLES ;
with Notes, Original and Selected. By H. ROBINSON, D.D. 8s.
A SELECTION from the GREEK VERSES of SHREWS- BURY SCHOOL ; with a Short Account of the Iambic Metre and Style of Greek Tragedy, and Progressive Exercises in Greek Tragic Senarii. 8s.
EXAMINATION PAPERS of SHREWSBURY SCHOOL:
with a Preface on Classical Examinations. By B. H. KENNEDY, D.D., Head Master of Shrewsbury School.
THE SPEECHES OF DEMOSTHENES, against Aphobus
and Onetor ; translated, with Notes explanatory of the Athenian Laws and Institutions. By CHARLES RANN KENNEDY, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. Octavo, 9s.
THE IPHIGENIA IN AULIS of EURIPIDES, with English
Notes. The Cambridge Edition. 8s.
STEMMATA ATHENIENSIA; Tables of Biography, Chro-
noloo-y, and History, to facilitate the Study of the Greek Classics. 5s.
DISSERTATIONS on the EUMENIDES of ^SCHYLUS,
with the Greek Text, and Critical Remarks. From the German of MULLER. 9s. Qd.
THE FROGS of ARISTOPHANES, with English Notes
for Students. By the Rev. H. P. COOKESLEY. Is.
SCHLEIERMACHER'S INTRODUCTIONS TO THE
DIALOGUES of PLATO ; translated from the German, by WILLIAM DOBSON, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. 12s. <6d.
THE AULULARIA of PLAUTUS, with Notes by JAMES
HILDYARD, M.A., Fellow of Christ's College, Cambridge. * "Js. 6d.
THE MENCECHMEI of PLAUTUS, with a Glossary and
Notes. By the Editor of the above. A New Edition. 7*"- f>(/.
PUBLISHED BY JOHN \V. PARKER.
THE FIGURES of EUCLID ; with Questions, and a Praxis of
Geometrical Exercises. By Rev. J. EDWARDS, Kino's Coll. Lon<l. 3.v.
A COMPANION to EUCLID ; being a help to the Under- standing and Rememberintr of the First Four Books. is.
THE MECHANICAL EUCLID. By the Rev. PROFESSOR
WHEWELL, blaster of Trinity Collecre, Cambridge. 5s. inl.
THE MECHANICS OF ENGINEERING, intended for use
in Universities and in Colleges of Engineers. By the same. 9*'. Also,
WHEWELL'S DOCTRINE OF LIMITS, with its Applica-
tions ; namely, The First Three Sections of Xewton — Conic Sections — The Differential Calculus. {)s.
HALLS ALGEBRA.— The ELEMENTS of ALGEBRA,
chiefly intended for Schools and the -Junior Classes in Colleges. By the Rev. PROF. HALL, of King's Coll., London. Qs. 6d.; also, by tlu' Same,
HALL'S DIFFERENTIAL and INTEGRAL CALCULUS.
Third Edition, improved. 12*-. (id.
EXA^.IPLES of the PROCESSES of the DIFFERENTIAL
and INTEGRAL CALCULUS. Collected l)y D. F. GREGORY, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. Octavo, \Qs
LECTURES upon TRIGONOMETRY, and the Application
of Algebra to Geometry. Second Edition, corrected. 7*'- ^^d.
DYNAMICS, or a TREATISE on ISIOTION. Bj SAJMUEL
EARNSHAW, M.A., of St. -John's College, Cambridge. Octavo, 14a-.
THEORY OF HEAT. Bj the Rev. PROFESSOR KEL-
LAND, M.A., F.R.S., of the University of Edinburgh. 9^.
LECTURES on ASTRONO^SIY, delivered at KINGS COL- LEGE, London, by PROFESSOR MOSELEY, M.A., F.RS. With numerous Illustrations. 5s. bV/. ; also,
*MOSELEY'S MECHANICS APPLIED TO THE ARTS.
By the Same. New Edition. With numerous Engravings. 6s. dd.
DANIELL'S CHEMICAL PHILOSOPHY : being a prepara-
tory View of the Forces which concur to the Production of Chemical Phe- nomena. By PROF. DANIELL, F.R.S., of King's College, London. 1 iis.
PRACTICAL GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY; with
Instructions for the Qualitative ANALYSIS of MINERALS. By JOSHUA TRIMMER, F.G.S. Two Hundred AVood-Cuts. 12s.
PRINCIPLES OF MECHANISM. By. R. WILLIS, M.A.,
F.R.S., Jacksonian Professor in the Universjity of Cambridge. With numerous illustrations. 15s.
THE UNDULATORY THEORY, AS APPLIED TO THE DISPERSION OF LIGHT. By the Rev. Prof. POWELL, M. A., F.R.S., 9^.
8 A SELECTED LIST OF BOOKS.
THREE LETTERS to the Rev. W. PALMER, Fellow and
Tutor of Maodalono College, Oxford, on the Name " PROTESTANT ;" on the SEEMINGLY AMBIGUOUS CIIARACTEU of the ENGLISH CHURCH ; and on the BISHOPRICK at JERUSALEM. With an APPENDIX, containinfj some Remarks on a Pamphlet of J. R. Hope, Esq., entitled " The Bishopric of the United Church of England and Ireland, at Jerusalem, considered in a Letter to a Friend." By the Rev. F. D. MAURICE, A.]\I., Chaplain of Guy's Hospital, and Professor of Eiifflish Literature at King's College, London, Second Edition, with Additions. 3s.
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS and ANSWERS, from Mo-
shcim's Ecclesiastical History^ for the Use of Students in Divinity. As. (it/.
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS and ANSWERS, from
Burnet on the Thirty-Nine Articles. By the Author of the above. Is.
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS and ANSWERS on BidWs
Analogy. By the Rev. Sir G. W. CRAUFURD, Bart., M.A. Is. M.
PALEY'S EVIDENCES EPITOMISED; with a yiew to
exhibit his Argument in a small compass, without omitting or weakening any of its component parts. 5s.
ON THE FOUNDATIONS OF MORALS: Four Sermons
preached before the University of Cambridge. By Professor WHEWELL, B.D., Master of Trinity College. New Edition, with a Preface. 3s. 6f/.
THE NEW CRATYLUS ; or, CONTRIBUTIONS towards a
more Accurate Knowledge of the Greek Language. Bv the Rev. -I. W. DONALDSON, M. A., Head Master of the Bury School. ' 1 Is.
SYNCHRONOLOGY : a Treatise on the History, Chronology^
and ]\Iythology of the Ancient Egyptians, Greeks, and Phoenicians, and the Harmony between the Chronology of those Nations and that of the Holy Scriptures. By the Rev. CHARLES CROSTPIWAITE. 15s.
'^T\}rhT] THE GUIDE of the HEBREW STUDENT; con-
taining an Epitome of Sacred History, with Easy Passages in Pure Bib- lical Hebrew, with Keys, and Glossary, adapted for English Learners. By II. H. BERNARD, Hebrew Teacher in the University of Camb. 10.?. 6^.
LEO'S HEBREW GRAMMAR for the Use of Schools and
Students in the Universities. 12s. Qd.
THE CHALDEE TEXT OF Daniel, V., and the SYRIAC
of St. Matthew, VI. I — 13, analyzed ; for the use of Students. By the Rev. T. R. BROWN, M.A. 3s. U.
ELEMENTS OF SYRIAC GRAMMAR, by the Rev. G.
PHILLIPS, M.A., Fellow and Tutor of Queen's College, Cambridge. lOs.
A PRACTICAL ARABIC GRAISIMAR. By DUNCAN
STEWART. Octavo, 16s.
FRAGJNIENTS OF THE GREEK COMIC WRITERS, with
Latin and English Notes. By JAMES BAILEY, M.A., Trin. Coll. Camh. Octavo, 9s. Qd.
London: JOHN W. PARKER, Publisher, West Stuand.
VJ^
^
r
'j^
,D Pi,
Cd CO;
00
H O H
bp
•d
cd <4
C!
•H o.
o s .t:
University of Toronto Library
DO NOT
REMOVE
THE
CARD
FROM
THIS
Acme Library Card Pocket
Under Pat. "Ref. Index Fi.e"
Made by LIBRARY BUREAU